Gilson-UniPoint-System-Software-User

Transcription

UniPoint™ System Software
User’s Guide
LT2137©1998 Gilson, Inc. All rights reserved
January 1998
Exercise 3-Creating operations list ................................... 4-22
Create and name operations list ................................ 4-22
Set up steps ..................................................................... 4-23
Identify sample descriptions ....................................... 4-25
Save operations list and close its window ................ 4-26
Exercise 4-Viewing calibrations ........................................ 4-27
Exercise 5-Viewing data file .............................................. 4-29
Exercise 6-Viewing report file ........................................... 4-33
Exercise 7-Re-Analyzing data ........................................... 4-35
5 Common Procedures
Using the navigator ............................................................. 5-2
File maintenance .................................................................. 5-3
Creating a directory ...................................................... 5-4
Creating a file ................................................................. 5-5
Opening an existing file ............................................... 5-6
Saving an untitled file .................................................. 5-7
Saving a named file ...................................................... 5-8
Making a copy of a file ................................................. 5-8
Deleting files and directories ....................................... 5-9
Specifying default font for document windows ............ 5-10
Working in the table pane .................................................. 5-12
Displaying the table if it is not shown ....................... 5-12
Sizing the table pane .................................................... 5-13
Changing column width using the mouse ............... 5-14
Setting column attributes ............................................. 5-14
Manipulating table rows ............................................. 5-17
Changing the table font ............................................... 5-17
Finding and replacing information ........................... 5-19
Working in the graph pane ............................................... 5-21
Displaying the graph pane if it is not visible ........... 5-22
Sizing the graph pane .................................................. 5-22
Sizing and moving the graph ..................................... 5-23
Sizing and moving a summary graph ....................... 5-23
Changing the font ......................................................... 5-24
Setting graph attributes ............................................... 5-26
Removing items from display ..................................... 5-28
Displaying/removing gridlines .................................. 5-28
Legend ................................................................................... 5-29
Annotation ............................................................................ 5-30
Manipulating the toolbar ................................................... 5-32
Using the notes or log file text editor ............................... 5-34
Using the browse feature within dialogs ........................ 5-37
Customizing the UniPoint workspace ............................. 5-38
Arranging elements in a workspace .......................... 5-38
Saving a workspace ...................................................... 5-39
Opening a workspace file ............................................ 5-40
Printing .................................................................................. 5-41
Specifying printer setup options ................................ 5-41
Selecting what to print and starting the print ......... 5-42
Transferring information between files ........................... 5-44
Gettng software version number ...................................... 5-46
6 Control Methods
Control Method window ................................................... 6-2
Checking configuration file ............................................... 6-5
Assigning descriptions ........................................................ 6-6
Additional device control parameters ............................. 6-9
Mobile phase settings ................................................... 6-9
Data channel parameters ............................................ 6-11
Injector options .............................................................. 6-14
Detector options ............................................................ 6-15
Fraction collector options ............................................ 6-15
Interface only and contact event option ................... 6-16
High and low temperature limits ............................... 6-17
Scheduling timed events ..................................................... 6-18
Constructing a mobile phase profile .......................... 6-20
Device commands ............................................................... 6-21
Pumps .............................................................................. 6-22
Data channels ................................................................ 6-22
Contacts .......................................................................... 6-23
Detector ........................................................................... 6-23
Injector and its syringe pump or dilutor .................. 6-27
Fraction collector ........................................................... 6-30
System interface ............................................................ 6-32
System (computer) control .......................................... 6-32
Valve actuator ............................................................... 6-33
Temperature regulator (or column oven) ................. 6-34
Rack temperature regulator ........................................ 6-34
Pressure regulator (controller) .................................... 6-35
GSIOC-to-RS-232 converter ........................................ 6-35
GSIOC command strings ................................................... 6-36
Variables ................................................................................ 6-38
Error handling ...................................................................... 6-40
7 Analysis Methods
Analysis Method window .................................................. 7-2
Setting analysis conditions ................................................. 7-4
Integration events ......................................................... 7-5
Channel scales ............................................................... 7-10
Peak table ........................................................................ 7-13
Naming peaks ................................................................ 7-14
Entering level information for peaks ......................... 7-16
Indicating internal standard peak(s) ......................... 7-18
Grouping peaks ............................................................. 7-19
Additional peak options .............................................. 7-20
Background removal .................................................... 7-21
Producing reports ................................................................ 7-22
Report type ..................................................................... 7-22
Report output ................................................................. 7-26
Report format review and modification ................... 7-31
Report customization ................................................... 7-34
Variables ................................................................................ 7-39
Error handling ...................................................................... 7-41
8 Operations
Operations window ............................................................ 8-2
Setting up an operations list .............................................. 8-5
Using express entry dialog for list setup ................... 8-6
Using step entry dialog for list setup and
modification ................................................................... 8-8
Using the tray file to generate the operations list ... 8-11
Setting up operations list for fraction collection ..... 8-12
Generating operations list when re-injecting
collected fractions ......................................................... 8-13
Modifying the operations list using edit menu .............. 8-15
Reviewing where run-generated files are stored .... 8-16
9 Programmed Run
Method Executor ................................................................. 9-2
Starting a run ....................................................................... 9-3
During the run ..................................................................... 9-4
Manipulating run-time graph .................................... 9-4
Interrupting a run ......................................................... 9-7
Resuming a run after termination ............................. 9-8
After the run ......................................................................... 9-10
Status of UniPoint ......................................................... 9-10
Shutting down the HPLC system .............................. 9-11
Viewing log file .............................................................. 9-11
10 Manual HPLC System Control
Manual control method ...................................................... 10-2
Control of mobile phase pumps and
manometric module ............................................................ 10-3
Strip chart control ............................................................... 10-5
Contact control .................................................................... 10-7
Control of injector, detector, collector,
computer, and other devices ............................................. 10-8
GSIOC command strings ................................................... 10-9
11 Results
Results window .................................................................... 11-2
Opening report and data files ........................................... 11-6
Selecting report file information to view .................. 11-6
Selecting data file information to view ..................... 11-8
Locating and opening a data file using
sample description ........................................................ 11-12
Overlaying (or merging) additional
chromatogram data ...................................................... 11-14
Analyzing data or analyzing it in a different way ....... 11-16
Linking to an analysis method ................................... 11-16
Linking to a calibration file ......................................... 11-18
Linking to a control method ....................................... 11-20
Manipulating graph and table .......................................... 11-22
Viewing and scaling techniques in graph pane ...... 11-22
Peak integration techniques ........................................ 11-27
Generating new report file ................................................. 11-31
Comparison commands ..................................................... 11-32
12 Calibrations
Calibration window ............................................................ 12-2
Building calibrations ........................................................... 12-4
Viewing calibrations ........................................................... 12-5
Merging calibrations ........................................................... 12-9
Error messages ..................................................................... 12-10
13 Batch Re-Analysis Processing
Re-Analysis window ........................................................... 13-2
Setting up a re-analysis list ................................................ 13-4
Using express entry dialog for list setup ................... 13-5
Using step entry dialog for list setup and
modification ................................................................... 13-7
Modifying the re-analysis list using edit menu ........ 13-10
Indicating baseline adjustment ......................................... 13-11
Reviewing where files are stored ...................................... 13-11
Previewing the re-analysis ................................................. 13-13
Executing the re-analysis ................................................... 13-14
Resuming a re-analysis after termination ....................... 13-15
14 Protocols
Protocol windows ................................................................ 14-2
Overview of creating a protocol ....................................... 14-4
Issuing commands ............................................................... 14-6
Variables ................................................................................ 14-8
Saving the protocol file ....................................................... 14-10
Synchronizing injector protocol and control method .. 14-11
Gilson-supplied protocols ................................................... 14-12
Updating protocol configuration ............................... 14-13
Checking protocol ......................................................... 14-14
15 Routines
Routines windows ............................................................... 15-2
Overview of creating routines ........................................... 15-4
Issuing commands ............................................................... 15-7
Viewing and modifying routines via the edit menu ..... 15-8
Variables ................................................................................ 15-10
Saving a routine and the routines file .............................. 15-12
Gilson-supplied routines file .............................................. 15-13
Updating routines’ configuration ..................................... 15-14
16 Tray Editor
Starting the tray editor ....................................................... 16-2
Tray editor window ............................................................ 16-2
Setting up a tray file ............................................................ 16-4
Choosing a template ..................................................... 16-4
Defining racks ................................................................ 16-5
Setting up and modifying zone names ..................... 16-7
Assigning zone and number to tubes ........................ 16-8
Viewing techniques ............................................................. 16-11
Managing tray files .............................................................. 16-14
Printing tray files ................................................................. 16-16
Identifying custom racks and tubes ................................. 16-18
Quitting the tray editor ................................................ 16-20
17 Extract, Import, and Export Features
Extracting archived information ...................................... 17-2
Importing data ..................................................................... 17-3
Viewing Gilson 160 chromatogram ........................... 17-3
Viewing chromatogram from non-Gilson detector 17-5
Exporting data and reports ............................................... 17-6
Exporting chromatogram data ................................... 17-6
Exporting report information ..................................... 17-8
Exporting calibration information ............................. 17-10
Appendix A
System Configuration
Working with configuration files ...................................... A-2
Reviewing configuration file ............................................. A-2
Modifying the configuration file ....................................... A-3
Searching for configuration file ........................................ A-4
Scanning the GSIOC for devices ....................................... A-5
Specifying system units ...................................................... A-6
Saving changes to the configuration file ......................... A-7
Configuration checks .......................................................... A-7
Appendix B
Sample Tracking
Before the run ....................................................................... B-2
After the run ......................................................................... B-6
Appendix C
File Extensions
Appendix D
Password Protection
Setting up password protection ........................................ D-2
Indicating new password .................................................. D-3
Removing password protection ........................................ D-3
Unlocking columns in operations or re-analysis list ..... D-4
Appendix E
Merging Security Keys
Appendix F
Calculations
Appendix G
Peak Table
Retention time windows .................................................... G-1
Description ..................................................................... G-1
Setting time window parameters ............................... G-2
Resolving overlapping windows ................................ G-3
Using the peak table during data analysis ..................... G-4
Locating reference peaks ............................................. G-5
Locating non-reference peaks ..................................... G-6
Updating peak retention times ................................... G-7
Generating a calibration table ........................................... G-8
Appendix H
715 Data Translator
Appendix I
GSIOC Utility
Using the GSIOC utility within Windows 95/NT ........ I-1
Using the GSIOC utility within Windows 3.1 ............... I-3
Appendix J
GILSON.SYS Device Driver File
Appendix K
GSIOC Configuration Utility
Appendix L
Gilson Executable (.GEX) File
Appendix M
UniPoint Software History
Index
1
Software Installation and Startup
This section describes how to install the Gilson UniPoint System
Software and its supporting files and how to start the software.
before you begin
UniPoint requires a set of programs called Microsoft® Windows (Version 95/NT™ or Version 3.1™). For information on installing and
using Windows, refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide.
Note: The window and dialog box examples in this user's guide are
from UniPoint running under Windows 95.
Verify that the UniPoint security key is in place. The key must be
installed in the Key port of a Gilson 506C System Interface. Refer to
the UniPoint System Installation Guide if necessary.
Note: If your system has a Gilson 506B System Interface or 621 Data
Master, contact Gilson. Your system must include a 506C System
Interface, and the key must be installed in its Key port, to run
UniPoint.
January 1998
1-1
unipoint user's guide
Installing UniPoint software package
After Microsoft Windows is installed, you can install UniPoint. The
procedures for installing UniPoint vary depending on whether your
computer has Microsoft Windows 95/NT or Windows 3.1. Installation
also varies depending on whether this is the first time you are installing
UniPoint. Refer to the appropriate instructions below.
You can install UniPoint on a computer’s fixed disk or on a network
drive so multiple computers can access it.
Installing UniPoint under Windows 95/NT
if you are installing UniPoint
for the first time
Follow these procedures:
1 Turn off then on your computer and start Windows.
2 Insert UniPoint Disk 1 into a floppy drive of the computer.
3 On the Windows desktop, click on Start.
4 From the Start menu, click on Run.
5 When the Run box appears, type a:\setup.exe (or b:\setup.exe if the
disk is in drive B). Then click on Ok.
6 Follow the on-screen instructions to install UniPoint and its
supporting files.
7 When the Setup Complete box appears, ensure that the Yes, I will
restart my computer now option button is selected. Remove the
UniPoint installation disk, then click on Finish to complete
installation and restart the computer.
if UniPoint was previously
installed and you are
updating it to a newer
version
Note: If you do not restart the computer before installing UniPoint,
you may see the following error message during installation:
An error occurred during the move data process: -115
If this message appears, remove installation disk from floppy
drive and restart the computer.
1-2
January 1998
software installation and startup
2 On the Windows desktop, delete the icons with the following labels.
To delete each icon, click on its picture with the mouse pointer and
then press the Delete key on the computer’s keyboard.
UniPoint v1.xx
UniPoint v1.xx Update Info
GSIOC Utility
Key Utility
715 Data Translator (if present)
This step deletes the icons and prevents duplicates from being
displayed after installation. It does not delete the files associated
with the icons. The files are replaced during UniPoint installation
and new icons are displayed.
4 On the Windows desktop, click on Start.
5 From the Start menu, click on Run.
supporting files.
8 When the Setup Complete box appears, ensure that the Yes, I will
restart my computer now option button is selected. Remove the
UniPoint installation disk, then click on Finish to complete
installation and restart the computer.
Installing UniPoint under Windows 3.1
if you are installing UniPoint
for the first time
3 In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.
supporting files.
January 1998
1-3
6 If your computer does not require Win32S installation, click on the
Yes, I want to restart my computer now option button when the Setup
Complete box appears. Remove the UniPoint installation disk, then
click on Finish to complete installation and restart the computer.
If your computer requires Win32S installation, do the following:
a) When the Setup Complete box appears, click on the No, I will restart
my computer later option button, remove the UniPoint installation
disk, and click on Finish.
b) Insert the Win32S Disk 1 into a floppy drive of the computer.
c) In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.
d) When the Run box appears, type a:\setup32.exe (or b:\setup32.exe if
the disk is in drive B). Then click on Ok.
e) Follow the on-screen instructions.
f) When installation completes, remove the Win32S installation disk
and restart the computer.
if UniPoint was previously
installed and you are
updating it to a newer
version
2 In the Program Manager, delete the icons with the following labels.
To delete each icon, click on its picture with the mouse pointer and
then press the Delete key on the computer’s keyboard.
UniPoint v1.xx
UniPoint v1.xx Update Info
GSIOC Utility
Key Utility
715 Data Translator (if present)
This step deletes the icons and prevents duplicates from being
displayed after installation. It does not delete the files associated with
the icons. The files are replaced during UniPoint installation and
new icons are displayed.
4 In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.
5 When the Run box appears, type a:\setup.exe (or b:\setup.exe if the disk
is in drive B). Then click on Ok.
supporting files.
7 When installation completes, remove the UniPoint installation disk
and restart the computer.
1-4
January 1998
Starting UniPoint
startup
To start UniPoint, do the following:
1 Start Microsoft Windows.
2 Double-click on the UniPoint icon in the Gilson Applications box.
You see the UniPoint startup screen. The startup screen displays for
approximately 30 seconds while the software is loading.
Note: The startup screen will display the text UniPoint System
Software with SF Pressure Control if you purchased that software
package.
after the startup screen
If this is the first time the software has been started, you see a message
box when the startup screen disappears. This box tells you that the
software is going to scan the Gilson Serial Input/Output Channel
(GSIOC). See Setting up configuration file(s) on page 1-7.
If UniPoint has been opened previously, you see the UniPoint window
with the Navigator window open within it (see figure on next page).
The Navigator enables you to quickly select the part of UniPoint to use.
For more information on the Navigator, see page 5-2.
January 1998
1-5
if the software fails to start
Any of several situations can prevent UniPoint from starting as expected. If you see an error message at startup, follow the instructions
that appear.
• If any of the device drivers are missing or outdated, try re-installing
the software as described in this section.
• If the security key is missing, install it as described in Section 3 of the
UniPoint System Installation Guide. Then restart the computer.
• If the key for a different Gilson software product is in the Key port of
the 506C System Interface, either install the proper key and restart the
computer or merge the codes from both keys. Refer to Appendix E in
this manual.
1-6
January 1998
Setting up configuration file(s)
After installing UniPoint and starting it for the first time, you see a
message box telling you that the software is going to scan the Gilson
Serial Input/Output Channel (GSIOC).
1 Do one of the following:
• If you are controlling one HPLC system with UniPoint, ensure that
Gilson devices are connected along the GSIOC and powered on.
Then click on OK and proceed to step 2.
• If you are running multiple HPLC systems, click on Cancel. Then
click on Cancel again to exit the Default System Configuration
dialog and proceed with setting configurations for multiple
HPLC systems on page 1-8.
2 If the scan locates any Gilson devices that require additional setup
information, a dialog box appears. Indicate the requested
information and click on OK.
When the scan completes, the configuration file (DEFAULT.CFG) is
created and its information appears in the Default System
Configuration dialog. The computer and Gilson 811 Mixer (if two or
more pumps are found) are automatically added to the list in
addition to any other Gilson devices that were found.
3 Check that all installed Gilson devices are named in the Unit ID/
Installed Devices list box. If not, you need to add the device by
choosing its description in the Known Devices list box, indicating its
unit ID, and choosing Add. Refer to the Note on the next page.
January 1998
1-7
Note: When adding a 402 Syringe Pump, select the description
specifying how the pump is configured: 402 Dual Syringe
Pump, 402 Dual Syringe Pump w/ Tee, 402 Left Syringe Pump,
or 402 Right Syringe Pump.
When adding a 122 Fluorometer, choose the 122 Fluorometer/
606 Converter description. Do not include the converter as a
separate device when used with the fluorometer.
If you have a 133 RI Detector connected to a 606 GSIOC to RS232 Converter, the software-selected description of 606 GSIOC
to RS-232 Converter is appropriate.
If you are using a 233 XL or 215 for both injection and
collection, the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box must include
the device as an Auto Injector and a Fraction Collector. If you
scanned the GSIOC, the scan identifies the device as an Auto
Injector. You must add the device as a Fraction Collector to the
Unit ID/Installed Devices list box. When you add the device
as a Fraction Collector, use the same unit ID as the Auto
Injector device.
For a 232 XL or 233 XL Injector, the setup options request the
location of the right rinse station. If the rinse station is located
above the right valve, choose Right. If the rinse station is
located to the left of the right valve, choose Center.
4 Choose OK to exit the Default System Configuration dialog. If you
made changes to the file, the software prompts you to save the
changes. Save them to the same configuration file.
The UniPoint application window appears, with the Navigator open
within it (see page 1-6).
setting configurations for
multiple HPLC systems
If you are running more than one HPLC system from UniPoint, you
must create a configuration file for each of those systems. Store each
configuration file in its own directory and store any files that use the
configuration there also.
GSIOC unit IDs for all Gilson devices in the systems must be unique.
Plus, all configurations share the computer and the 506C System
Interface.
On the next page is an example Gilson HPLC onfiguration whose
modules have been separated into two systems, identified as System 1
and System 2. All Gilson GSIOC modules are connected along the
GSIOC.
1-8
January 1998
1 Create a directory for each configuration using the File Manager,
accessed via UniPoint's File menu. If you need help using the File
Manager, refer to its on-line help.
2 When finished creating directories, exit the File Manager using its
File menu. The UniPoint application window re-appears, with the
Navigator open within it (see page 1-6).
3 Choose Default System Configuration from the File menu to display
the Default System Configuration dialog.
4 Click on Install.
5 When the additional options appear in the dialog box:
a) Choose the device in the Known Devices list box.
b) Verify or enter its unit ID in the Unit ID text box.
c) Choose Add.
d) If the device requires additional setup information, the Setup
dialog appears. Indicate the requested information and choose
OK.
e) Repeat the above for each additional device.
January 1998
1-9
6 When finished adding devices, choose Save. When the Save As
dialog appears, use its options to indicate a name for the
configuration file and where the configuration file will be stored.
Then choose OK to save the configuration file.
7 When the Default System Configuration dialog re-appears, use the
procedures in steps 5 and 6 to create configuration files for each
additional HPLC system.
8 When finished creating configuration files, choose OK to exit the
Default System Configuration dialog.
The UniPoint application window appears, with the Navigator open
within it (see page 1-6).
Following are Default System Configuration dialogs for the example
systems, System 1 and System 2, shown on page 1-9. Notice that the
system interface and computer system are identified in the configurations for both systems. An 811 Mixer is installed in both systems;
however, since mixers do not have a unit ID, they are identified by an *
in the configurations. Also, notice the files are stored in different
directories.
1-10
January 1998
2 Background Information
Getting help
On-line help has been included with UniPoint and can be accessed any
time you are using UniPoint. It describes commands and dialogs and
discusses procedures used to perform tasks.
Technical notes
The following topic-specific UniPoint Technical Notes are available
upon request from your local Gilson representative.
122 Fluorometer Control
133 Refractive Index Detector Control
170 Diode Array Detector Control
Autopreparative System Control
Fraction Collector Control
Multi-System Setup
Sample Tracking
Supercritical Fluid System Control
Using the 215/819 for Injection
Using the 215/819 for Injection and Collection
Using the 233 XL for Injection and Collection
January 1998
2-1
Overview of UniPoint
UniPoint is a multi-document software package that runs under Microsoft Windows. UniPoint is divided into these function-specific
sections:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
control methods
analysis methods
operations lists
results
calibrations
re-analysis lists
protocols and routines
Each of these sections has its own window for specifying run-time or
post-run options or for viewing chromatographic results. More than one
window of the same type or of different types can be open at the same
time.
Note: If you are not familiar with the Windows user interface, please
refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide.
Even though the software is separated into several sections, the parts are
interdependent. Information set in one window may be used in or
required by another window for proper operation. You use different
windows depending on what you want to do.
2-2
January 1998
background information
As the diagram below shows, before a run, you set up information in
Control Method, Analysis Method, and Operations windows, and
optionally in the Protocol and Routines windows.
To start a run and view run-time information, you use the Operations
window.
After the run, use the Results and Calibration windows to view acquired
data and analysis report information.
To batch analyze collected data to generate reports and calibration plots,
use the Re-Analysis window.
January 1998
2-3
Default directory and file organization
The following diagram shows the default locations to which UniPoint
and files created by it are stored, unless changed by you during installation or when operating the software.
2-4
January 1998
3 Getting Started
After installing UniPoint, you can ensure that it is communicating with
Gilson GSIOC (Gilson Serial Input/Output Channel) devices in your
HPLC system.
To check communication, you create a “manual control method” that
assigns descriptions to GSIOC devices, contact connections, and data
channels. After the control method is created, you use manual control to
“talk” to devices.
This section takes you through the procedures for setting up a manual
control method. The control methods that you create for your applications can be based on this method.
Multi-system users. If UniPoint controls multiple systems, you must
choose the correct configuration file (File menu/Default System Configuration command); see page A-2 if necessary. Then repeat the steps in
Setting up manual control method and Checking and controlling
devices for each HPLC system.
January 1998
3-1
Setting up manual control method
The manual control method assigns names to devices, contact connections, and data channels.
1 If necessary, display the Navigator by choosing its command from
the File menu. On the Navigator, choose the Control Method square
and then choose New.
The Control Method window appears.
review pump descriptions
and set parameters
To check the default descriptions assigned to installed Gilson pumps
and assign refill speed and compressibility parameters:
1 Choose Mobile Phase from the Device menu.
2 When the Mobile Phase dialog box appears, review the default
description, based on unit ID, that UniPoint assigned to each pump.
3-2
January 1998
getting started
3 (Optional) To assign a different description to a pump based on the
liquid it pumps:
a) Click on the first pump in the list box.
b) Type a description in the Description text box, for example, Water.
c) Choose Change.
d) Repeat for each pump.
4 Click on Settings to display the Pump Settings dialog.
a) Click on the first pump in the list box.
b) Indicate a compressibility and refill speed for the liquid being
pumped. If necessary, refer to the on-line help for more
information on compressibility and refill speed.
c) Repeat for each additional pump.
d) Choose OK to accept the settings.
Note: If you are controlling a Gilson Supercritical Fluid System, use
the SF Setting button to reveal the Inlet Pressure P0 text box.
Click on the description assigned to the supercritical fluid
pump. In the Inlet Pressure P0 box, type the pressure at the
pump's inlet, typically 6 MPa (60 bar or 870 psi) at 22° C. A
table of inlet pressures at other temperatures is shown in the
on-line help.
5 Choose OK to exit the Mobile Phase dialog.
assign data channel
descriptions
For each data channel to acquire, assign a description.
1 Choose Data Channels from the Device menu.
2 When the Data Channel dialog appears:
a) Choose a data channel in the Unit ID/Name list box. The list box
includes the data channels for each installed Gilson model 116 to
119 Detector. It also lists the names of any analog inputs located
on Gilson detectors or interface devices connected via the GSIOC.
b) In the Description box, type a label for the data channel. The
description can identify the wavelength and sensitivity for the
data channel, for example, 254 nm at 0.1 sens.
c) Click on the data channel in the Unit ID/Name list box to enter its
description.
d) Repeat the above for each data channel.
e) Choose OK to exit the dialog box.
January 1998
3-3
assign contact
descriptions
If contact connections exist between a Gilson device (usually the 506C
System Interface) and another HPLC device, assign a description to each
connection. Use the Contact command in the Device menu.
To assign descriptions to contact connections, refer to assign data
channel descriptions, above. The description could identify the action
performed by the contact, the device being controlled by the contact, or a
combination of those, for example, Start fraction collector.
review descriptions for
additional Gilson devices
Use the remaining commands in the Device menu to review UniPoint
descriptions assigned to each installed Gilson detector, injector and its
syringe pump or dilutor, fraction collector, and so on.
save and close control
method
When finished reviewing and assigning device descriptions:
1 Choose Save As from the File menu or the Save tool (
toolbar.
) from the
If a Gilson injector is installed, you see a message asking for a tray file
name, choose No at this time.
If a Gilson fraction collector is installed, you see a similar message
box, choose No.
2 When the Save As dialog appears:
a) Type a valid name in the File Name box. As a suggestion,
MANL_CTL.GCT.
b) As necessary, use the Directories and Drives list boxes to choose
where to store the file. The current path is listed above the
Directories list box.
c) Choose OK.
3-4
January 1998
getting started
3 Choose Close from the File menu.
Checking and controlling devices
Using the Operations window, you can issue commands to Gilson
devices and verify they can communicate with UniPoint.
1 Ensure that all Gilson devices are connected along the GSIOC and
powered on.
2 If necessary, display the Navigator by choosing its command from
the File menu. On the Navigator, choose the Operations square and
then choose New.
The Operations window appears. When you see the message System
Status in the status box, UniPoint can communicate with the HPLC
system.
January 1998
3-5
check control method
To verify that the manual control method that you created is used for
device identification:
1 Choose Control Method from the Manual menu.
2 Check the method name shown in the Browse Control Method dialog.
3 If the method’s name is shown, choose Cancel.
If not, use the options in the Browse Control Method dialog to select
the method. Then choose OK. UniPoint reads the information in the
file and uses it for manual control.
check communication
To quickly check if UniPoint and installed devices are communicating:
1 Choose Generic from the Manual menu.
2 When the Generic Device Control dialog appears, choose the
Custom> button.
If the Custom> button is already active, its label is List>. Therefore, if
you see a List> button, proceed to the next step because the options
you need are already shown.
3-6
January 1998
getting started
3 Choose the first device in the Device list box.
4 Type its unit ID in the Unit text box. The unit ID is shown at the left
of the device name in the Devices list box.
5 Type % in the Command text box.
6 Choose the Immediate button.
7 In the Response field, read the response from the device.
If you see the device’s model and version number, the device and
UniPoint are communicating.
If you see an error in the Response field or an error message box, the
device and software are not communicating. Check each of the
following:
• Check that the device’s power switch is ON.
• Check the physical GSIOC connections to the device as described
in the UniPoint System Installation Guide.
• Check that the correct Unit ID was entered.
If UniPoint still cannot communicate with the device, contact Gilson.
optionally start flow
To start the pumps if they are not currently pumping liquid:
1 Choose Mobile Phase from the Manual menu.
2 When the Mobile Phase Control dialog appears, type 1 in the Ramp
Time box.
3 In the Total Flow box, type the desired flow rate. You can set a flow
resolution of 0.001 times the maximum flow of the pump head. At or
below 10% of the maximum flow, settable resolution is 0.0001 times
the maximum flow.
January 1998
3-7
4 In the mobile phase composition box for each pump except the first
one, type the percent composition from that pump. The software
calculates the percent composition from the first pump for you.
5 Choose Begin to ramp the pumps to the specified flow and
composition conditions.
6 Choose Done to remove the Mobile Phase Control dialog from the
screen. When you close the dialog, the conditions indicated remain
in effect.
autozero detector
To autozero the detector:
1 Choose Detectors from the Manual menu.
2 Choose a detector in the Detector/Protocol File list box.
3 Choose Autozero Channels in the Command list box.
4 Choose the Send button.
5 Choose Done to remove the Manual Detector Control dialog.
start strip chart
To start a manual strip chart:
1 Choose Strip Chart from the Manual menu.
2 When the Manual Strip Chart dialog appears, click on Start to begin
viewing data from the data channel(s). The traces for the channels
appear in the Operations window. The Operations window's legend
identifies each channel being collected.
3 To get a better view of the data, choose Done to remove the dialog.
3-8
January 1998
getting started
4 To stop collection, display the Manual Strip Chart dialog again and
click on Stop.
5 When data collection is halted, the following Manual Strip Chart
dialog appears. Click on Done to exit the dialog without saving or
printing the strip chart.
exit operations window
To close the Operations window:
1 Choose Close from the File menu. UniPoint continues monitoring the
HPLC system until you exit the software.
January 1998
3-9
4 Hands-On Look at the Software
UniPoint is an application that runs under the Microsoft Windows
operating environment. Therefore, it takes advantage of the Windows
graphic interface. To use the software, you must understand how to use a
mouse and how to use Windows’ icons and drop-down menus. For more
information, refer to the Microsoft Mouse User’s Guide and Microsoft
Windows User’s Guide.
This section includes exercises that give you hands-on experience with
the various document windows of UniPoint.
Exercises 1 - 3 show you how to set up pre-run conditions (control
method, analysis method, and operations list).
Exercises 5 - 7 show you how to access and manipulate run output (data,
reports, and calibrations) that Gilson generated from a chromatographic
separation. Unless the default installation path was changed, the output
files were copied to C:\GILSON\EXAMPLES\HPLC when UniPoint was
installed.
Exercise 8 shows you how to re-analyze data to generate new reports.
January 1998
4-1
Exercise 1
Setting control method conditions
In this exercise, you set and modify control method conditions. For the
resources controlled by a method, you need to:
• assign a description, or use the default description assigned by Gilson,
• indicate any additional settings required for device control, and
• send timed events to or wait for input from the device.
The control method for this exercise sets the mobile phase profile, starts
an injector protocol, waits for the injector to inject the sample, and starts
and stops data collection.
Checking configuration file
Before creating the control method, locate the configuration file that
identifies the components of our example HPLC system. This file is
EXAMPLE.CFG and is stored in C:\GILSON\EXAMPLES\HPLC, unless
the default installation path was changed when UniPoint was installed.
UniPoint uses the configuration to identify available system components
for the control method.
1 Close any open document windows by choosing Close from the File
menu. (The Navigator, if it appears, can remain on-screen.)
2 Choose Default System Configuration from the File menu. The Default
System Configuration dialog appears.
3 Check the name of the configuration file listed at the bottom of the
dialog.
4 If the EXAMPLE.CFG file is named, review the devices in the example
system and click on OK.
If the configuration for your HPLC system is named:
a) Click on Browse.
b) Use the options in the Browse System Configuration dialog to select
the EXAMPLE.CFG file and place its name in the File name box.
Then click on OK.
c) When the Default System Configuration dialog re-appears, review
the devices identified for the example system and click on OK.
4-2
January 1998
hands-on look
Create method
To display the Control Method window:
1 If necessary, display the Navigator by choosing its command in the
File menu. On the Navigator, click on the Control Method square and
then click on New.
The Control Method window appears.
2 Choose Show Graph from the Graph menu to display the graph
pane.
3 Display each of the menus to become familiar with its commands.
Set device descriptions and parameters
For all installed resources, except data channels and contacts, UniPoint
assigns a default description when the control method is created.
Below you review and set descriptions for installed devices. You also
identify additional control parameters for the pumps and injector.
Whenever UniPoint refers to a device, it lists the device’s description.
January 1998
4-3
set pump descriptions
and parameters
To assign descriptions and indicate options for the pumps:
2 When the Mobile Phase dialog appears, notice that UniPoint assigned
default descriptions to installed pumps, based on the pump’s unit ID.
3 Click on Pump 21 in the Unit ID/Name list box. Then type 0.1%
acetic acid in the Description box and click on Change.
4 Since Pump 22 is not needed for this method, click on its name in the
Unit ID/Name list box. Press the DELETE or BACKSPACE key to remove
its description. Then click on its name in the Unit ID/Name list box
to update the list box.
5 Click on Pump 23 in the Unit ID/Name list box. Then type acetonitrile
for its description and click on Change.
6 Click on Settings to set refill speed and compressibility parameters for
the pumps.
7 When the Mobile Phase Settings dialog appears, type 46 in the
Compressibility box and 125 in the Refill Speed box for the 0.1%
acetic acid pump.
4-4
January 1998
hands-on look
8 Click on acetonitrile in the list box. Then type 99 in the
Compressibility box and 125 in the Refill box.
9 Click on OK to accept the settings and exit the Mobile Phase Settings
dialog.
10 When the Mobile Phase dialog appears, click on OK.
set data channel
description and scaling
To assign a description for the data channel to acquire and set run-time
scaling parameters:
1 Choose Data Channel from the Device menu.
2 When the Data Channel dialog appears, click on 119 Channel 1 in
the list box. Type 254nm, 0.01 sensitivity in the text box. Then click on
119 Channel 1 in the list box to enter its description.
3 Click on the Options button.
4 When the Strip Chart Options dialog appears, type 7 in the Display
Time box.
5 Click on the User Units option button.
6 Type 10 in the mVolt box, 0.01 in the User Units box, and aufs in the
Label box.
January 1998
4-5
7 Click on OK to accept the settings.
8 Click on OK again to exit the Data Channel dialog.
check injector descriptions
and choose protocol and
tray files
To check descriptions and select the protocol and tray files for the injector
and its syringe pump or dilutor:
1 Choose Injector from the Device menu.
2 When the Injector dialog appears, notice that the injector and dilutor
are assigned the same description: Injector. This combines their
command sets and makes setting timed events for them easier.
4-6
January 1998
hands-on look
3 To select an existing protocol file that contains commands for
controlling the injector and dilutor during a run:
a) Click on the Browse button.
b) Use the options in the Browse dialog to choose
C:\GILSON\EXAMPLES\HPLC\INJTOTL.GIP and then click on
OK.
When the Injector dialog appears again, it lists the protocol’s file
description: injection = total loop fill with initial rinses.
4 To select the tray file that identifies sample locations during the run:
a) If necessary, click on the 231 injector description in the Unit ID/
Name list box so it is highlighted.
b) Click on the Tray Editor button.
c) If a Hint box appears on the Tray Editor window, click on OK to
remove the box.
d) Choose Open from the File menu of the Tray Editor window.
e) Use the options in the Open Tray File dialog to select the
C:\GILSON\EXAMPLES\HPLC\CODE_0.GTY file and click on
OK.
January 1998
4-7
f) Examine the example tray. It shows tube locations designated for
sample tubes.
g) Choose TUBES from the Zone menu to display numbers in the
tubes.
h) Choose Exit from the File menu to remove the Tray Editor window.
When the Injector dialog appears again, it displays the tray file name.
5 Click on OK to accept the settings and exit the Injector dialog.
remove fraction collector
description
Since the fraction collector is not used for this method, remove its
default description.
1 Choose Fraction Collector from the Device menu.
2 When the dialog appears, click on the fraction collector’s name in the
Unit ID/Name list box. Press the DELETE or BACKSPACE key to remove
its description. Then click on the fraction collector’s name in the
Unit ID/Name list box to update the list.
3 Click on OK.
4-8
January 1998
hands-on look
Save method
You are done setting descriptions for the devices in the HPLC system.
Before continuing, save the current conditions set in the control method:
1 Choose Save from the File menu or its tool ( ) from the toolbar.
When the Save As dialog appears:
a) Type a valid name in the File name box. As a suggestion, indicate
your initials. The software automatically assigns the .GCT
extension.
b) If necessary, use the dialog's other options to store the file to
C:\GILSON\EXAMPLES\HPLC.
c) Click on OK.
January 1998
4-9
Setting events
In this part of the exercise, set the timed events to issue during a chromatography run.
specify mobile phase profile
To set the mobile phase profile:
1 Choose Mobile Phase from the Event menu or click on its tool (
the toolbar.
) in
2 When the Mobile Phase Event dialog appears:
a) Type 0.00 in the Time box.
b) Type 0.30 in the Flow box.
c) Type 16.80 in the acetonitrile box.
d) Click on Insert. The software automatically calculates 83.20 for
0.1% acetic acid.
e) Click on Done.
3 Notice the addition of the mobile phase event to the table and the
gradient profile in the graph.
set protocol event
To set an event to start the protocol:
1 Choose Injector from the Event menu or click on its tool (
toolbar.
) in the
2 When the Injector Event dialog appears:
a) In the Time box, type 0.03.
b) If necessary, choose the injector protocol’s description in the
Injector/Protocol File Description list box.
c) Notice the TUBE and LOOP_VOLUME text boxes that appear.
These are values requested by the protocol.
d) Leave the variable name in the TUBE box. You will indicate a
value for the variable when you set up the operations list (the
steps executed during a run) in Exercise 3.
e) Type 20 in the LOOP_VOLUME box.
f) Click on Insert.
g) Click on Done.
4-10
January 1998
hands-on look
3 Notice the addition of the event to the table and graph.
set synchronize event
To synchronize the time of sample injection with the start of data
collection, indicate a synchronize event:
1 Choose System from the Event menu or click on its tool (
toolbar.
) in the
2 When the System dialog appears:
b) Choose System Controller in the System Controller list box.
c) Choose Synchronize in the Command list box.
d) Click on Insert.
e) Click on Done.
3 Notice the addition of the event to the table and graph.
January 1998
4-11
start and stop data
collection
To set events for starting and stopping collection via the data
channel:
1 Choose Data Channels from the Event menu or click on its tool (
in the toolbar.
)
2 When the Data Channel Event dialog appears:
b) Click on the Start All Channels option button.
c) Click on Insert.
d) Set the step to stop collection by typing 5.30 in the Time box,
clicking on the Stop All Channels option button, and clicking on
Insert.
e) Click on Done.
3 Notice the addition of the events to the table and graph.
Viewing protocol
To view the steps in the protocol that you identified in the control
method:
1 Move the mouse pointer so the arrow is positioned over the text
injection = total loop fill with initial rinses. Then click to highlight the
row and the cell.
2 Click the right mouse button to display the menu shown at the left.
3 Click on the Open Referenced File command. The Protocol window
appears, listing the steps in the protocol file.
4-12
January 1998
hands-on look
4 When you are finished looking at the protocol, choose Close from the
File menu to return to the Control Method window.
Save method and close its window
You are done setting descriptions and events for the devices to be used
during a programmed run. The Control Method window should look
similar to the one below.
1 Choose Save from the File menu or its tool (
) from the toolbar.
January 1998
4-13
Select your system configuration
So UniPoint uses the correct configuration information the next time you
set up a control method, select the configuration file created for your
HPLC system.
1 Choose Default System Configuration from the File menu.
2 When the Default System Configuration dialog appears, click on the
Browse button.
3 Use the options in the Browse dialog to select the configuration file
set for your system and then choose OK.
4 When the Default System Configuration dialog appears again, click
on OK.
4-14
January 1998
hands-on look
Exercise 2
Setting analysis method conditions
In the last exercise, you identified devices and set timed events for
controlling them during a run. In this exercise, you specify conditions to
analyze peaks in collected data and report on integrated peaks.
Create method
To display the Analysis Method window and name the method:
File menu. On the Navigator, click on the Analysis Method square
and then click on New.
The Analysis Method window appears. Notice that the software
automatically sets these default analysis conditions at 0.00 min:
• Default Baseline
• Peak Width: 0.20 min
• Peak Sensitivity: 2%
• Disable Negative Peak Integration
2 Choose Show Graph from the Graph menu to display the graph
pane.
January 1998
4-15
Modify integration events
Below you modify the default values for peak width and sensitivity.
1 To change the default peak width:
a) Double-click on its event in the analysis method table.
b) In the Integration Events dialog appears, change 0.2 to 0.15 in the
Width box and click on Change.
2 To change the default peak sensitivity:
a) In the Integration Events dialog, click on the down arrow to
display the peak sensitivity event.
b) Type 5 in the Sensitivity box and click on Change.
3 To add an event to modify the peak sensitivity:
a) In the Integration Events dialog, click on New.
b) Click on Peak Sensitivity in the Command list box.
c) Type 3.75 in the Time box and type 2 in the Sensitivity box.
d) Click on Insert.
e) Click on Done to exit the dialog.
4-16
January 1998
hands-on look
Select the analysis channel
The analysis channel identifies the data channel whose information is
reported on by the analysis method.
1 Choose the Channel Scales command from the Analysis menu. The
Data Channel Scales dialog appears.
2 To display a data channel in the list box, click on Browse. When the
Browse Control Method dialog appears, use its options to select the
name of the control method created in Exercise 1 and choose OK.
3 When the Data Channels dialog re-appears, notice that the channel
description and scaling settings entered into the control method
appear.
4 If necessary, click on the channel description in the list box to
highlight it.
5 Click on the Analysis Channel check box.
6 Click on OK to accept the settings.
January 1998
4-17
Identify peaks in the peak table
Next, you indicate peak information for the three peaks to be integrated
and analyzed. They are 4-acetamidophenol, caffeine, and 2acetamidophenol.
1 Choose Peak Table from the Analysis menu. The Peak Table dialog
appears.
2 To identify the peaks and set their retention times:
a) Type 2.70 in the Time box and 4-acetamidophenol in the Name box.
Click on Insert.
b) Repeat the above to set the following retention times for the other
two peaks.
Time
Peak Name
3.55
caffeine
4.45
2-acetamidophenol
3 To set up level information for calibrators, for the specified peaks,
injected during the run:
a) Click on 4-acetamidophenol in the Time/Name list box.
b) Click on the Levels option button.
c) In the Peak Levels area that appears, type 5 in the Amount box
and click on Insert.
d) Indicate two more levels of 25 and 45 by typing the amount and
clicking on Insert.
e) Click on caffeine in the Time/Name list box and indicate levels of
10, 40, and 70.
4-18
January 1998
hands-on look
4 To set 2-acetamidophenol as an internal standard:
a) Click on its name in the Time/Name list box.
b) Click on the Internal Standard check box.
c) In the Amount box, type 150.
d) For the Start Time and End Time, type 0 and 7.
5 Click on OK to save the settings and exit the Peak Table dialog.
6 Notice that a retention time window appears, on the graph, for each
peak.
Save method
Before continuing, save the current conditions set in the analysis
method:
a) Type a valid name in the File name box. As a suggestion, indicate
your initials. The software automatically assigns the .GAN
extension.
c) Click on OK.
January 1998
4-19
Selecting report parameters
indicating report type
To select the kind of report generated:
1 Choose Type from the Report menu. The Report Type dialog appears.
2 Choose the Internal Standard option button in the Report Type area.
3 In the Min. Area box, type 3000.
4 Choose Linear in the Curve Fit drop-down list.
5 Leave all other options at their default settings.
6 Choose OK to accept the settings and exit.
checking output
To see which reports are saved to disk, printed, or exported at run time:
1 Choose Output from the Report menu.
2 Review the options available for saving, printing, and exporting
reports.
4-20
January 1998
hands-on look
3 Choose OK to exit.
Save method and close its window
You are done setting conditions for the analysis method. The Analysis
Method window should look similar to the one below.
) from the toolbar.
January 1998
4-21
Exercise 3
Creating operations list
In this exercise, set up an operations list that uses the control and
analysis methods created in the previous exercises. An operations list
identifies the steps the software performs when the run is started. These
steps describe the samples to be injected and the methods that the
software uses to acquire and analyze the sample’s data.
Create and name operations list
File menu. On the Navigator, click on the Operations square and
then click on New.
2 If you see any error messages, choose OK to remove their boxes.
UniPoint starts communicating with HPLC devices when an
Operations window is opened. Since your HPLC system is probably
not the same as the example system, you may see messages
indicating that some devices cannot be located or initialized.
a) Type a valid name in the File name box. Once again, you can use
your initials since the software assigns the .GOP extension.
c) Choose OK.
4-22
January 1998
hands-on look
Set up steps
For our example, you will create steps that identify a group of calibrators
followed by a group of unknowns. Those steps are followed by a second
set of calibrators then unknowns.
1 Choose Express from the List Entry menu. The Express Entry dialog
appears.
2 Indicate information in the text boxes of the Cycle Generation area.
Text box
Calib Levels
Repeats/Level
Unknowns
Repeats/Unknown
Number of Cycles
Value
3
3
5
1
2
3 Click in the Control Method box and then click the Browse button to
select the control method set up in Exercise 1. (Or, double-click in the
Control Method box.)
4 Click in the Analysis Method box and then click the Browse button to
select the analysis method set up in Exercise 2. (Or, double-click in
the Analysis Method box.)
January 1998
4-23
When you selected the control method, an additional text box, TUBE,
appeared at the bottom of the Express Entry dialog. It requests
information for the tube location in which a sample is located.
5 In the TUBE text box, indicate the location of the first sample, as
follows.
a) Click in the text box and click on Browse. (Or, double-click in the
text box.) The Browse Tray Editor window appears, displaying
information for the tray editor file specified in the control method.
b) Double-click in the tube located in the upper left corner to select it.
The tube’s color changes to cyan and then red.
c) Choose OK to exit the window.
The Express Entry dialog re-appears and displays TUBES:1 in its
TUBE text box.
6 Choose Generate then choose Done.
7 Review the list of steps in the Operations window. Notice how the
software assigned tube numbers. For each calibrator level, the tube
number remained the same. For each unknown, the tube number was
incremented by one.
4-24
January 1998
hands-on look
Identify sample descriptions
To assign sample descriptions:
1 Choose Paste Special from the Edit menu.
2 When the Paste Special dialog appears, click on Editor.
3 When the Notepad window appears, type standard and press the
ENTER key.
4 Repeat step 3 eight times so the word standard is listed nine times on
the screen. Each sample description must be on its own line.
5 For the next five lines, type unknown one, unknown two, unknown three,
unknown four, unknown five.
6 Type standard and press ENTER nine more times.
7 For the next five lines, type unknown six, unknown seven, unknown eight,
unknown nine, unknown ten.
8 Choose Select All from the Edit menu and then choose Copy from the
Edit menu.
9 Choose Exit from the File menu. Indicate No when prompted to save
the file.
10 When the Paste Special dialog re-appears, click on Description in the
list box and click on Paste.
The sample descriptions appear in the Operations window.
January 1998
4-25
Save operations list and close its window
You are done setting conditions for an operations list. If this list had
been created for your HPLC system, you could start the run using the
Run menu. However, since you created it for our example system, save
the list and close the Operations window.
) from the toolbar.
4-26
January 1998
hands-on look
Exercise 4
Viewing calibrations
In this exercise, you view and manipulate information in a calibration
file generated for an example chromatography run.
File menu. On the Navigator, click on the Calibration square and
then click on Open.
2 When the Open dialog box appears:
a) Use its options to choose the C:\GILSON\EXAMPLES\HPLC
\INT_STD.001 directory.
b) Choose the INT_SEQ.GB1 file in the File Name list box.
c) Click on OK.
The Calibration window displays the summary report and
calibration plot generated for the first standard peak of the selected
calibration.
3 Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars, if necessary, to view
hidden information.
January 1998
4-27
4 To enlarge part of the graph:
a) Click on the magnifying glass tool ( ).
b) On the graph, click and drag to draw a rectangle around the
repeats on one of the levels. Then release the mouse button.
5 To learn about the injected sample associated with a repeat:
a) Click on the arrow tool ( ) and move the mouse pointer to a
repeat’s square.
b) Click on the square using the right mouse button.
c) When the menu appears, click on Info. A dialog giving
information on the repeat appears.
d) Choose OK to remove the dialog.
6 Click on the full-scale tool ( ) to return the X and Y axes to minimum
and maximum values for the displayed calibration curve.
7 To view the curve for another standard peak:
a) Choose Peaks from the View menu.
b) When the dialog appears, double-click on another peak name.
c) Watch as the Calibration window updates.
d) Double-click on another peak name to view its calibration curve.
8 To view another calibration table for which calibration curves exist:
a) Choose Calibrations from the View menu.
b) When the dialog appears, double-click on the second calibration
description in the list box.
c) Watch as the Calibration window updates.
9 Use the Peaks dialog to view the curves for the peaks in the selected
calibration.
10 Remove the Calibrations dialog and Peaks dialog by clicking on Done
in each dialog.
11 Choose Close from the File menu to exit the window.
4-28
January 1998
hands-on look
Exercise 5
Viewing data file
In this exercise, you open a data file and view traces acquired for
injected samples.
File menu. On the Navigator, click on the Results square and then
click on Open.
a) Use its options to choose the
C:\GILSON\EXAMPLES\HPLC\INT_STD.001 directory.
b) Choose the INT_STD.GDT file in the File Name list box.
c) Click on OK.
The Results window appears, displaying the trace for the first
sample. The trace is displayed at full scale. Notice that the title bar
identifies the name of the data file and the injection number of the
sample whose information is displayed.
January 1998
4-29
3 To enlarge part of the chromatogram:
a) Click on the magnifying glass tool ( ).
b) On the graph, click and drag to draw a box around a peak.
Release the mouse button.
4 Click on the full-scale tool ( ) to return the X and Y axes to the
minimum and maximum limits for the displayed trace.
5 To view the trace for another sample:
a) Choose Samples from the View menu.
b) When the Sample's dialog appears, double-click on a sample
description, for example, unknown five.
c) Watch as the Results window updates.
d) Double-click on another sample to view its trace.
e) To close the dialog, double-click on its control-menu box in the
upper left corner.
integrating peaks
To integrate peaks and view reporting information:
1 Choose Analysis Method from the Linking menu. The Analysis
Method Link dialog appears.
2 To select the analysis method:
a) Click on Browse.
b) When the Browse Analysis Method dialog appears, locate the
method you created in Exercise 2, or choose INT_SEQ.GAN, and
click on OK.
c) When the Analysis Method Link dialog appears again, choose the
method in the list box and click on OK.
4-30
January 1998
hands-on look
The software uses the conditions in the method to scale the
chromatogram plot and to generate reporting information.
In the legend, the trace with a > sign in front of its description is the
one being reported in the table pane. The table pane reports areas (or
heights) for the channel.
adjusting baseline
To adjust the baseline beneath a peak:
1 Zoom on a peak using the magnifying glass tool (
).
2 Click on the adjust baseline tool ( ). Begin points (up triangle) and
end points (down triangle) appear on the baselines under each
integrated peak.
3 Point and drag the begin or end point for the peak’s baseline. Peak
information in the table pane automatically updates.
4 Click on the arrow tool (
from being displayed.
January 1998
) to remove peak begin and end points
4-31
reverting to method
baselines
If you made modifications to baselines and want to return to the
conditions as set in the linked analysis method.
1 Click on the adjust baseline tool (
).
2 Move the mouse pointer onto the chromatogram plot.
3 Click on the right mouse button. When the menu appears, click on
Reset Baselines.
from being displayed.
) to remove peak begin and end points
5 Click on the full-scale tool ( ) to return the X and Y axes to minimum
and maximum values for the displayed trace.
closing window
4-32
January 1998
hands-on look
Exercise 6
Viewing report file
In this exercise, you open a report file and view reports within it.
File menu. On the Navigator, click on the Results square and then
click on Open.
2 When the Open dialog appears:
b) Choose the .GR? extension in the List Files of Type list box.
c) Choose the INT_SEQ.GR1 file in the File Name list box.
d) Click on OK.
The Results window appears, displaying the report information and
chromatogram plot for the selected sample. The trace is scaled to the
settings specified in the analysis method.
The title bar identifies the name of the report file and the injection
number of the sample whose information is being displayed. The
table pane contains information for the analysis channel indicated in
the analysis method.
January 1998
4-33
3 To view the trace for another report:
a) Choose Samples from the View menu.
b) When the Reports dialog appears, double-click on a report
description, for example, calibration summary.
c) Watch as the Results window updates.
d) Double-click on another report, for example, unknown 8.
e) Choose Show Graph from the Graph menu, if necessary to see the
sample’s trace.
f) To close the Reports dialog, double-click on its control-menu box
located in the upper left corner.
4 Choose Close from the File menu to exit the Results window.
4-34
January 1998
hands-on look
Exercise 7
Re-Analyzing data
In this exercise, you generate new reports using the method that you
created in Exercise 2.
modify re-analysis file
The quickest way to set up a re-analysis list is to open and modify a
previously created re-analysis list. At run time, UniPoint automatically
generates a re-analysis file (.GAR extension) for the samples being
processed and stores it in the data/report directory.
File menu. On the Navigator, click on the Re-Analysis square and
then click on Open.
b) Choose the INT_STD.GAR file in the File Name list box.
c) Choose OK.
3 Review the steps in the re-analysis list.
January 1998
4-35
4 To replace the listed analysis method with the method you created:
a) From the Edit menu, choose Replace.
b) When the Replace dialog appears, type INT_SEQ.GAN in the Find
What box.
c) In the Replace With box, type the name plus the .GAN extension
of the analysis method created in Exercise 2.
d) Choose Analysis Method in the Search Column list box.
e) Choose the Replace All command button.
f) If you see a message box asking to continue the search from the
top of the table, click on Yes. When you see the message box
indicating the search is complete, choose OK.
g) To close the Replace dialog, choose Done.
re-analyze data
To start the re-analysis:
1 Choose Start from the Analyze menu or the Go tool ( ) from the
toolbar.
The software begins processing the first sample using the conditions
in the analysis method. The status box and status line in the
document window identifies step and method information.
When the re-analysis completes, you can view the reports as
described in Exercise 6. The report file is named after the analysis
method used to create it and has the .GR1 extension. It is stored in
the C:\GILSON\EXAMPLES\HPLC\INT_STD.001 directory.
4-36
January 1998
5
Common Procedures
This section deals with procedures that, for the most part, are the same
in the various UniPoint document windows. Throughout the manual,
you are referred to these procedures.
The procedures in this section assume you know how to start UniPoint;
see Section 1. It also assumes you can use the mouse and keyboard
when working within windows and dialog boxes. For information on
using the mouse and keyboard and sizing the application window and
document windows, refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide.
January 1998
5-1
Using the navigator
When you start UniPoint, you may see the Navigator window. The
Navigator provides for quickly creating and opening files in UniPoint. It
also lets you view example files supplied with the software.
To display the Navigator if it is not on-screen:
1 Choose Navigator from the File menu.
To use the Navigator:
1 Click in the square next to the document type to access. The text in
the different areas of the window helps you make your selection. (A
description of the various windows is also given on page 5-5.)
2 If you do not see the document type you need, choose Advanced to
reveal additional selections for protocols and routines.
3 Choose the New, Open, or Example command button.
New. Displays the document window for the file type. The New
button is not available for Results and Calibrations because those
files are generated during a run or re-analysis processing or by
saving an existing file to a new name.
Open. Displays the Open dialog for choosing a file or information in
a file. If you need help using the dialog, see page 5-6.
Example. Displays a list box for selecting example information
supplied with UniPoint and stored to disk during installation.
5-2
January 1998
common procedures
turning navigator off/on
When the Show Navigator option is active, the Navigator appears each
time you close all open document windows in UniPoint. You can turn off
this option so the Navigator does not appear automatically.
To turn off the Show Navigator option, choose Options in the File menu.
When the Options dialog appears, click on the Actions tab and then
remove the check mark from the Show Navigator box.
redisplaying navigator at
any time
To display the Navigator while a document window is on-screen,
choose its tool ( ) from the toolbar. Or, choose its command in the File
menu.
File maintenance
You can create and open files in UniPoint using the Navigator, as
described on the previous page, or using the New and Open commands
in the File menu.
On the following pages, you learn how to create, open, save, and delete
files and how to create and delete directories.
Note: In Windows 95/NT, directories are called folders.
January 1998
5-3
Creating a directory
To speed access to files, store similar files in directories. Gilson recommends that you create a directory for each experiment or user.
Note: During a run or re-analysis processing, UniPoint automatically
generates an output directory for data and reports.
To create a directory:
1 Choose File Manager from UniPoint’s File menu. The Windows File
Manager appears. For details about the File Manager, see its on-line
help.
2 Choose the disk drive and/or directory in which to create the new
directory.
3 From the File menu, choose Create Directory.
4 In the Create Directory dialog, verify that the correct path to the
directory is listed and then specify the name of the new directory.
5 Choose OK.
6 From the File menu, choose Exit to return to UniPoint.
5-4
January 1998
common procedures
Creating a file
UniPoint can create several types of files for controlling HPLC devices
and analyzing collected data.
To create a file:
1 From the File menu, choose New.
2 When the dialog appears, select the type of file to create. (See the
table below for a description of the files that you can create.)
3 If you do not see the needed file type, choose Advanced to reveal
additional selections. For system-generated files, such as data,
reports, and calibrations, you use the Open command to view the
appropriate document window.
Select:
Control Method
Analysis Method
Operations
Re-Analysis
Injector Protocol
Injector Routines
Generic Protocol
Generic Routines
To do the following:
Indicate device control events to issue when
the control method is executed during a run.
See page 6-1 for additional information.
Identify how data is analyzed and reported.
See page 7-1.
Set the step-by-step actions to perform
during a run. See page 8-1.
Analyze data in a different way than it was
originally analyzed. See page 13-1.
Create a set of untimed sequential
instructions executed by the auto-injector
and its dilutor. See page 14-1.
Identify named groups of commands that
make building injector protocols easier. See
page 15-1.
Create a set of untimed sequential
instructions executed by one or more Gilson
devices. See page 14-1.
Identify named groups of commands that
make building generic protocols easier. See
page 15-1.
4 Choose OK when the appropriate file type is selected.
The document window that lists menu items for setting options for
the file appears. Refer to the appropriate section in this manual,
listed in the table above, for more information on setting parameters
for the selected file type.
January 1998
5-5
Opening an existing file
To display the contents of an existing file in a document window:
1 From the File menu, choose Open.
2 In the File Name box, type or select the file to open. If the file is not
listed in the box, do one or more of the following:
• In the Drives box, select a different drive.
• In the Directories box, select a different directory.
Note: With data, report, calibration and routines files, you can
choose among the individual items stored in those files.
Consult Section 11, Results, Section 12, Calibrations or Section
15, Routines for details.
3 Choose OK when the desired name appears in the File Name box.
The document window for the file type appears.
For information on:
Control method
Analysis method
Operations
Results
Calibrations
Re-Analysis
Protocols
Routines
See page:
6-1
7-1
8-1
11-1
12-1
13-1
14-1
15-1
if you selected a log file
Choosing an operations log file displays a text editor. See page 5-34 for
more information on using the text editor.
if you selected a workspace
Choosing a workspace file displays the document windows, and their
associated files on the computer screen. Any windows currently
displayed are not affected by the workspace being opened. See page 538 for information on setting up a workspace.
5-6
January 1998
common procedures
shortcut
The bottom of the File menu lists the most recently worked on and saved
files. If the file is listed there, just choose its name to open it.
Saving an untitled file
To store the contents of a new unnamed (untitled) file to disk for future
retrieval:
1 Choose Save or Save As from the File menu or click on
toolbar.
in the
2 When the Save As dialog appears, use its options to name and select
a storage location for the file.
3 Choose OK to save the file.
January 1998
5-7
Saving a named file
To quickly save changes made to a file that is already named:
1 Choose Save in the File menu or click on
in the toolbar.
If this is the first time you are saving the file, the Save As dialog
appears. Use the dialog to indicate a name for the file. See Saving an
untitled file, above.
Making a copy of a file
To store the changes made to a file to a new name while still keeping a
previous version, do the following:
1 From the File menu, choose Save As.
2 When the Save As dialog appears, use its options to name and select
a storage location for the file.
3 Choose OK to create the new version of the file and exit the dialog.
5-8
January 1998
common procedures
Deleting files and directories
If a file or directory is no longer needed, you can remove it from disk:
1 Choose File Manager from UniPoint’s File menu. The Windows File
Manager appears. For details about the File Manager, see its on-line
help.
2 Locate and select the files and/or directories to delete.
3 From the File menu, choose Delete. Or, press the Delete key.
4 When the Delete dialog appears, verify that the correct names are
listed.
5 Choose OK.
6 If a confirmation box appears, choose Yes or Yes to All to complete
the deletion.
7 Choose Exit from the File menu to return to UniPoint.
January 1998
5-9
Specifying default font for document windows
You can select the font to apply to text in a new document window.
When UniPoint is installed, the default font is Arial.
Once in a document window, there are additional menu commands that
allow you to change the font displayed in the table or graph. The default
font is always used to display the text shown in the message line at the
bottom of a document window.
1 To access the command for selecting the default font:
a) Close all open document windows using the Close All command
in the Window menu. (If it appears, the Navigator can remain onscreen.)
b) From the File menu, choose Default Font.
2 When the Font dialog appears, use the drop-down list boxes to
indicate font information.
Font. Lists available screen and printer fonts. You can select the font
in the list box or type its name in the text box.
If there is a printer icon in front of a font name, the font is a printer
font. The closest matching Windows font is used to display text onscreen.
If there is a TT icon, the font is a “True Type” font. The same font is
used on both the printer and on-screen.
If there is no icon, the font is a screen font. The closest matching font
is used when on-screen text is printed.
Font Style. Lists available styles for the selected font, such as regular,
italic, bold, bold italic. You can select the style in the list box or type
its name in the text box.
5-10
January 1998
common procedures
Size. Lists available sizes for the selected font. You can select the
size in the list box or type it in the text box.
Sample. Shows a sample of text using the selected font, font style,
and size.
Script. Lists the available language scripts for the specified font. Pick
the one appropriate for the language your computer is set up for.
3 Choose OK to accept the setting and exit the Font dialog.
January 1998
5-11
Working in the table pane
All document windows in UniPoint display a table in their window.
UniPoint places information into the table when you set parameters in
certain dialog boxes available within the document window. You can
customize the table by adding or removing columns from display,
changing the font, and specifying how text is aligned within columns.
Displaying the table if it is not shown
The table pane may not be displayed when you open a document
window. To reveal the table pane:
1 From the Table menu, choose Show Table.
Choosing the Show Table command again removes the table from
display.
5-12
January 1998
common procedures
Sizing the table pane
You can modify the size of the table pane so it takes up more or less of
the document window’s area.
1 Place the mouse pointer on the divider between the table and graph
panes. The mouse pointer changes shape and becomes a two-headed
arrow.
2 Click and drag the pointer up or down to manipulate the height of
the table pane.
January 1998
5-13
Changing column width using the mouse
You can easily adjust the width of a column so all text within it can be
seen:
1 Place the mouse pointer on the vertical line located on the right side
of the column header whose column width is to be adjusted. The
mouse pointer changes shape and becomes a two-headed arrow.
2 Click and drag the mouse pointer to the left to make the column
narrower or to the right to make it wider.
UniPoint saves column width information with the file so columns
appear as you set them the next time you open the file.
Setting column attributes
In the table pane of a document window, you can set attributes for,
rename, add, and remove columns.
To display the Format Columns dialog:
1 From the Table menu, choose Format Columns. Or, double-click on
one of the column headings of the table.
5-14
January 1998
common procedures
viewing column attributes
To see the options set for a column:
1 Select the column in the Column Contents list box. The current
attributes for the column appear in the text and drop-down list boxes,
described below.
Contents. The information found in the selected column. The types
of contents that can appear in each column are set by Gilson.
Heading. The descriptive text that appears at the top of a column and
identifies the type of information that appears within the column.
Width. The width of the column. Since it is not easy to know what
width is required for columns containing text, you can use the mouse
to adjust columns if the width is too large or small. The width set
using the mouse inserts in this test box. See Changing column width
using the mouse on page 5-14.
Factor. A number by which each value in a column is multiplied.
Justify. How information in the column is aligned: left justified, right
justified, or centered.
Format. How numbers are displayed: decimal, with or without
commas, or scientific notation.
Decimals. The number of positions displayed after the decimal point.
Password Protect (available in Operations and Re-Analysis
windows only). Turns off/on password requirement for a column.
This enables a user that does not have password authority to modify
information in an Operations or Re-Analysis window without
entering a password. The user can save the changes to a new file
name, but not to the current file name. See the Password Protection
appendix.
changing an attribute
To assign a new attribute to a column:
attributes for the column appear in the text and drop-down list boxes.
2 Use the text and drop-down list boxes to make the necessary changes.
3 Choose Change.
4 If you are done making modifications, choose Done to exit the dialog.
Information in the column is formatted using the new attributes.
January 1998
5-15
renaming a column
To change a column heading:
1 Select the column in the Column Contents list box.
2 Type a new heading in the Heading box.
3 Choose Change.
The table displays the new heading.
inserting a column
In the table, columns are inserted to the left of the column selected in the
Column Contents list box. You can place the highlight after the last
column to insert a column there.
To add a column:
1 Select the appropriate column in the Column Contents list box. Or,
click beneath the last column to add a column there.
2 Use the text and drop-down list boxes to set the attributes for the new
column.
3 Choose Insert.
The table displays the new column.
removing a column
To remove a column:
2 Choose Delete.
The table no longer displays the column.
If you need the column later, use the inserting a column procedures.
changing the position
of a column
To move a column:
2 Click on the up and down buttons to change the position of the
column in the report.
5-16
January 1998
common procedures
Changing the table font
The size and appearance of the text shown in the table can be changed.
To do this, use the Font dialog.
1 From the Table menu, choose Font.
2 When the Font dialog appears, use the drop-down list boxes to set
font information. If necessary, refer to page 5-10 for a description of
the areas of the Font dialog. Be aware that column and row headers
are always shown in bold (darker) type.
3 Choose OK to exit the dialog.
Manipulating table rows
You can modify the location of rows in the table by deleting, copying,
and pasting rows. You can also copy rows from the table of one document window to a different location in the same table or into the table of
another document window of the same type. For example, you can copy
the events from a control method into another control method. And, you
can copy rows in an operations list and then duplicate them later in the
same list.
Note: Some table modifications via the Edit menu, such as deleting, are
not available in all windows.
January 1998
UniPoint checks the information copied between windows and
makes sure that the necessary parameters are set in the destination window. You see a message if UniPoint cannot place the
information. For example, if you are copying events for a detector
between two control methods, UniPoint verifies that the detector
is named in the destination method. If the detector is not named,
you must assign a description before UniPoint can paste the
events.
5-17
deleting rows
To remove one or more rows and place their contents in the Windows
Clipboard:
1 Select the rows by clicking then dragging the mouse pointer to
highlight them. Or, click on a row then choose Select All from the
Edit menu.
2 Choose Cut in the Edit menu or press the CTRL+X key. This action not
only deletes the rows but copies their information into the Clipboard.
3 To place the rows elsewhere, see pasting rows.
To remove one or more rows without placing their contents in the
Clipboard.
1 Click on a row in the table.
2 Choose Clear All from the Edit menu.
copying rows
To copy the information in one or more rows to the Clipboard:
highlight them in the table. Or, click on a row and choose Select All
from the Edit menu.
2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu. This copies the information into
the Clipboard.
3 To place the rows elsewhere, see pasting rows.
pasting rows
Rows are inserted before the highlighted row. You can insert rows that
were cut or copied from one document into the same window or into
another window of the same type.
To insert rows:
1 Click on the row before which the information stored in the
Clipboard is inserted.
2 Choose Paste from the Edit menu.
5-18
January 1998
common procedures
Finding and replacing information
You can locate and replace text in a table. For example, you could
change each occurrence of an analysis method to another method in an
operations list.
finding text
To locate text:
1 From the Edit menu, choose Find.
2 When the Find dialog appears, type the text to locate in the Find
What box.
3 To further identify the text to locate, choose the Match the Whole
Word Only box, the Match Case box, or both boxes.
4 To search an individual column, select it in the list box. If all
columns shown in the list box are searched, select the Search All
Columns check box.
5 Choose Find Next to begin the search.
If UniPoint locates the text, it highlights the text. If UniPoint cannot
find the text or has located the last occurrence of the text, it displays a
message box telling you the text cannot be found. Remove the
message box by choosing OK.
6 Repeatedly choose Find Next to locate any other occurrences of the
text.
7 To close the dialog, choose Done.
January 1998
5-19
replacing text
To change text:
1 From the Edit menu, choose Replace.
2 When the Replace dialog appears, type the text to locate in the Find
What box.
3 Type the replacement text in the Replace With box.
4 To further identify the text to locate, choose the Match Whole Word
Only box, Match Case box, or both.
Note: Not all columns shown in the table may be listed in the Search
Column list box. The information in those columns is set by
UniPoint and cannot be replaced with user-defined text.
5 Choose one of the command buttons.
Command button
Find Next
Replace
Replace All
Function
Searches for the word or text string.
Changes the currently selected search text with the
replacement text.
Changes all occurrences of the search text with the
replacement text.
If UniPoint locates the text in the table, it highlights the text. If
UniPoint cannot find the text or has located the last occurrence of the
text, it displays a message box telling you the text cannot be found.
Remove the message box by choosing OK.
6 To close the dialog, choose Done.
5-20
January 1998
common procedures
Working in the graph pane
Most of the document windows available in UniPoint can display a
graph in the lower pane of the window. The type of graph varies
depending on the document window. Control and Analysis Method
windows display a time line. Operations, Results, and Re-Analysis
windows display a chromatogram plot. Calibration windows show
calibration plots. Protocol and Routines windows do not have a graph
pane.
Document window for Control Method
Following are procedures for displaying the graph pane and for sizing
and moving the graph and if available summary graph within the pane.
For further details on the graph shown in a particular document window, refer to the following:
For information on:
Control method
Analysis method
Operations
Results
Calibrations
Re-Analysis
January 1998
See page:
6-1
7-1
8-1
11-1
12-1
13-1
5-21
Displaying the graph pane if it is not visible
The graph pane may not always be displayed when you open a document window. To show the graph pane:
1 From the Graph menu, choose Show Graph.
Choosing the Show Graph command again removes the graph from
display.
Sizing the graph pane
You can change the size of the graph pane.
1 Move the mouse pointer to the divider between the table and graph
panes.
2 Move the pointer up or down to manipulate the height of the graph
pane.
5-22
January 1998
common procedures
Sizing and moving the graph
You can manipulate the size and change the location of the graph.
sizing graph
To enlarge or reduce the size of the graph:
1 Click within the graph. When selected, you see a sizing handle in the
lower right corner.
Note: If the legend is concealing the sizing handle, remove the
legend by choosing Legend in the Graph menu. Or, move the
legend, by clicking within it and dragging it to a new location.
2 Drag the sizing handle to the right, left, or diagonally to enlarge or
reduce the size of the graph.
moving graph
To move the location of the graph:
1 Click within the graph to select it.
2 Drag the graph to the new location.
Sizing and moving a summary graph
In the graph pane of a Results or Re-Analysis window, you can view
and manipulate a summary graph. The summary graph always shows
the entire chromatogram plot even if you enlarge part of the graph.
viewing summary graph
To view and remove the summary graph:
1 Choose a Summary Graph command from the Graph menu.
2 Choose the command again to remove the summary graph from
display.
sizing summary graph
To better view the traces shown in the summary graph, you can make it
larger.
1 If the summary graph is not currently selected, click within its box.
2 Position the mouse pointer at the side or corner of the box. The
mouse pointer changes to a two-headed arrow.
3 Click and drag the box to the desired size.
January 1998
5-23
moving summary graph
To change the on-screen location of the summary graph:
1 Click and drag the box to move it to the new location.
Changing the font
The size and appearance of text shown in the graph area, including the
summary graph and legend can be changed.
1 From the Graph menu, choose Font (or Graph Font in some document
windows).
2 When the Font dialog appears, use the drop-down list boxes to set
font information. If necessary, refer to page 5-10 for a description of
the areas of the Font dialog.
3 Choose OK to exit the Font dialog.
5-24
January 1998
common procedures
changing peak font
Choosing the Peak Font command, available in the Graph menu of some
document windows, enables you to change the size and appearance of
peak names. In the Font dialog, two additional options are available.
Rotation. Indicates the angle (0° to 360°) at which peak names appear in
relation to the X axis.
Color. Identifies available color choices for displaying peak names.
January 1998
5-25
Setting graph attributes
The Attributes dialog provides for changing the appearance of lines or
symbols shown in the graph.
To display and set options in the Attributes dialog:
1 From the Graph menu, choose Attributes. Or, double-click on one of
items shown in the legend, if it is displayed.
2 When the Attributes dialog appears, review and if necessary make
changes to the attributes for a line or symbol. The options available
vary depending on the document window.
Legend. Identifies the lines and symbols currently shown in the
graph. The types of lines and symbols vary between document
windows.
To change the attributes for a line or symbol select it from this list box.
Display or Display Symbol/Line. If selected, indicates that the line or
symbol is currently displayed in the graph.
Size. Identifies the width of the line or size of the symbol in pixels.
Color. Lists available color choices for the line or symbol.
Display Peak Names. If selected, indicates that peak names will be
displayed in the graph.
Display Events. If selected, UniPoint displays run-time events (such
as detector autozero) in the graph. Following are the symbols and
text for run-time events. Text is black and displayed at a 45° angle.
5-26
January 1998
common procedures
Event
Symbol
Color/Fill
Text
Detector Event
light gray
Displays ‘Event’
Detector Autozero
light gray
Displays ‘Zero’
Device Front Panel Query
light gray
Displays text
retrieved from
front panel
Fraction Collection: Start
green
Displays tube
designation, for
example, TUBES:1
Fraction Collection: End
red
Displays tube
designation, for
example,
FRACTIONS:1
User Pause: Start
light red
User Pause: End
light red
Synchronization: Start
light gray
Synchronization: End
light gray
Gradient*
*Note: A gradient line appears for each of the pumps used during the
run. The color of the line is the same as that indicated for the
pump in the control method.
Fraction Sites. If selected, indicates that labels will be displayed in
the graph for collected fractions.
3 Choose OK to accept any modifications and exit the dialog. Any
change to a line or symbol is reflected in the graph and the legend.
January 1998
5-27
Removing items from display
To remove an item from display in the graph:
1 From the Graph menu, choose Attributes.
Or, double-click on one of the items shown in the legend, if it is
displayed.
2 When the Attributes dialog appears, select the description for the
item in the Legend list box.
3 Remove the X from the Display check box.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any additional items to remove.
5 To disable display of peak names, remove the X from the Display
Peak Names check box.
6 To disable display of run-time events (such as detector autozero),
remove the X from the Display Event check box.
For a description of run-time event symbols and lines, see page 5-27.
7 Choose OK to accept any modifications and exit the dialog. The
items are no longer displayed.
To redisplay the items, access the Attributes dialog and replace the X in
the Display check box for each item.
Displaying/removing gridlines
You can turn on and off the display of gridlines in the graphs of Results,
Calibration, Operations, and Re-Analysis windows.
1 In the Graph menu of the document window, choose one of the axis
commands. For the Calibration window, the commands are Amount
Axis (for the Y axis) and Area/Height (for the X axis). For the other
three windows, the commands are Signal Axis (for the Y axis) and
Time Axis (for the X axis).
2 When the dialog box appears, remove or insert an X in the Major or
Minor check boxes and choose OK.
3 Repeat the above for the other axis.
5-28
January 1998
common procedures
Legend
The legend identifies what the lines and symbols represent in the graph.
UniPoint automatically sizes the legend box so all items are displayed.
Note: For a list of run-time events whose symbols are not identified in
the legend but may be shown in the graph of Operations, Results,
and Re-Analysis windows, see page 5-27.
displaying legend
To see the legend if it is not displayed:
1 From the Graph menu, choose Legend.
Choosing the Legend command again removes the legend.
moving legend
To change the on-screen location of the legend:
1 Click on a white area within the legend box.
2 Drag the box to the new location.
changing attributes
January 1998
To modify the attributes for an element shown in the legend, see page 526.
5-29
Annotation
All document windows can display an annotation box that lists information for the file being viewed. For example, in the annotation for a
control method, you see configuration information for and parameters
set in the method file.
In all windows except Results and Calibration, you can add comments
to the annotation for a file; see Using the notes or log file text editor on
page 5-34 for more information.
The annotations for UniPoint files used during an HPLC run are placed
in and can be printed with the analysis report.
displaying and removing
annotation
To see the annotation:
1 From the Window menu, choose Annotation.
Choosing the Annotation command again removes the annotation.
sizing annotation box
To better view text in the annotation, you can make the box larger.
1 If the annotation is not currently selected, click within it.
moving annotation box
To change the on-screen location of the annotation box:
1 Click and drag the colored bar at the top of the box to move the entire
box to the new location.
5-30
January 1998
common procedures
changing font
To select a different font for annotation text:
1 Position the mouse pointer in the annotation box.
2 Click the right mouse button.
3 When the menu appears, click on Set Font.
4 When the Font dialog appears, use its options to indicate font
information. If necessary, refer to page 5-10 for a description of the
areas in the Font dialog.
5 Choose OK to exit.
copying text
To copy text in the annotation to the Windows Clipboard.
1 To select a portion of text, move the mouse pointer to the left of the
text to select. Click and drag to highlight the desired text.
3 When the menu appears, choose Copy or Copy All.
January 1998
5-31
Manipulating the toolbar
Each document window has a toolbar that provides quick access to
some options available in the document window.
selecting defaults
You can choose whether or not to automatically display the toolbar
when a document window is created and how many columns it should
have.
1 Choose Options from the File menu.
2 If necessary, click on the Toolbar tab.
3 Use the options under the Toolbar tab to set the appearance of the
toolbar when a document window is created or opened.
Tool Arrangement. If you select None, no tools are displayed when a
document window is created or opened. (You can still display the
tools in a document window by selecting the Toolbar command from
the Window menu.)
If you select Floating Palette, the tools appear within a sizeable and
moveable box.
If you select Fixed Ribbon, the tools appear in a horizontal bar
beneath the menu bar.
Number of Columns (for Floating Palette arrangement). A value of 1
displays a vertical arrangement on-screen for any document window
that is created or opened. Selecting a large number (for example, >15)
displays a horizontal arrangement.
4 Choose OK to save the settings and exit the dialog box. The next time
you open or create a document window, UniPoint uses the
conditions set in the dialog box to display the toolbar.
5-32
January 1998
common procedures
removing toolbar
To remove the toolbar when viewing a document window, choose
Toolbar from the Window menu. (Or double-click on the control menu
box in the upper left corner of a floating palette toolbar).
Choose the Toolbar command again to restore the toolbar.
sizing toolbar
While in a document window, you can manipulate the size of a floating
palette toolbar.
1 Position the mouse pointer at the side or corner of the box.
2 Click and drag the box to modify its size.
UniPoint displays all of the available icons no matter how small you
make the box. It can display the icons in a vertical or horizontal
arrangement or in multiple columns.
moving toolbar
To change the on-screen location of a floating palette toolbar:
1 Click and drag the colored bar at the top of the box to move the box.
displaying tool hints
January 1998
When the Display Tool Tips check box is selected under the Actions tab
of the Options dialog (page 5-32), you see a tips box when you move the
mouse pointer onto a tool icon in the tool bar. The picture at the left
shows the Navigator tool and its tips box.
5-33
Using the notes or log file text editor
A text editor like the one below appears when you do one of the following:
• Choose Notes from the Edit menu. (This command is not available in the
Results and Calibration windows.) Any comments specified in the text
editor appear at the bottom of the annotation portion of analysis reports.
• Open a log file (.GLG extension) generated from a run. (Modifications
made to the log file in the editor are not saved to the file.)
adding text
To add information:
1 Point and click to position the insertion bar in the text editor box.
2 Type the text. Use the BACKSPACE key if you make a mistake and retype
the correct text.
editing text
To modify existing text:
1 Point and click to position the insertion bar to the right of the text to
change. Press BACKSPACE to remove text. Newly typed text is added at
the insertion bar.
Or, click and drag to highlight the text to change. Newly typed text
automatically replaces the highlighted text.
copying text
To copy existing text:
1 Select the line(s) to copy.
Select all text. Choose the Select All button. (Or, press CTRL+A.)
Select portion of text. Move the mouse pointer to the left of the text to
select. Click and hold the mouse button. Drag the mouse to highlight
the desired text.
5-34
January 1998
common procedures
2 Choose Copy. (Or, press CTRL+C.)
The selected text is copied to the clipboard and can be inserted
elsewhere in the annotation (see inserting text, below) or in another
Windows document.
inserting text
To insert text:
1 Point and click to position the insertion bar at the end of the line after
which you want a line inserted. You may need to press the right
arrow key to move the cursor after the last character in the line.
2 Press ENTER.
3 Type the new line of text.
Or, if you have copied or cut text to the Clipboard, choose Paste. (Or,
press CTRL+V.)
deleting text
You can delete all or some of the text in the editor. To do this:
1 Select the line(s) to delete.
the desired text.
2 Press the DELETE key. (Or, press CTRL+X to remove the text and copy it
to the Clipboard.)
changing font
To change the font shown in the annotation:
1 Choose the Select All button. (Or, press CTRL+A.)
2 Choose the Font button.
3 When the Font dialog appears, modify the font selections and choose
OK. (See page 5-10 for a description of the Font dialog.)
printing
To send the text to the printer:
1 Choose the Print button.
2 When the Print dialog appears, verify the selected options and make
any necessary changes.
3 Choose OK to print.
January 1998
5-35
sizing text editor
You can enlarge or reduce the size of the text editor box.
pasting information into
windows program
One of the useful benefits of the Microsoft Windows user interface is
the ability to share text among Windows programs. Information is
copied (or clipped) from one program and pasted into another using an
intermediary program called the Clipboard.
To transfer text:
1 While viewing the editor, select the information to copy.
the desired text.
2 Choose Copy. (Or, press CTRL+C.)
3 Choose Done to close the text editor.
4 Choose Minimize from the Control menu (or click on the Minimize
box) to iconize UniPoint.
5 Open the Windows program.
6 Position the cursor within the window and choose Paste from the
Edit menu. (Or, press CTRL+V.)
5-36
January 1998
common procedures
Using the browse feature within dialogs
In many dialog boxes, there is a Browse button. This button enables you
to select a file name to enter in one of the text boxes or to “link” to that
file so the software can get information from it. Browse allows you to
search the computer or a network disk to locate the appropriate file or
information in a file.
browsing for file
To use the browse feature to select a file:
1 Click within the text or list box that requires a file name or a link to
another file and then click on Browse. (Or, double-click in the text
box.) Below is an example Step Entry dialog used to set up the
operations list for a run.
2 When the Browse dialog appears, use options in the box to choose
the appropriate file. An example dialog is shown below.
3 After you select the file(s), choose OK. The first dialog re-appears and
the path and file name for the file(s) appear.
Note: When browsing for protocol files, you can select multiple files
in the Browse dialog and place the file descriptions in the
control method. To select more than one file, press the CTRL
key while clicking on each file name. To select a range of files,
click on the first file; then while pressing the SHIFT key, click on
the last file name.
January 1998
5-37
Customizing the UniPoint workspace
The workspace is the main work area used by UniPoint. It displays the
document windows, or their icons, that are currently open.
When you have multiple document windows, you can size the windows
and arrange them to suit your needs. Once the workspace is organized,
the software can automatically save the space when you exit or you can
save the arrangement as a workspace file. When the workspace is
saved, UniPoint not only saves the settings for the workspace but the
name of the file that was open within a document window. The next
time you open the workspace file, both the document window and the
associated file are displayed.
Any windows that are open when you restore a workspace have no
effect on the workspace being recalled.
If your workspace has multiple document windows open, it is important
that you know which window is active. The items in UniPoint’s menu
bar change depending on which type of document window is active. In
other words, a Control Method window has a different menu bar than
an Analysis Method window or any other type of document window.
Arranging elements in a workspace
arranging document windows
You can quickly arrange all open document windows so that all or part
of each one is visible.
1 From the Windows menu, choose Cascade or Tile Horizontal or Tile
Vertical. Cascade staggers the document windows so you can see
each one’s title bar. Tile Horizontal sizes and stacks the windows.
Tile Vertical sizes and places the windows side-by-side.
5-38
January 1998
common procedures
arranging icons
UniPoint can arrange icons for opened document windows, or you can
position them yourself.
To arrange icons automatically:
1 From the Windows menu, choose Arrange Icons. UniPoint aligns the
icons for any open document windows along the bottom of its
workspace.
To arrange icons manually:
1 Drag each icon to its new location.
Saving a workspace
You can have UniPoint store the appearance of the workspace when the
software is exited and recall it the next time the software is started. You
can also save a workspace in a file so it can be retrieved by you at any
time.
automatically saving and
recalling workspace
The Save and Restore Workspace feature turns on or off the ability to
recall the last workspace when the software is started. When the feature
is active and you choose Exit in the File menu, the location of any open
document windows and icons, and their files, is stored by UniPoint.
The next time you start the software, it displays the windows and icons
in the same location as before. This feature is turned off when you
install the software.
To turn on the Save and Restore Workspace feature:
1 Choose Options from the File menu.
2 When the Options dialog appears, click on the Actions tab.
3 Choose the Save and Restore Workspace check box.
4 Choose OK.
January 1998
5-39
saving workspace file
To save the appearance of the current workspace to file:
1 From the File menu, choose Save Workspace.
2 When the Workspace Save dialog appears, use its options to specify a
name and storage location for the file.
3 Choose OK.
Opening a workspace file
To display a previously saved workspace:
2 When the Open dialog appears, use its options to locate and select
the file.
When you open the workspace file, the document windows appear in
the same place they were located when the workspace file was saved,
and any associated files are also opened.
Any windows on-screen when you open a workspace remain open
but may be hidden by the workspace.
5-40
January 1998
common procedures
Printing
UniPoint supports printers with Windows drivers. You indicate printer
information when installing Microsoft Windows onto the computer.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide for information on setting
printer information.
Before printing a document:
• Check that the columns in the table pane are wide enough so that the
all of the information within them can be seen.
• Make sure the items in the graph pane are arranged and sized the
way you want them.
• Verify that connections exist between the printer and computer.
• Check that the printer is turned on and has paper in it. Also, check
the printer ON LINE (or equivalent) selection to make sure it is active.
Specifying printer setup options
To select and if necessary set options for the printer to use when generating printouts:
1 From the File menu, choose Print Setup.
2 When the dialog appears, indicate the printer options.
You install printers and indicate the default printer using Microsoft
Windows. See Microsoft Windows User’s Guide for details.
If you click on Options, another dialog displays so you can control
default printer settings for the selected printer. The options in the
setup box vary depending on the printer. Refer to your printer
documentation or click on Help, if that button is available.
3 Choose OK.
January 1998
5-41
Selecting what to print and starting the print
To print information from a document window:
1 Choose the Print command from the File menu.
2 When the Print dialog appears, make sure the appropriate printer is
indicated at the top of the dialog. To select a different printer, choose
Setup.
3 Select what you want to print using the options in the dialog box.
The options available vary depending on the document window, as
you can see in the example dialogs below.
4 Choose OK to start the printing process.
5-42
January 1998
common procedures
changing layout options
To review the layout options used to print a document:
1 Choose Layout from the Print dialog.
2 Use the options in the Page Layout dialog to specify page margins,
size of graph, and order to print annotation, graph, and table.
Margins. In the text box next to each margin (left, right, top, and
bottom), type the width of the margin. The indicated width is added
to the default print area set for the page by the printer. Refer to the
document supplied with the printer if necessary.
Note: The measurement system, mm or inches, is set using the
International program in the Windows Control Panel. If you
change the measurement system, it is used the next time you
open UniPoint.
Graph Height. Indicate the size of the graph as a percentage of the
page. It is printed on a different page than the annotation or table if
necessary.
Position Order. The order in which the various parts shown in the
document window are printed, by default: annotation, graph, table.
3 Choose OK to save parameters and return to the Print dialog.
January 1998
5-43
Transferring information between files
UniPoint allows you to transfer information between two control methods, two analysis methods, or two operations lists that are on-screen at
the same time. You can also copy text from a UniPoint document window
into a Windows word processing program, such as Write. The graph
displayed in a document window can be copied and pasted into a
Windows drawing program, such as Paintbrush.
copying rows of text between
UniPoint windows
To copy the information in one or more rows for inclusion in another
document window’s table:
highlight them in the table. Or, click on a row then choose Select All
from the Edit menu.
2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu. This copies the information into an
intermediary Windows program called the Clipboard.
3 In the designated document window, click on the row before which
the copied row(s) are inserted. (If no rows exist, click on the first row.)
Note: UniPoint checks the information copied between windows and
makes sure that the necessary parameters are set in the
destination window. You see a message if UniPoint cannot
place the information. For example, if you are copying events for
a detector between two control methods, UniPoint verifies that
the detector is named in the destination method. If the detector
is not named, you must assign a description before UniPoint can
paste the events.
copying text into another
Microsoft Windows program
To copy text into a Microsoft Windows word processing program:
1 While viewing document window, select the table rows to copy, as
described above. Or, copy one or more cells, as described below. A cell
is the rectangle at the intersection of a column and row.
a) To select one cell, move the mouse pointer ( ) so it is positioned
over the cell and click the left mouse button. To indicate that the
cell is selected within the highlighted row, the cell has a box
around it, as shown in the following diagram.
5-44
January 1998
common procedures
To select a range of cells, click and drag the mouse pointer over the
cells. The selected cells have a box around them, as shown in the
following diagram.
b) Click the right mouse button to display the menu shown at the left.
c) Choose the Copy Cells command. The Copy Cells command
copies the contents of the selected cell(s) into the Windows
Clipboard.
3 Once the text has been copied to the Clipboard, choose Minimize
from the Control menu (or click on the minimize box) to iconize
UniPoint.
4 Start the Windows program.
5 Position the cursor within the window and choose Paste from the
Edit menu.
copying graph into another
Microsoft Windows program
To copy the graph into another Microsoft Windows program:
1 Manipulate the appearance of the graph as described earlier in this
section.
2 Click on the graph so it is selected.
3 Choose Copy from the Edit menu. This copies the graph into the
Clipboard.
4 Start the Windows drawing program.
If you are pasting into Paintbrush, maximize the application
window. Also enlarge the work area by removing the tools and
palette from display. Choose the appropriate commands in the View
menu to do this.
6 Modify the image as necessary.
January 1998
5-45
Getting software version number
To view version information for UniPoint:
1 Choose About from the Help menu.
5-46
January 1998
6 Control Methods
In this section, you learn how to set and modify control method conditions. A control method contains system configuration information and
describes a procedure to execute during a chromatography run.
In the control method, you identify the Gilson devices in the HPLC
system and indicate time-based commands to send to them during a run.
These commands can include such things as setting mobile phase flow
rate and concentration, detector parameters, and data collection start
and stop.
Control methods can also be created that get system components up and
running. Other control methods may shut down HPLC devices at the
end of the day or at the detection of a system error.
To control HPLC devices, you need to do the following:
• assign a description, or use the default description assigned by
Gilson,
• indicate any additional settings required for device control, and
• send timed events to, or wait for input from, the device.
The procedures for doing the above are outlined in this section. Plus
there is information about the Control Method window.
January 1998
6-1
Control Method window
Using the options in the Control Method window, you specify method
conditions for controlling devices. You access this window by creating
a control method file or by opening an existing file. The following
illustration shows an example Control Method window, with events
already set.
Refer to Section 5, Common Procedures for more information on manipulating parts of the table or graph displayed in a document window.
menu bar
toolbar
table pane
annotation box
graph pane
legend box
status bar
menu bar
Choose available functions from the drop-down menus found beneath
the items on the menu bar.
Menu
File
Edit
Device
Event
Table
Graph
Window
Help
6-2
Description
Create, save, print, delete files or exit a window or UniPoint.
Locate, make changes to, or transfer information.
Name installed devices and other resources used by the method.
Issue timed instructions to devices.
Display or modify appearance of the table pane.
Display or modify appearance of the graph pane.
Re-arrange windows or icons, or activate a window; display
file annotation or toolbar.
Learn about UniPoint.
January 1998
control methods
table pane
Lists the timed events currently set for the control method.
If you see the message **invalid command** in the table, the device for
which a command was previously set is not listed in the configuration
for the control method. Before executing the method during a run, check
the configuration for the control method using the System Configuration
command in the method's File menu.
Double-clicking on a row for a timed event automatically displays the
dialog box used to set up the event.
Using the right mouse button, you can double-click on a row that
specifies the timed event for a protocol and display the window that
shows the instructions set in the protocol.
Double-clicking on the top (header) row displays a dialog for changing
the format of the columns shown in the table.
graph pane
Shows a graphic representation of timed events and mobile phase
concentration information set in the method.
toolbar
Provides quick access to some options available in the Control Method
window. To activate a tool, just click on its icon.
navigator tool
Displays Navigator.
open tool
Displays Open dialog.
save tool
Stores method to disk. If it has not been
saved, displays the Save As dialog.
print tool
Displays Print dialog.
mobile phase tool
Displays Mobile Phase Event dialog.
data channels tool
Displays Data Channels Event dialog.
contact tool
Displays Contact Event dialog.
injector tool
Displays Injector Event dialog.
detector tool
Displays Detector Event dialog.
fraction collector tool
Displays Fraction Collector Event dialog.
generic device tool
Displays Generic Device Event dialog.
system tool
Displays System Event dialog.
To turn off/on the toolbar, choose Toolbar from the Window menu.
January 1998
6-3
annotation box
Displays configuration information for and parameters set in the control
method. To turn on/off the annotation, choose its command from the
Window menu.
To add your own comments, use the Notes command in the Edit menu.
Any comments specified in the text editor appear at the bottom of the
annotation portion of analysis reports.
legend box
Identifies the symbols shown in the graph. To turn on/off the legend,
choose its command from the Graph menu.
By double-clicking on an item in the legend, you can access the Attributes dialog. Use that dialog box to remove events from display or to
change the size of symbols and lines shown in the graph.
Note: As a default description, UniPoint assigns Injector to an installed
injector and its dilutor. That is why Injector is listed twice in the
legend: once for the injector and once for the dilutor.
status bar
6-4
Displays help message if a menu command is highlighted.
January 1998
control methods
Checking configuration file
To control Gilson devices connected along the GSIOC, UniPoint must
know about those devices. It finds this information in the configuration
file.
If you are running multiple HPLC systems from UniPoint, check that
the default file is appropriate before you create a control method.
1 If necessary, close any open document windows (the Navigator, if it
appears, can remain on-screen.)
2 From the File menu, choose Default System Configuration.
The Default System Configuration dialog appears. Its list box
identifies the devices that the software thinks are currently connected
along the Gilson Serial Input/Output Channel (GSIOC). The path to
and name of the configuration file are listed at the bottom of the
dialog box.
3 Use the options in the dialog box to modify or select a different
configuration file. See System Configuration appendix for details.
link between configuration
and method
January 1998
When you save a control method, the path, name, and information
in the configuration file is stored in the control method file. Each time
you open the control method, UniPoint searches for the associated
configuration file and checks the information in that file against the
information in the control method. Refer to Configuration checks on
page A-7 if you see a message box indicating that the configuration
information does not match.
6-5
Assigning descriptions
In the Control Method window, use the commands in the Device menu
to review and assign descriptions to system components.
For all resources except data channels and contacts, UniPoint assigns a
default description when the device is identified in the method’s
configuration file. You can review and modify these Gilson-assigned
descriptions to meet your needs. Whenever the device is referred to in
UniPoint, it is identified by its description.
For example, when specifying your own descriptions for pumps, the
description can identify the fluid being pumped, such as, Acetonitrile.
For data channels, you can identify the wavelength and sensitivity for
each channel, for example, 254 nm at 0.1 sens.
Note: A default description may not be assigned if you add a device to
the configuration file after the control method has been created or
opened. You therefore need to specify a description before
issuing events to the device.
To access the dialog box for assigning or changing a description:
1 Choose the device or resource from the Device menu.
The Generic command enables you to set descriptions for additional
devices not included under one of the other commands, such as 506C
System Interface, 817 Valve Actuator, or 831 Temperature Regulator.
Following are example dialog boxes used to set descriptions. The
appearance of the dialog boxes and procedures for setting descriptions
are the same. The top area of the dialog is used for description assignment and modification.
As you can see in the examples, additional areas and options may be
available depending on the device. See Additional device control
parameters on page 6-9 for details.
6-6
January 1998
control methods
specifying description
To assign a description if one has not been set:
1 Choose the device name in the Unit ID/Name list box.
2 Type a description in the Description box. Or, you can type the same
text that appears next to the Name field if it meets your needs. You
can use upper and lower case letters, numbers, and spaces in the
description.
3 Click on the device name in the Unit ID/Name list box to enter the
description.
UniPoint assigns the description Injector to an injector and its dilutor.
This combines their command sets and makes issuing timed events to
them easier. You can assign different descriptions to the injector and
dilutor and separate their command sets.
The only devices that can be assigned the same description are an
injector and its dilutor.
modifying description
To change a description:
1 Click on the device name in the Unit ID/Name list box.
2 Type the new description in the Description box.
3 Click on Change to update the list box.
January 1998
6-7
removing description
To delete a description for a device not used in the method, refer to the
steps below. For example, if you have an HPLC system with three
pumps but only two are required for the method, remove the description
for the unused pump. Gilson recommends that you do not remove the
pump from the configuration associated with the method.
1 Click on the device name in the Unit ID/Name list box.
2 If necessary, highlight the text in the Description box.
3 Press DELETE or BACKSPACE to remove the description.
4 Click on the device name in the Unit ID/Name list box to update the
list box.
You see a message box if you have removed a description for a device
which has been issued timed events. Choose Yes to remove the
events for the device. Choose No to keep the events. (You see
**invalid device** and **invalid command** in the table. Before using
the method in the run, you must enter a description for the device.)
Choose Cancel to return to the dialog so you can re-enter the
description.
exiting dialog
When you are finished specifying descriptions:
1 Click on OK to save the descriptions.
Depending on the dialog box, you may see a message box if
additional parameters are required before you can exit the box. These
parameters are described in Additional device control parameters,
below.
6-8
January 1998
control methods
Additional device control parameters
In some of the dialog boxes used for setting device descriptions, you see
elements for identifying additional parameters. These parameters
identify such things as mobile phase conditions and the names of
protocols and tray files.
Mobile phase settings
For each mobile phase, set compressibility and refill parameters.
2 Check the descriptions assigned to each pump. If you need
information on changing a description, refer to Assigning
descriptions on page 6-6.
UniPoint assigns default descriptions to the pumps based on their
unit IDs. For example, if the pump’s ID is 1, its description is Pump
1. You may want to modify the description to reflect the liquid being
pumped, for example, Water or Acetonitrile.
3 Choose the Settings button once the appropriate descriptions have
been set.
4 When the Pump Settings dialog appears, select the name of the pump
in the list box.
January 1998
6-9
5 Indicate or modify values in the text boxes, described below. When
finished, choose OK to accept the values. Or, choose Cancel to revert
to previous settings.
Compressibility. How much a mobile phase can be compressed
when placed under pressure. The software uses the compressibility
setting to correct the flow characteristics of the system to reflect the
mobile phase being pumped. Use the compressibility values (in
Mbar-1 or 10-5 MPa) listed below.
Liquid
Water
Benzene
Chloroform
Methylene Chloride
Carbon Tetrachloride
Ethanol
Acetone
Methanol
n-Heptane
n-Hexane
Diethyl Ether
Acetonitrile*
Tetrahydrofuran*
Water:Methanol, 10:90*
20° C
46
94-95
97-101
103-105
110-112
123-127
121-123
140-145
150-165
184-187
-
Temperature
25° C
30° C
46
45
96-97
101-103
97
108-110
97
106-108
112-113
114-116
118-119
124
133
125-127
129-130
142-149
150-155
161-171
165-180
195-200
208-209
99
93
117
86
56
52
46
40
-
40° C
44
110
118-119
120-122
126-127
144-156
138
160
183
-
From the Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, CRC Press, 60 (1979).
* Experimentally determined by Gilson.
Water:Methanol mixtures are volume:volume mixtures.
Refill. The duration (125 to 999 ms) of one piston refill stroke.
For analytical flows (< 10 ml/min), a fast refill of 125 is usually
appropriate. For preparative flows (>10 ml/min), use a value in the
range of 250 to 400. Slower speeds may be necessary when pumping
viscous mobile phases.
Inlet Pressure P0. (For users of UniPoint Software with SF Pressure
Control, ordered separately) After setting information for the
supercritical fluid pump, choose the SF Setting button. In the Inlet
Pressure P0 text box, type the pressure at the inlet of the supercritical
fluid pump head. It is the vapor pressure of CO2 at ambient temperature, typically 6 MPa (60 bar or 870 psi) at 22° C. A table of inlet
pressures at other temperatures is available in the UniPoint on-line
help, accessed via the Pump Settings dialog.
6-10
January 1998
control methods
Data channel parameters
UniPoint can acquire and display several channels of data during a run.
You need to identify the channels being acquired and set initial run-time
scaling options for those channels. Then you can set timed events for
starting and stopping data collection via those channels, as described
on page 6-18.
To acquire data, you must make the appropriate connections in the
HPLC system. See the UniPoint System Installation Guide for details. Or, if
you have a 170 Detector, refer to its user's guide.
• If you have a Gilson model 116 through 119 Detector, up to three
channels of data are sent along the GSIOC cable. Specify a description for each detector channel being collected. For a fourth channel of
data to be transferred, make an analog connection between the 116
through 119 Detector and the other detector. Specify a description for
the 116 through 119 analog input being used.
• For a Gilson 112, 115, 122, or 133 Detector or a non-Gilson detector,
make the analog connections between the detector and a Gilson 506C
System Interface. Then set descriptions for each 506C analog channel
being collected.
• For a Gilson 170 Detector, you can monitor up to 8 data channels via
the RS-232 connection between the computer and the 170 Detector.
Specify a description for each data channel to be monitored.
setting channel
information
To indicate descriptions and scaling options for each data channel, refer
to the procedures below. These options control the appearance of
channel data collected and shown on-screen at run time.
Note: If data is being collected via a 170 Detector, additional options
are available in the Data Channel Options dialog. For information on those options, refer to the user's guide for the detector or
UniPoint's on-line help.
1 Choose Data Channel from the Device menu.
2 Indicate a description for each channel to acquire. If necessary, refer
to Assigning descriptions on page 6-6.
3 Choose the Options button. The Data Channel Options dialog
appears.
January 1998
6-11
4 Select the name of the data channel in the list box.
5 Indicate values in the areas of the dialog box, described below.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each channel. Then choose OK to accept the
settings. Or, choose Cancel to revert to previous settings.
Following are descriptions of the areas in the Strip Chart Options
dialog. The auto range and display time options pertain to all data
channels being collected. The other options relate to the data channel
whose description is currently highlighted in the list box.
Auto Range. If this check box is selected, UniPoint automatically plots
data to the minimum and maximum peak height determined across all
collected data channels. Selection of this box overrides any other limits
set for individual data channels in the dialog box.
Channel Scale Parameters. Lists the data channels currently set for the
control method. Select the channel to review or modify its options.
Data Rate. The number of data points collected per second for all
channels during the run. The maximum value is 80 points per second.
However, the default of 20 is appropriate for most runs.
Auto Zero. Select this option to set the first detected data point to zero, at
the start of data collection.
% Offset. Use this parameter to move the channel’s trace away from the
horizontal axis (and from other channel traces) on the screen and on the
strip chart printout. Express the offset as a percent displacement from
the horizontal axis (0%). The default value is 0% offset.
Minimum and Maximum. The lower and upper limits for the signal axis
displayed on-screen during the run. Be aware of the following:
• If the Auto Range check box is selected the software disregards these
values and uses the minimum and maximum heights for all channels
to determine the signal axis.
• If Auto Range is not selected and you indicate different minimum
and maximum values for each channel being collected, the software
uses the lowest and highest values entered to determine the signal
axis. For example, if 0 and 10 mV were entered for the minimum and
maximum values for the 254 nm channel and 0 and 100 mV were
entered for the 280 nm channel, the signal axis would be 0 to 100 mV.
Scale. How UniPoint scales the channel’s data during the run: mV or
user units.
If you indicate a scale other than mV for a channel, make corresponding
changes to the scaling for each of the other channels being collected.
6-12
January 1998
control methods
Display Time. The time period to display on the X axis of the strip chart
display (shown in the graph pane of the Operations window).
mVolt (displayed for User Units scale). The number of mVolts that
correspond to the value indicated in the User Units text box.
User Units (displayed for User Units scale). The number of user units
that correspond to the value indicated in the mVolt text box.
Label (displayed for User Units scale). A description of the units.
customizing appearance
of graph
To review and modify the color assigned to data channel traces and
turn on or off gridlines in the graph:
1 From the Data Channel Options dialog, choose Attributes.
2 When the Attributes dialog appears, select a channel from the list box
and check the options for it. If necessary, make any necessary
modifications. When finished, choose OK or Cancel.
Data Channel. Lists the description for each data channel.
Style. Lists available styles for the line: solid, dashed, or dotted.
Color. Lists available color choices for the line.
Thickness. Identifies the width of the line in pixels.
Signal Grid. Indicates which gridlines appear for the Y axis. Major
gridlines are aligned with numbered tick marks while minor
gridlines are positioned between the numbered tick marks.
Time Grid. Indicates which gridlines appear for the X axis. Major
January 1998
6-13
Injector options
Additional control parameters for a Gilson injector and its dilutor may
include specifying a protocol file and tray file. These conditions are set
in the Injector dialog (Device menu/Injector command). Additional
control parameters for an injection pump include compressibility and
refill rates.
To see what additional command buttons may be available for a device,
choose the description for the device in the Devices list box.
protocol file
An injector protocol consists of a set of untimed sequential instructions
executed by an injector and its dilutor. When the control method is
executed during a run, UniPoint starts the injector protocol at the
indicated time point. Once the protocol starts, it executes independently
from the control method unless synchronization events have been set
between the two. See Protocols section for more information on creating
a protocol and synchronizing it with a control method.
To select the protocol file(s), use the Browse button.
To execute a protocol when the control method is being run, specify a
timed event for it. See page 6-18.
tray file
A tray file identifies the groups of tubes in the rack(s) installed on an
injector. When you issue a command using the Event menu that moves
the injector’s needle, you must indicate what position it moves to. That
position is specified in the associated tray file.
Choose the Tray Editor button to access the Tray Editor Software. That
software enables you to set up the file or use its File menu to select the
name of an existing tray file. See Tray Editor section for more information.
6-14
January 1998
control methods
injection pump options
When you choose the name of an injection pump in the Devices list box,
you see an Options button. Clicking on this button accesses a dialog for
setting refill and compressibility. Refer to page 6-10 for details on these
parameters.
Detector options
You can set detection parameters as timed events or in a generic protocol
file. See Protocols section.
Use the Browse button in the Detector dialog to select the file(s).
Fraction collector options
Additional control parameters for a fraction collector may include
specifying a protocol file and tray file and setting channel and mV full
scale information for peak collection.
January 1998
6-15
protocol file
You can set collection mode parameters as timed events or in a generic
protocol file. See Protocols section for information on creating protocols.
Also, be aware that Start and Stop Collection commands must be timed
events in the control method.
To select the protocol file(s), use the Browse button.
tray file
A tray file identifies the groups of tubes in the rack(s) installed on the
fraction collector. When you issue a command that moves the collector’s
dispense head, you must indicate what position it moves to. That
position is specified in the associated tray file.
Choose the Tray Editor button to access the Tray Editor Software. That
software enables you to set up the file or use its File menu to select the
name of an existing tray file. Refer to the Tray Editor section for more
information.
monitor channel, mV full
scale, and delay volume
Choose the Options button to access the Fraction Collector Options
dialog. In this dialog, indicate the data channel to monitor and the mV
full scale of the analog signal sent to the fraction collector if you are
collecting fractions by peak. The mV full scale value specified in this
dialog box must be the same as that set in the Data Channel Options
dialog; see page 6-11.
Using the Delay Volume text box, you can set the amount of eluent to be
diverted to waste before collection into the current fraction site during
the run. For a table listing delay times for specific lengths of tubing, refer
to UniPoint’s on-line help.
Interface only and contact event option
Within a control method, you indicate the timed events to issue via
contacts. As a default, the Contacts dialog only shows contacts available on the 506C System Interface. To see all contacts available for
Gilson devices, remove the X from the Interface Only check box. If
necessary, you can then assign descriptions to any other contacts being
used.
6-16
January 1998
control methods
After naming an input contact, select the Event check box if you want an
event mark to appear in chromatograms. UniPoint automatically
generates the event mark when the contact goes from an “open” to a
“closed” state. On the chromatogram plot, UniPoint places a triangle
and the contact description at the time of the event.
High and low temperature limits
If you have a Gilson 831 Temperature Controller installed, UniPoint can
monitor for high and low temperatures.
1 Choose Generic from the Device menu.
2 Choose the 831 Temperature Controller in the list box and choose
Options.
3 When the Generic Device Options dialog appears, select the
temperature controller in the list box. Then indicate temperature
limits in the text boxes.
4 When finished choose OK to accept the values. Or, choose Cancel to
revert to previous settings.
What UniPoint does when it detects a temperature error is set in the
Error handling dialog. Refer to Error handling on page 6-39.
January 1998
6-17
Scheduling timed events
Each command to issue at a specified time during a run is referred to as
an “event.” You can specify events that set the gradient profile, start and
stop data collection, run a protocol file that controls the injector, or send
or wait for a contact signal.
Using the dialogs within the Event menu, you tell UniPoint when to issue
commands to Gilson devices via the Gilson Serial Input/Output Channel
(GSIOC). The GSIOC is a communications channel that connects
UniPoint to Gilson devices such as pumps, detector, injector and fraction
collector.
You can display an Event dialog box by doing one of the following:
1 Choose the device from the Event menu.
Or, click on an event tool in the control method’s toolbar (see page 6-3).
Or, double-click on an event in the control method’s table.
Hint: While an Event dialog box is on-screen, you can quickly access
the dialog for another device type by clicking its tool in the
toolbar.
The appearance and procedures for setting events within each dialog box
are similar. Following are example Event dialogs.
6-18
January 1998
control methods
Within an Event dialog box, there is a Time box for indicating the time
point at which to issue the event and a Comment box for entering an
optional user description of the event. If you enter a comment, it appears
in the status box at run time.
Depending on the device, UniPoint displays a combination of various
text boxes, option buttons, and list boxes. You use those boxes to specify
the device, command, and any command parameters. The commands
available for each device are described later in this section.
When sending commands to the same device, allow enough time for the
device to perform the operation indicated by the command before
issuing it another command. As a suggestion, separate the commands
by a minimum of 0.1 min.
If you indicate more than one event, for different devices, at the same
time point, they are sent in the order they appear in the table.
The up and down arrows in the upper right corner enable you to step
through events for the device type listed in the dialog’s title bar. The text
next to the arrows reads New Event if a new event is being inserted, or it
reads Event x of x to identify the event whose information is shown.
adding event
To add a timed event:
1 If necessary, clear information from some of the text boxes (such as
the Comment box) by choosing New. This also displays New Event
next to the up and down arrows in the upper right corner of the
dialog.
2 Indicate time and command parameters.
Note: Instead of entering a value in the parameter box for most
commands, you can enter an expression consisting of a
variable and mathematical operations. For example, instead
of specifying the wavelength value for the detector, you could
indicate Wavelength. When you set the operations list for the
run, UniPoint prompts you for the wavelength and you can
indicate it at that time.
3 Choose Insert.
The event appears in the control method’s table and time line. Since
each event has an associated time, the software places it in
chronological order in the control method’s table.
January 1998
6-19
deleting event
To remove an event:
1 Use the up or down arrow so the information for the event is
displayed.
2 Choose Delete. The control method’s table and time line are updated to
reflect the removal of the event.
modifying event
To change parameters for an event:
1 Use the up or down arrow so the information for the event is
displayed.
2 Make the necessary changes to the event.
3 Choose Change.
exiting dialog
When you are finished specifying events:
1 Choose Done.
Constructing a mobile phase profile
With a mobile phase profile, every event describes the flow rate and
composition of the mobile phase components at a particular time.
Follow these guidelines for constructing a profile:
1 Display the Mobile Phase Event dialog using the Event menu or
toolbar.
Note: If you are using UniPoint with SF Pressure Control (ordered
separately), you will also see a text box for setting the P2
Pressure gradient for the 821 Pressure Regulator.
For the P2 Pressure, indicate the pressure to achieve at the
column outlet. Values between 0 and 40 MPa (400 bar or 8700
psi) are valid.
6-20
January 1998
control methods
2 Begin the gradient profile at time 0.00 min to set initial conditions.
Note: If pumps may already be running before the start of this
method, set the first gradient and flow rate at a time later than
0.00 min. By doing this, the pumps can ramp smoothly from
the current conditions to the new conditions.
3 Indicate the initial flow rate to achieve and percent composition to
derive from each pump at 0.00 min.
4 Insert the event into the control method table and time-line graph.
5 Complete the mobile phase profile by adding additional time and
composition values into the text boxes.
Remember to choose Insert to define each event!
6 When you finish constructing the profile, exit the Mobile Phase Event
dialog.
previewing gradient
UniPoint can display a simulation of the actual gradient that can be
achieved during the run using the gradient profile that you set.
Note: If your HPLC configuration does not include a Gilson 811 Mixer,
UniPoint cannot display the gradient simulation.
1 From the Graph menu, choose the Gradient Simulation command. It
may take a few seconds for UniPoint to display the gradient.
2 To remove the gradient, choose the Gradient Simulation command
again.
Device commands
The following pages have more information on the available commands
for controlling Gilson devices. For event dialogs that display listings of
commands, the commands are presented in alphabetical order.
January 1998
6-21
Pumps
mobile phase
For mobile phase pumps, you can indicate the flow rate and composition of the mobile phase components. See Constructing a mobile phase
profile on page 6-20.
injection pump
If you are controlling an injection pump for an autopreparative system,
set events using the following commands.
Note: For additional information, obtain a copy of the Autopreparative
System Control Technical Note from your Gilson representative.
peristaltic pump
Command
Description
Lock/Unlock Front Panel
Inhibits/provides use of front panel during
a run.
Record Display
Copies display into report.
Set Dispense Volume x Rate
Indicates sample injection amount. Use this
or the Set Dispense Volume command.
Set Dispense Volume x Time
Indicates sample injection amount.
Following are the commands available for a Minipuls 3 Peristaltic
Pump. You access these commands using the Generic command in the
Event menu.
Command
Description
Inhibits/provides use of front panel during
a run.
Prime
Starts/stops priming of tubing.
Record Display
Set Pump Speed
Identifies the pump speed in hundredths of
revolutions per minute (RPM).
Start Clockwise/
Counterclockwise
Starts the pump by indicating the desired
direction of flow.
Stop
Stops flow.
Data channels
For all data channels that have been identified, you can issue commands that start collection and later stop collection via the channels.
During a run, the software automatically begins integrating data at the
start of data collection if:
• an analysis method has been indicated and
• an inhibit integration event has not been set at time 0.00 in the
analysis method.
6-22
January 1998
control methods
Contacts
For an output contact, you can open, close, or pulse the output signal.
For an input contact, you can Wait or Wait with Alarm (meaning
UniPoint beeps until the input contact receives a signal from the peripheral device).
To control devices via contacts, the device (injector, detector, chart
recorder, fraction collector, and so on) must accept and sometimes send
contact closure signals. And, the appropriate contact connections must
be made between the devices.
Note: Some peripheral devices cannot respond to a pulsed signal. In
those cases, schedule an event to close the output contact followed by an event to open the same contact. If you fail to open
the contact, it remains closed in subsequent methods.
Detector
As a guideline for controlling detectors, you set events that identify the
detection mode and set wavelength and sensitivity parameters for that
mode.
Note: You can also set detection parameters in a generic protocol file.
See Protocols section.
Following are the commands for Gilson detectors. The most commonly
used commands are available. If you require additional functionality,
see GSIOC command strings on page 6-36.
116 or 117 UV detector and 119 UV/VIS detector
Command
Description
Autozero Channels
Zeroes data channels.
Inhibits/provides use of detector’s front panel during a run.
Record Display
Copies display into report. For 116 Detector, copies first line of display only.
Record Parameter
For 117 or 119 Detector, copies the value of the indicated software parameter
into the analysis report. Refer to the information on the P command in GSIOC
appendix of the user's guide for the detector.
Set Dual Peak Width
Value between 4.0 and 99.0 seconds.
Set Dual Ratio Multiplier
If all peaks for wavelengths 1 and 2 are small, set the ratio multiplier to a
number greater than 1. If all peaks are not of similar heights, set the multiplier
to a number less than 1.
Set Dual Ratio Threshold
Set the threshold (in AU) higher than the highest baseline noise level.
Set Dual Sensitivity 1
Value depends on flow cell; see listing for Set Single Sensitivity 1.
Set Dual Sensitivity 2
Set Dual Wavelength 1
For 116 or 117 Detector, value between 190 and 380 nm. For 119 Detector,
value between 190 and 720 nm.
January 1998
6-23
Set Dual Wavelength 2
For 116 or 117 Detector, value between 190 and 380 nm. For 119 Detector, value
between 190 and 720 nm.
Set Lamp Saver Option On/Off
For 119 Detector, when Lamp Save Option is on, the detector automatically turns
off a lamp if it is not being used by the detector.
Set Mode
Identifies the operating mode for the detector. For the selected mode, sends the
following information if the channel has been defined and collection initiated.
Single Mode:
Channel A - Wavelength/Sensitivity 1
Channel B - Wavelength/Sensitivity 2
Channel C - % Transmittance
Dual Mode:
Channel A - Wavelength 1/Sensitivity 1
Channel B - Wavelength 2/Sensitivity 2
Channel C - Ratio
Scan Mode:
Channel A - Wavelength/Sensitivity 1
Channel B - Wavelength/Sensitivity 2
Channel C - Scan
Set Scan End Wavelength
Set Scan Out Time
Time it takes chart recorder to trace a wavelength scan on strip chart paper
(doesn’t affect time to scan a peak). Value between 0.1 and 20 minutes.
Set Scan Peak Width
Set Scan Sensitivity 1
Set Scan Start Wavelength
For 116 or 117 Detector, value between 190 and 380 nm. For a 119 Detector,
value between 190 and 720 nm.
Set Scan Wavelength
Monitor wavelength. For a 116 or 117 Detector, value between 190 and 380 nm.
For 119 Detector, value between 190 and 720 nm.
Set Single Peak Width
Set Single Sensitivity 1
Value depends on flow cell installed.
5 mm: range - 0.001 to 2.0 AU
2 mm: range - 0.002 to 5.0 AU
0.2 mm: range - 0.02 to 50.0 AU
0.05 mm: range - 0.1 to 200 AU
Set Single Sensitivity 2
Set Single Wavelength
Start Scan
Initiates scan between Scan Start Wavelength and Scan End Wavelength.
Start File
Value between 1 and 9. File must be created using the detector’s software.
Turn Lamp On/Off
or Turn Lamps On/Off
or Toggle Lamp State
For 117 Detector, turns on/off UV lamp.
For 119 Detector, turns on/off UV and if applicable VIS lamp.
For 116 Detector, turns UV lamp on or off depending on current state.
6-24
January 1998
control methods
118 UV/VIS detector
Command
Description
Autozero Channels
Zeroes data channels.
Inhibits/provides use of detector’s front panel during a run.
Record Display
Record Parameter
Copies the value of the indicated software parameter into report. Refer to the
information on the P command in GSIOC appendix of detector’s User’s Guide.
Set Peak Width
Set Sensitivity 1
Value depends on flow cell installed.
5 mm: range - 0.001 to 2.0 AU
2 mm: range - 0.002 to 5.0 AU
0.2 mm: range - 0.02 to 50.0 AU
0.05 mm: range - 0.1 to 200 AU
Set Sensitivity 2
Value depends on flow cell; see listing for Set Sensitivity 1.
Set Wavelength
Value between 190 and 720 nm.
Start File
Value between 1 and 9. File must be created using the detector’s software.
Set Lamp Save Option On/Off
When Lamp Save Option is on, the detector automatically turns off a lamp if it is
not being used by the detector.
Turn Lamps On/Off
Turns on/off UV lamp.
122 fluorometer
Note: For details on how to control the 122 via UniPoint, obtain a copy of the
122 Fluorometer Control Technical Note from your Gilson representative.
Command
Description
Autozero
Zeroes analog outputs.
Event Marker
Adds event marker to recorder output.
Run Program
Starts timed program created using the fluorometer’s software.
Scan Emission Spectrum
Scans emission spectrum. To set parameters for and output the scan, use the
fluorometer’s software.
Scan Excitation Spectrum
Scans excitation spectrum. To set parameters for and output the scan, use the
fluorometer’s software.
Set Emission Bandwidth
Select between 10 nm (to improve wavelength selectivity), 18 nm (standard
setting), or 40 nm (to enlarge the fluorescence signal).
Set Emission Wavelength
Indicate a value between 200 and 900 nm.
Set Excitation Wavelength
Indicate a value between 200 and 900 nm.
Set CR Filter w/ Response Speed
Selects the CR filter and identifies the response speed: fast, standard, or slow.
January 1998
6-25
Set Digital Filter w/ Response Speed Selects the digital filter and identifies the response speed (in seconds): 3, 5, 10,
20, or 40. The digital filter method reduces baseline noise more than the CR
filter method. A digital filter speed of 3 is approximately equivalent to a CR
response speed of standard. A digital speed of 5 is approximately equivalent to
a CR filter response speed of slow.
A period of approximately 3 times the set value is required before the effect of
the digital filter is seen.
Set Lamp Off Timer
Turns off lamp when specified time period (in hours) has elapsed: 99.9 hour
maximum.
Set PMT Gain
Select 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
Set Signal Attenuation
Select 0 (which is the same as S in the fluorometer’s software), 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64, 128, or 256.
Note: The attenuation setting affects the recorder output. It has no influence on
integrator output. Recorder output is 0 when attenuation is set to 0.
Integrator output can be considered as recorder output with the attenuation fixed at 1.
Stop Program
Stops program created using fluorometer’s software.
170 diode array detector
Note:
For details on how to control the 170 via UniPoint, refer to the 170 user's
guide.
Command
Description
Balance Detector
Reads the current signal value at each wavelength and tells the analog-to-digital
converter that the value corresponds to 0 AU. This command affects the onscreen plotting of the diode array channels.
Caution! Up to 1 minute may be required to execute a Balance Detector timed
event. Therefore, you may need to insert the Balance Detector
command as part of a start-up method. Or, ensure that you allow
enough time for this event to occur before issuing later timed events.
Set Analog Channel 1
Sets the following parameters:
Monitor (nm) - The wavelength being monitored.
Reference (nm) - The wavelength used to correct for background and for
instabilities in the detector. Indicate a wavelength close to the monitor
wavelength but that is in a region of non-absorbance.
UniPoint automatically uses a 10 nm bandwidth for the monitor wavelength
and a 40 nm bandwidth for the reference wavelength.
Set Analog Channel 2
Sets the same parameters as described for the Set Channel 1 command.
Set DAD Slit Width
Follow these guidelines when selecting a slit width:
• Use 4 nm slit width for normal applications.
• Use narrow slit width (for example, 1 nm) if your analytes have narrow
absorbance bands and high concentrations.
• Use a wide slit width (for example, 16 nm) to detect very low concentrations.
Note: Do not change the slit width during the run. Insert the Set Slit Width
command at the beginning of the control method or as part of a start-up
method.
Turn DAD Lamps On/Off
6-26
Powers on the deuterium and tungsten lamps.
January 1998
control methods
Injector and its syringe pump or dilutor
Depending on how you are controlling your injector and its syringe
pump or dilutor, you may need to set additional files before you can
indicate timed events. The instructions used to control the injector
system may be created using one of the following:
• Protocol file in UniPoint
• File stored in injector (non-XL version)
• Gilson Sampler Manager Software (model 719)
In most cases, the events in the control method start a file that controls
the injector and its syringe pump or dilutor and perform any synchronization between the injection of the sample and the control method.
Following are the UniPoint commands available for injectors and
dilutors. (These same commands are available for use in protocols. See
Protocols section for details.) Since the injector and syringe pump or
dilutor can be assigned the same description, their command lists are
combined under the Event menu. This makes issuing commands to
them easier.
Injector
Command
Description
Home Needle
Moves needle to left rear of injector.
Lock/Unlock Keypad
For non-XL version injector, inhibits/provides use of keypad during a run.
Move Arm to Injection Port
Moves and lowers needle into injection valve's port.
Move Arm to Rinse Station
Moves and lowers needle into rinse station. Use the Dispense command to
clean. Since some models of Gilson injectors have multiple ports in the rinse
station and some models have multiple rinse stations, rinse station commands
are model dependent. The commands available for your injector are shown in
the Injector Event dialog.
Move Arm to Sample Location
Moves the injector's needle into the specified sample tube.
If you are selecting the sample to be injected, Gilson recommends that you
enter a variable (for example, SampleLocation or Tube) in the Sample text box.
Entering a variable name will cause a column to appear in an operations list
that uses the control method. (See page 6-37 for more information on
variables.) In the operations list, you can then indicate the zone and tube.
If you are doing sample preparation steps, choose the sample location. To do
this, double-click in the Sample text box. When the Browse Tray File window
appears, click in the appropriate zone so its tubes become light blue. Then
click on the tube location so its circle becomes red. Choose OK. When the
Injector Event dialog re-appears, the selected zone and tube appear in the
Sample text box.
Note: If a tray file is not associated with the injector, a Browse Tray dialog
appears. Use its options to select the file and then choose OK to display
the Browse Tray File window.
Select the Track Sample check box if you want to turn on UniPoint's sample
tracking feature. Sample tracking provides for post-run viewing of the tube
location associated with an injected sample. See Appendix B for details.
For the Height parameter, 0 mm accesses the bottom of the tube.
January 1998
6-27
Move Arm to Switching Port
For 232 with two valves or 233 XL, moves and lowers needle into switching
valve’s port.
Move Arm to Top
Raises needle to top height.
Move Arm to Transfer Port
Moves and lowers needle into transfer port. Not available for 234.
Move Arm to X/Y Position
Moves the arm to a designated position set in mm. Height sets the position of
the needle while moving. If you want to lower the needle before moving the
arm, you can indicate a Height. However, use the Height parameter with
caution. Lowering the needle may cause it to hit tubes during the move.
For all Gilson injectors except the 215, the default Height is 0 mm which sets the
needle’s tip to its highest point.
For the 215, UniPoint calculates a default Height that aligns the needle’s tip with
the bottom of the guide foot. To modify the default Height, manually lower the
needle and then measure the distance between the bottom of the Y arm and the
tip of the needle. Enter the distance, in mm, in the Height box.
Move Arm to Z Position
Raises or lowers the needle without moving the arm.
For the 215, UniPoint calculates a default Z Position that aligns the needle’s tip
with the bottom of the guide foot. To modify the default value, lower the
needle and then measure the distance between the bottom of the Y arm and the
tip of the needle. Enter the distance, in mm, in the Z Position box.
Record Display
Respond to Input
For answering prompts required by injection files stored in injector memory.
Set Collection Valve Position
For 233 XL or 215 being used as both the injector and fraction collector, sets a
valve position to divert or collect before or after fraction collection. For the 215,
it controls the low pressure valve. For the 233 XL, it controls the left-side valve.
Note:
During run-time fraction collection, UniPoint automatically changes the
position of the valve to collect fractions or divert eluent to waste.
Set Injection Valve Position
Rotates injection valve to load or inject position.
Set Low Pressure Valve On/Off
For XL version injector or 215, controls 3-way valve installed on the horizontal
arm (or Y arm).
Set Switching Valve Position
For 232 with two valves or 233 XL, controls switching valve.
Start File
For non-XL version injector, value between 1 and 9. File must be set up using
injector’s keypad.
Start Timer Clock
Initiates internal clock.
Synchronize
For synchronization with protocols written using UniPoint.
Wait for Controller
For synchronization between injector program and UniPoint. During the run,
UniPoint enters and remains in a “wait state” until it receives a signal from the
injector’s program to release the wait. When it receives the signal, UniPoint
continues the run.
For XL version injector, this is the “EGo” command.
Wait for Display Message
UniPoint enters a “wait state” until the indicated message appears. When the
message appears, UniPoint continues the run.
Wait for Injection
UniPoint enters and remains in a “wait state” until it receives a signal from the
injector’s program to release the wait. When it receives the signal, UniPoint
continues the run.
For XL version injector, this is the “EReady” command.
Wait Time
6-28
Instructs injector to wait for a preset length of time before continuing.
January 1998
control methods
401/C dilutor
Command
Description
Aspirate
Draws specified amount of liquid into needle and transfer tubing.
Dispense
Dispenses specified amount of liquid.
Home Syringe
Moves syringe to top position.
Prime
Starts/stops priming of syringe and transfer tubing.
Rotate Valve
To aspirate or dispense liquid from the dilutor’s solvent bottle, rotate the valve to
reservoir. To aspirate from or dispense into a tube or transfer port, rotate the
valve to needle.
402 syringe pump
Note: The commands available to you depend on how your 402 Syringe Pump is
configured in the UniPoint configuration file.
Command
Description
Aspirate, Aspirate Left Syringe, or
Aspirate Right Syringe
Sets flow rate and volume and then draws liquid into the syringe.
Aspirate Right Syringe from
Reservoir
(For Dual Syringe Configuration with Tee) Tells the pump to fill the left syringe
from the reservoir, then fill the right syringe by dispensing the specified volume
from the left syringe.
Dispense, Dispense Left Syringe, or
Dispense Right Syringe
Sets flow rate and volume and then dispenses liquid.
Home Syringe, Home Left Syringe,
Home Right Syringe, or
Home Both Syringes
Moves the syringe(s) to top position.
Prime, Prime Left Syringe,
Prime Right Syringe, or
Prime Both Syringes
Starts/stops priming of the syringe(s) and transfer tubing.
Rotate Valve, Rotate Left Valve, or
Rotate Right Valve
To aspirate or dispense liquid from the solvent bottle, rotate the valve to
Reservoir. To aspirate from or dispense into a tube or transfer port, rotate the
valve to Needle.
Set Aspirate for Left Syringe,
Set Aspirate for Right Syringe, or
Set Aspirate for Both Syringes
Sets flow rate and volume but does not draw liquid into the syringe(s). Use a
Start command or Timely Start and Start command sequence to aspirate
liquid.
Set Dispense for Left Syringe,
Set Dispense for Right Syringe,
or Set Dispense for Both Syringes
Sets flow rate and volume for the syringe(s) but does not dispense liquid. Use
a Start command or Timely Start and Start command sequence to dispense
liquid.
Set Sequential Dispense
Sets flow rate and volume for both syringes but does not dispense liquid. When
the command is followed by a Start Both Syringes command, the pump dispenses
liquid from the right syringe first, followed by the left syringe.
The Set Sequential Dispense command could be used for sample dilution.
Aspirate diluent into the left syringe (perhaps from reservoir). Then, aspirate
sample into the right syringe. The sequential dispense will deliver sample from
the right syringe first, followed by diluent from the left syringe.
Start Both Syringes, Start Left
Syringe, or Start Right Syringe
Starts aspirate or dispense as defined by the Set Aspirate or Set Dispense
command.
Timely Start Left Syringe or
Timely Start Right Syringe
Delays motion of the specified syringe. UniPoint uses the parameters set in the
last Set Aspirate or Set Dispense command. To actually aspirate or dispense
liquid, follow the Timely Start command with a Start command.
January 1998
6-29
Fraction collector
Following are the commands for fraction collectors. The most commonly
used commands are available. If you require additional functionality, see
GSIOC command strings on page 6-35.
As a guideline, set events that identify how effluent is collected: by time,
volume, peak, or combination of those. You must also indicate the
location at which collection begins (see Set Fraction Site command).
UniPoint assumes that the fraction collector has a 3-way valve installed.
The dispense head does not travel to the drain trough during periods of
non-collection but is always located over the current tube. Effluent
diverts to drain through the 3-way valve’s outlet tubing.
Note: The Fraction Collector Control Technical Note includes additional
information on collecting fractions. It is available, upon request,
from your Gilson representative.
Command
Description
Advance
Moves collection head to next tube.
Collect Negative Peaks
Turns on collection of negative peaks.
Collect Non-Peaks
Indicates if all effluent is collected into tubes.
Collect Positive Peaks
Turns on collection of positive peaks.
Home Collection Head
Moves dispense (collection) head to left rear of the tray.
Inhibits/provides use of front panel during a run.
Record Display
Copies text on display into report generated for sample.
Set Collection and Travel Depths
(This command only appears for the 233 XL or 215 as fraction collector.) Use
the Set Collection and Travel Depths command to customize needle movement
during fraction collection. The collection depth is the needle height used when
dispensing into fraction sites. The travel depth is the needle height used when
moving between fraction sites.
For the 233 XL, the default collection depth and travel depth is 2 mm below the
guide foot. (0 mm is the bottom of the guide foot.) If you are using deep well
microplates, the default collection and travel depths should be appropriate.
However, if you are using standard microplates, you may want to adjust the
collection depth and/or travel depth. To do this, manually move the 233 XL’s
needle so it is positioned over a well then lower the needle to the desired depth.
Measure the distance between the bottom of the guide foot and the tip of the
needle to identify the depth.
Because the 215’s Z Drive can be installed at different heights, UniPoint calculates and places default values in the command’s Collection Depth and Travel
Depth parameter boxes. The default depths place the needle’s tip slightly below
the guide foot. If you are using deep well microplates, the default collection and
travel depths should be appropriate. However, if you are using standard
microplates, you may want to adjust the collection depth and/or travel depth.
To do this, manually move the 215 needle so it is positioned over a well then
lower the needle to the desired depth. Measure the distance between the
bottom of the Y arm (or horizontal arm) and the tip of the needle to identify the
depth. (0 mm is the bottom of the Y arm.)
6-30
January 1998
control methods
Note:
If you omit the Set Collection and Travel Depths command from the
control method or fraction collector protocol, UniPoint uses the default
collection and travel depths during the run.
For the 215, UniPoint calculates the default collection and travel depths,
in mm, using the following formula. The calculated depth places the
needle at 2 mm below the guide foot.
Depth
= Y arm height from 215 locator plate - Height at which Z Drive is
clamped + 2
Y arm height from 215 locator plate is a constant value of 176 mm. Height
at which Z Drive is clamped is a user-entered value stored in the system
configuration file.
Set Collection Valve
Enables you to set the position of a 3-way valve before or after fraction
collection.
Note:
Set Fraction Site
During run-time fraction collection, UniPoint automatically changes the
position of the valve to collect fractions or divert eluent to waste.
Identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.
In the Site text box for the Set Fraction Site command, Gilson recommends that
you enter a variable (for example, FRACTION_SITE). Entering a variable
name will cause a column to appear in an operations list that uses the control
method. (See page 6-37 for more information on variables.) You can then
indicate in the operations list the zone (for example, FRACTIONS) or the zone
and tube (for example, FRACTIONS:1) into which collection begins.
However, instead of a variable name, you may indicate the zone name and if
necessary the tube number at which to start collection. (A column does not
appear in the operations list if you indicate where to begin collection in the
control method.)
• If you enter the zone name and tube number (for example, FRACTIONS:1), collection will begin in the specified tube for each sample
injected during the run. Gilson refers to this as specific site collection.
• If you enter the zone name followed by a colon (for example, FRACTIONS:), collection will begin in the first tube of the zone for the first
injected sample. For the second and each subsequent sample collected
into the zone, collection will begin in the next available numbered tube.
Gilson refers to this as continuous collection. (If you omit the colon after
the zone name, UniPoint identifies the zone name as a variable and will
display a column in the operations list.)
To select the first fraction site, into which eluent will be collected for a sample,
you can click in the Site text box and then click the Browse button. When the
Browse Tray File window appears, click within the zone, on the tray image, so
its tubes become blue. Click on the desired tube so it becomes red. Click on
OK. When the Fraction Collector Event dialog re-appears, the zone:tube
location is shown in the Site text box. If you want continuous collection,
remove the tube number after the colon.
Note: If a tray file is not associated with the fraction collector, a Browse Tray
dialog appears. Use its options to select the file and then choose OK to
display the Browse Tray File window. If no tray file exists, use the Tray
Editor Software supplied with UniPoint to set it up.
Note: If you set fraction collection commands in the control method but omit
the Set Fraction Site command, UniPoint will still collect fractions during
a run. UniPoint will look for a FRACTIONS zone in the fraction
collector’s tray file during the run and perform continuous collection for
the injected samples.
UniPoint will also collect fractions as described above if you do not enter
anything into the Site text box. However Gilson recommends that you use the
Set Fraction Site command and indicate a variable name for the Site parameter
in your control method (or fraction collector protocol).
January 1998
6-31
Set Fraction by Time Inside a Peak
Subdivides peaks by time.
Set Fraction by Volume Inside a Peak Subdivides peaks by volume.
Set Non-Peak Time per Tube
If collecting non-peaks, use this command or the Set Non-Peak Volume per
Tube command.
Set Non-Peak Volume per Tube
If collecting non-peaks, use this command or the Set Non-Peak Time per Tube
command. To collect more effluent than is collected into tubes for peaks,
indicate the tube volume (in ml) in the parameter box.
Set Peak Level
The mV value above which all effluent is collected. This value is especially
useful if the detector signal goes off-scale during collection.
Set Peak Sensitivity
Height of smallest peak of interest, expressed as a percentage of a trace’s fullscale height. Set a peak sensitivity value that is slightly greater than the
highest baseline noise. The value can range from 0.5% to 10000%.
Set Peak Width
Width of average peak at half height.
Set Time per Tube
The amount of time the dispense head dispenses into a tube before going to
the next tube or drain.
Set Volume per Tube
The maximum volume to collect into each tube.
Start Collection
Initiates collection.
Stop Collection
Ends collection; dispense head does not move to home position.
System interface
For the 506C System Interface, you can select to zero the analog offset
voltage for each available channel. To access this command, choose
Generic from the Event menu and select the System Interface in the list
box.
System (computer) control
The following computer control commands are available.
Command
Description
Announcement
Displays a message on-screen during the run.
Run Program
Enables UniPoint to execute a .GEX file. See the Gilson Executable (.GEX) File
appendix.
Start Timer Clock
Initiates internal clock; starts timer running for Wait Time command.
Synchronize
Enables you to synchronize the computer with a protocol written using
UniPoint. The computer enters a “wait state” until it receives a synchronize
command from a protocol.
Wait Time
Causes the computer to enter a “wait state” during the run; the wait is
released when the specified time expires. Also starts timer unless previously
started via the Start Timer Clock command.
6-32
January 1998
control methods
Valve actuator
817 Valve Actuator
Following are the commands for an 817 Valve Actuator. To access these
commands, choose Generic from the Event menu and select the valve actuator
in the list box. The most commonly used commands are available. If you
require additional functionality, see GSIOC command strings on page 6-36.
Command
Description
Lock/Unlock Keypad
Provides/inhibits use of keypad during a run.
Record Display
Set Valve Position
Rotates valve to selected position.
Turn Solenoid 1 On/Off
Activates/deactivates solenoid valve connected to 817 rear panel.
Turn Solenoid 2 On/Off
Activates/deactivates solenoid valve connected to 817 rear panel.
819 Valve Actuator
When the 819 is configured as an injection valve, the following command is
available in the Injector Event dialog. Be aware that the 819 is assigned the
default description of Injector; therefore, its command list is combined with
the command list for the sampling injector and syringe pump or dilutor. The
following UniPoint Technical Notes, available from your Gilson representative, include additional information on 819 control: Using the 215/819 for
Injection and Using the 215/819 for Injection and Collection.
Command
Description
Set Injection Valve Position
Rotates the valve to the selected position: load or inject.
When the 819 is configured as a switching valve, the following command is
available in the Generic Event dialog.
Command
Description
Set Switching Valve Position
Rotates the valve to the selected position: load or inject.
VALVEMATE
Following are the commands for a VALVEMATE. To access these commands, choose Generic from the Event menu and select the valve actuator in
the list box. The most commonly used commands are available. If you
require additional functionality, see GSIOC command strings on page 6-36.
Command
Description
Provides/inhibits use of keypad during a run.
Move Valve to Home Position
Rotates the valve to its home position.
Record Display
Copies the upper or lower line of the display into the data notes section of the
analysis report’s annotation. And, displays the information in the status box during
the run.
January 1998
6-33
Record Hours of Power On
Copies the number of hours that the VALVEMATE has been in use into the data
notes section of the analysis report’s annotation. And, displays the information in
the status box during the run.
Record Valve Position
Copies the current valve position into the data notes section of the analysis
report’s annotation. And, displays the information in the status box during the
run.
Record Valve Turn Count
Copies the number of valve rotations into the data notes section of the analysis
report’s annotation. And, displays the information in the status box during the
run.
Set Valve Position
Rotates the valve into the selected position. For a 2-position valve, you can select
between Home (position 0) and Switched (position 1). For a multi-position valve,
you can select between 1 and the number of available positions for the installed
valve.
Set Valve Position Variable
Enables you to set the valve position as a variable. When you create the operations list, acceptable values for the variable are 0 (for Home position) and 1 (for
Switched position) if a 2-position valve is installed. For a multi-position valve,
acceptable values are 1 through the number of available positions for the installed
valve.
Temperature regulator (or column oven)
Following are the commands for an 831 Temperature Regulator. To access
these commands, choose Generic from the Event menu and select the
temperature regulator in the list box. The most commonly used commands
are available. If you require additional functionality, see GSIOC command
strings on page 6-36.
Note: UniPoint refers to the 831 as a temperature controller.
If you want UniPoint to monitor the 831 for high or low temperatures, indicate those temperatures as described on page 6-17.
Command
Description
Inhibits/provides use of keypad during a run.
Record Display
Set Target Temperature
Temperature (between 40 and 200° C) to obtain.
Start/Stop Heating
When to begin or stop heating.
Rack temperature regulator
Following are the commands for an 832 Temperature Regulator for Racks A
and B. To access these commands, choose Generic from the Event menu and
select Rack A or Rack B in the list box. You see the following commands.
Command
Description
Lock/Unlock Keypad
Inhibits/provides use of keypad during a run.
Record Rack Status
Set Temperature
Specify temperature between 4 and 40° C.
Start/Stop Temperature
Begins/ends temperature control.
6-34
January 1998
control methods
Pressure regulator (controller)
If you have UniPoint with the SF Pressure Control module (ordered
separately), you can set the P2 Pressure gradient for the 821 Pressure
Regulator in the Mobile Phase Event dialog.
For help on using the Mobile Phase dialog, refer to page 6-20. You
indicate the system pressure to maintain in the P2 Pressure text box.
GSIOC-to-RS-232 converter
Following are the commands for a 606 GSIOC-to-RS-232 Converter. To
access these commands, choose Generic from the Event menu and select
the converter’s description in the list box.
Note: If you are using the 606 Converter to issue commands to a Gilson
133 Detector, obtain a copy of the 133 Refractive Index Detector
Control Technical Note from your Gilson representative.
Command
Description
Read FIFO Channel A
Gets first in, first out data for Channel A.
Read FIFO Channel B
Gets first in, first out data for Channel B.
Read Status Channel A
Reads the status of the pins for Channel A’s RS-232 port. Returns a 0 (false) or
1 (true) for the following ‘abcde,’ and a value between 0 and 1536 for ‘f,g’
where:
a - CTS (Clear to Send) status
b - DSR (Data Set Ready) status
c - CD (Carrier Detect) status
d - DTR (Data Terminal Ready) status
e - RTS (Request to Send) status
f - Number of characters in Tx (Transmit) buffer
g - Number of characters in Rx (Receive) buffer
Read Status Channel B
Reads the status of the pins for Channel B’s RS-232 port. See Read Channel A
command for a description of what is returned.
Request Identification
Identifies the model and version of the 606 Converter that is installed in the
HPLC system.
Reset
Restarts the 606 Converter.
January 1998
6-35
Send String Channel A
Sends ASCII character string to the device connected to Channel A. For the text
string, refer to the documentation for the RS-232 device. That documentation
should identify the commands that can be sent to the device via its RS-232 port.
Place the text string within double quotes unless it contains a variable. For
example, “@WL280” could be the RS-232 command that sets the wavelength to
280 nm for a non-Gilson detector connected to the 606 Converter. If you wanted
the wavelength to be a variable, you could indicate “@WL” WAVELENGTH for
the text string.
Note: If the command being sent requires a non-printing character, such as a key
press, use the hexadecimal number for the non-printing character and place
that number within brackets. For example, using [0D] in a command string
indicates a carriage return.
Send String Channel B
Sends ASCII character string to device connected to Channel B. Refer to information for Send String to Channel A command.
Set Status Channel A
Specifies pin-out settings for Channel A.
Set Status Channel B
Specifies pin-out settings for Channel B.
GSIOC command strings
Each device has a set of GSIOC commands that it understands. Most of
these commands are provided in the dialog boxes accessed from the Event
menu. If there is another command that you would like a device to perform,
refer to its User’s Guide to see if the command is available. A complete list of
GSIOC commands is listed in the device’s User’s Guide.
The Generic Device Event dialog lets you specify commands for a Gilson
device which does not have its own menu command or to specify GSIOC
command strings for a device. To display the Generic Device Event dialog:
1 Choose Generic from the Event menu.
Or, click on a generic event in the table.
Or, click on its tool in the toolbar.
2 If you need help using the dialog, refer to Scheduling timed events on
page 6-18 and indicating GSIOC command strings, below.
6-36
January 1998
control methods
indicating command
strings
GSIOC commands consist of strings of no more than 40 characters that
specify instructions to a specified device. Each Gilson device has a set
of commands that it understands. The complete list of GSIOC commands for any Gilson device is given in its User’s Guide.
To set an event for sending a GSIOC command string to a device:
1 If necessary, choose the Custom> button in the Generic Device Event
dialog. If the Custom> button is already active its label becomes
List>. Therefore, if you see a List> button, proceed to the next step
because the options necessary for indicating a GSIOC command
string are already shown.
2 Type the time at which the command is sent.
3 Optionally indicate a comment in the Comment box.
4 Select the name of the device in the Device list box. Or, type the unit
ID of the device in the Unit ID box if the device is not listed.
5 Type the command string into the GSIOC string box. Place the entire
command string within double quotes unless it contains a variable.
For example, “F1” is the buffered command to start file 1 on a 119
UV/VIS Detector. If you wanted the file number to be a variable, you
could indicate “F” FILE_NUMBER for the command string. And,
then answer the variable when setting up the operations list for the
run.
6 Using the options buttons, choose the type of command. The
documentation for the GSIOC command tells what type of command
it is.
Buffered commands send instructions to a device. These commands
are executed one at a time.
Immediate commands request status information from a device. These
commands are executed immediately, temporarily interrupting other
commands in progress.
7 Choose Insert.
The event registers in the control method’s table and time line.
8 When you finish adding events, choose Done.
January 1998
6-37
Variables
To make your control methods more flexible, you can indicate a variable
name instead of entering a value in the command parameter box for a
timed event. A variable name can be any combination of letters and
numbers and can contain special characters (_, $, ?, @) as long as it is
not the first character or a mathematical operator (+, -, *, /, %). It cannot
include spaces. Valid variable names would be Wavelength#,
Sample_Vol1.
UniPoint does not differentiate between upper and lower case letters in
a variable name. For example, it views the names Wavelength, wavelength, and WAVELENGTH as identifying the same value.
The command parameter specified for an event can also be the result of
performing a mathematical function on two variables or a variable and
number. For example, AirGap + SampVol, or SampVol + 15 are valid
command parameters. You can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide
(/), and return the remainder (%).
When setting the Operations window for a run, UniPoint prompts you
for a value to assign to any undefined variables used by a control
method.
To see what variable names have been set for a control method and to
indicate lower and upper limits for and a default for each variable, do
the following.
1 From the Event menu, choose Variables.
2 When the dialog box appears, choose the variable name in the list
box.
3 Check the prompt that appears whenever the software references the
variable. The prompt can be any combination of letters and numbers
and can contain special characters and spaces.
4 To indicate minimum and maximum values for the variable, indicate
the numbers in the Values Limits box. Separate the values with a
colon, for example, 1:100. If the input is required, type an R before the
minimum value, for example, R1:100.
You can also indicate the variable name of SYRINGE for syringe
volume or Z_ARM for Z_arm height as a limit.
6-38
January 1998
control methods
5 To set a default value for the variable name, type a value in the
Default Value box.
6 To remove an unused variable name, choose it in the list box and the
choose Delete.
7 Choose OK when finished.
if you add, change, or delete
variable names
If you add, change, or delete variable names and the control method is
used in an operations list, you need to recreate the operations list or
modify each step in the list that uses the control method, as outlined
below.
1 Open the operations list.
2 Double-click on the step that executes the control method.
3 In the Step Entry dialog, click in the Control Method box and use the
Browse to reselect the control method.
The parameter text boxes at the bottom of the dialog update to reflect
the changes in the control method. If a variable is no longer used by
the method, its parameter box is grayed.
4 Enter the correct value in each parameter box and click on Change to
update the operations table.
5 Use the scroll arrows to display information for the next step that
uses the control method.
6 Repeat steps 3 -5 for each step that uses the control method.
7 Choose Done when finished modifying steps.
8 To remove the table column for a variable that is no longer used:
a) Display the Format Columns dialog by choosing its command
from the Table menu or double-clicking on the header row in the
table.
b) In the Column Contents list box, choose the variable name and
choose Delete.
c) Choose OK to exit.
9 Save and close the operations list using the File menu.
January 1998
6-39
Error handling
UniPoint can automatically respond to the occurrence of defined errors
during a run. To make this happen, set up control methods that tell
UniPoint what to do if it encounters one of those errors. In most cases,
these methods include system shutdown commands.
To access the dialog for indicating error handling information:
1 Choose Error Handling from the Event menu.
In the dialog box, error handling capabilities are available for the
following.
High and Low Pressure. Error occurs if UniPoint detects that the low or
high system pressure limit set on the manometric module or in this
dialog box has been surpassed.
Wait Time-Out. Error occurs if the time period is exceeded. Wait timeout is the period during which UniPoint is in a programmed hold and is
waiting for a GSIOC or contact signal. If the wait time-out is 0.00 min,
the system waits indefinitely. The valid range is 0.00 to 999 min.
GSIOC. Error occurs if a scheduled GSIOC command fails to execute or
if UniPoint loses communication with a device located along the GSIOC.
Contact. Error occurs if UniPoint receives a signal from the indicated
contact.
Temperature. Error occurs if UniPoint senses a low or high temperature
limit set for an 831 or 832 Temperature Regulator.
Leak. Error occurs if UniPoint detects error in the 831 Temperature
Regulator.
Tray Location. Error occurs if UniPoint cannot locate the next tube for
sample injection or fraction collection during a run.
6-40
January 1998
control methods
activating error handling
Entering a value in the text box next to an error type activates it. What
happens during the run then depends on whether an error method is
entered and whether the Continue on error check box is selected.
• If neither a method nor the Continue check box is selected, the run is
stopped.
• If both a method and the Continue check box are selected, UniPoint
executes the error handling method and then proceeds to the next
step in the operations list.
• If a method is indicated but the Continue check box is not selected,
UniPoint executes the error handling method and then stops the run.
• If a method is not indicated, but the Continue check box is selected,
UniPoint finishes the current step and proceeds to the next step in the
operations list.
specifying error handling
parameters
To use the areas in the Error Handling dialog to activate the error
handling capability:
1 In the text box next to each error, type the complete path and file
name of the control method executed when that error is detected.
To search the disk for the control method and have its location
automatically entered, click in the text box and then on the Browse
button. (Or, double-click in the text box.)
You can specify the same method in each of the text boxes.
2 Add or remove the check from the Continue check box. Refer to
activating error handling, above, to see how this check box affects
what happens during the run.
3 If necessary, indicate the limit to use or the contact to monitor.
To indicate the contact description, click in the text box and then
choose the Browse button. A dialog listing currently named contacts
appears. Use it to select the error contact.
4 When finished, choose OK to store the conditions. Or choose Cancel
to return to original settings.
before the run
Create the necessary error-handling method(s) before the control method
is indicated in the operations list for a run.
Note: In an error-handling method, you may want to set the first
gradient and flow rate at a time later than 0 min. By doing this,
the pumps ramp smoothly from the current conditions to the
conditions in the method.
January 1998
6-41
7 Analysis Methods
In the last section, you learned how to identify and set timed events for
controlling devices during a run. This section describes how to set
conditions for analyzing peaks in collected data. Each analysis method
indicates how collected data is analyzed during a run or re-analysis
processing. Analysis includes setting peak parameters, naming peaks,
and identifying the reports to generate.
January 1998
7-1
Analysis Method window
Using the options in the Analysis Method window, you indicate how
collected data is analyzed and reported. Whether the data is analyzed
at run time or afterwards, UniPoint uses the information in the analysis
method to report on peaks detected in samples. The following illustration shows the parts of an Analysis Method window, with information
already set up.
Refer to Section 5, Common Procedures for more information on manipulating parts of a table or graph displayed in a document window.
menu bar
toolbar
table pane
annotation box
graph pane
legend box
status bar
menu bar
Choose available functions from the drop-down menus found beneath the
items on the menu bar.
Menu
File
Edit
Analysis
Report
Table
Graph
Window
Help
7-2
Description
Create, save, print, delete files or exit a window or
UniPoint.
Set peak integration, baseline, scaling, variable, and error
handling options.
Specify report type, format, and output.
Display or modify appearance of graph pane.
file annotation or toolbar.
January 1998
analysis methods
table pane
Lists the timed events currently set for the method. The events are based
on the data collection start time indicated in the control method executed
at the same time as the analysis method during a run.
When you create an analysis method, the following integration events
automatically appear at 0.00 minutes in the window.
You can modify the times at which these take place and the values for
peak width and sensitivity, if necessary. To make the changes, see
Integration events on page 7-5.
Double-clicking on a row for a timed event automatically displays the
Integration Events dialog used to set up the event.
Double-clicking on the top (header) row in the table displays a dialog for
changing the format of the columns shown in the table.
graph pane
Shows a graphic representation of timed events and peak retention time
windows.
toolbar
Provides quick access to some options available in the Analysis Method
window. To activate a tool, just click on its icon.
navigator tool
Displays Navigator.
open tool
save tool
Stores method to disk. If it has not been
saved, displays the Save As dialog.
print tool
integration tool
Displays Integration Events dialog.
channel scales tool
Displays Data Channel Scales - Analysis dialog.
peak table tool
Displays Peak Table dialog.
report type tool
Displays Report Type dialog.
report output tool
Displays Report Output dialog.
To turn off/on the toolbar, choose its command from the Window menu.
January 1998
7-3
annotation box
Lists analysis and reporting conditions set in the method. To turn on/
off the annotation, choose its command from the Window menu.
To add your own comments to the annotation, use the Notes command
in the Edit menu.
legend box
Identifies the symbols shown in the graph. To turn on/off the legend,
choose its command from the Graph menu.
Double-clicking on an item in the legend accesses the Attributes dialog.
Use that dialog box to remove events from display or to change the size
of symbols and lines in the graph.
status bar
Setting analysis conditions
The Analysis menu in the method window provides for setting analysis
conditions plus indicating variable and error handling information.
• Integration Events—sets integration parameters for distinguishing
peaks from baseline interference and sets alternate baseline techniques.
• Channel Scales—specifies chromatogram plot conditions.
• Background Removal—indicates if a blank chromatogram is subtracted from data analyzed by the method.
• Peak Table—identifies information about the components in injected
samples.
• Error Handling—tells UniPoint what types of checks to do on the
calculated peak amounts and how the software responds if it detects
an error.
• Variables—sets limits and default value for any variables identified
in the analysis method.
7-4
January 1998
analysis methods
Integration events
In the Integration Events dialog, you specify times at which to modify
integration parameters. When you first open an Analysis Method
window, the following integration events are immediately set at 0.00
minutes:
For most separations, these are the only events to set. However, you can
delete or modify these events if necessary using the Integration Events
dialog.
Note: Removing the Disable Negative Peak Integration command does
not turn on negative peak integration. Insert the Enable Negative
Peak Integration command at the time point at which to start
negative peak integration.
To be integrated, a peak must elute during data collection. Furthermore,
every contour rising from and falling to the baseline must meet the peak
detection criteria. An unlimited number of peaks per run can be integrated.
The software’s ability to integrate peaks depends on the peak width and
peak sensitivity settings. These settings give information to UniPoint
about the size and shape of your peaks and the noise level riding the
baseline. In most cases, the default values for peak width and sensitivity
meet your needs. However, if one or more peaks of interest are not
integrated, modify one or both of these parameters before subsequent
runs or re-analysis processing.
Following is a description of the available integration events and how to
set timed events.
January 1998
7-5
integration parameters
Note: Changes to the integration parameters remain in effect until
changed again.
Peak Width. Peak width is the duration of a peak, in minutes, at its halfheight. The default value is 0.20 min and can be modified.
The peak width value should be slightly longer than the width of the
narrowest peak of interest.
If UniPoint cannot locate peaks during an analysis, adjust the peak
width value. Use the chromatogram plot or strip chart to measure the
narrowest peak at its half-height. Then using the time scale, determine
its duration. If all peaks are no more than twice the width of the narrowest peak, indicate a peak width that is slightly longer (for example, 0.05
min) than the narrowest peak.
If the range of peak widths on your example trace does not allow the
above approach, select a mid-range peak. Then determine whether any
peaks are more than twice or less than half of its duration. If all peaks
fall within that range, use the mid-range peak for setting peak width.
Peak Sensitivity. Peak sensitivity is expressed as a percentage of a
trace’s full-scale height. This setting maximizes the amount of the peak
that is integrated while minimizing the integration of baseline artifacts.
The peak sensitivity value should be slightly greater than the highest
baseline noise. The value can range from 0.5% to 10000%.
UniPoint bases the full-scale range of peak sensitivity settings on a 10
mV default input signal. If your data device provides a full-scale input
signal other than 10 mV, adjust the sensitivity setting accordingly.
Full-scale input
10 mV
100 mV
1000 mV
Peak sensitivity setting
at full-scale height
100%
1000%
10000%
If few or no peaks are integrated, set a lower sensitivity value. If too
many peaks are integrated, indicate a higher sensitivity value before
subsequent runs or re-analysis processing of samples.
Enable/Inhibit Integration. If a region of a trace is uninteresting to you
or if a region contains many unresolved peaks, you can inhibit integration during that period. Schedule one timed event to inhibit integration.
Then schedule another event for the time at which to resume integration.
This technique can eliminate a large number of uninteresting peaks from
being listed in reports.
7-6
January 1998
analysis methods
baseline construction
techniques
UniPoint provides several baseline construction techniques. If you
change the construction technique, the software uses the first affected
peak to determine when to use the technique. The first affected peak is
the peak whose end follows the scheduled event time. Therefore, when
applying an alternate construction technique within a series of peaks,
enter an event time that coincides with the peak retention time. Use
these techniques sparingly and carefully so that data are analyzed in a
meaningful way.
Accurate peak integration depends on the shape of the baseline, which
in turn depends on the peak shape and on the resolution from neighboring peaks.
Note: Changes to the baseline construction technique remain in effect
until the next baseline event is scheduled.
The drawings on the following pages demonstrate changes to a default
baseline that can result from changing the peak parameters. Review the
changes to the peak start and end points determined by the software.
The arrow in each drawings indicates the analysis event time.
Default Baseline. To draw the baseline beneath qualified peaks,
UniPoint connects the start and end of each integrated peak.
If the software encounters merged peaks (no baseline resolution between
peaks), it draws a “taut string” baseline from the first peak start to the
next peak end that it finds. If any deep valleys interrupt the “taut
string” baseline, the baseline is drawn from the peak start to the bottom
of each valley and then to the peak end. The software then drops
perpendiculars from all remaining valleys to the baseline to determine
the baseline beneath each peak.
The default baseline technique is used unless you specify another
technique. If the default baseline does not report optimal peak heights
(or areas), choose one of the other techniques, described on the following
pages.
January 1998
7-7
Horizontal Baseline. UniPoint draws a forced horizontal baseline.
Then, to determine the baseline beneath each peak, it drops perpendiculars from each peak start and each peak end to the horizontal baseline.
If the software encounters merged peaks (no baseline resolution between
peaks) while using this technique, the horizontal baseline is maintained
and perpendiculars are drawn from the valleys between peaks, rather
than from peak starts and ends. If any peak end or valley falls below the
horizontal, the baseline drops to that level and continues to be drawn at
that level.
Next Valley /All Valleys. UniPoint connects valleys between peaks to
correct for temporary and gradual baseline drift respectively. The Next
Valley option forces the baseline to the next valley only, whereas the All
Valleys draws the baseline from valley to valley until the next baseline
option is set.
Next Valley
7-8
All Valleys
January 1998
analysis methods
Tangent Skim. When you select this option, UniPoint draws a baseline
under the solvent front peak in addition to component peaks.
Default Baseline
adding event
Tangent Skim
To add a timed event:
1 If necessary, clear information from some of the text boxes (such as
the Comment box) by choosing New. This also displays New Event
next to the up and down arrows in the upper right corner of the
dialog.
2 Indicate time and command parameters. The limit of resolution is
0.01 min.
Note: During a run, the event time is based on the time at which
data collection begins in the control method.
The change is applied to the first peak whose end follows the
event time. When applying an alternate baseline in a series of
close peaks, choose an event time that corresponds to the
retention time of the first peak of interest.
3 Choose Insert.
deleting event
To remove an event:
1 Use the Event up or down arrow to display the information for the
event.
2 Choose Delete.
modifying event
To change parameters for an event:
1 Use the Event up or down arrow to display the information for the
event.
2 Make the necessary changes to the event.
3 Choose Change.
January 1998
7-9
Channel scales
In the Channel Scales dialog, you indicate which data channel is
analyzed by the method. You also use this dialog box to indicate how
traces from any other data channels are shown on the chromatogram
plots in reports generated by the method. Peak amounts in reports are
for data collected via the designated analysis channel.
To specify data channel parameters:
1 From the Analysis menu, choose Data Channels.
The Data Channel Scales dialog appears.
2 To display data channels in the list box, use the Browse or Edit
button.
Clicking on Browse displays the Browse Control Method dialog. Use
the dialog to select a control method which already defines data
channel information. After you select the control method, its data
channel descriptions, and channel scaling parameters, will appear in
the Data Channel Scales dialog.
Clicking on Edit displays the Edit Channels dialog. Use the dialog to
enter channel descriptions. To enter a channel description, type the
description in the text box and click on Add. When you return to the
Data Channel Scales dialog, you will see the data channel
description(s) that you just set up.
3 Choose a channel in the Channel Scale Parameters list box.
4 Review the information in the areas of the dialog box, described
below. Modify the information, if necessary.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each channel. Then choose OK to exit.
Following are descriptions of the areas in the Data Channel Scales
dialog. The Auto Range option pertains to all data channels being
collected. The other options relate to the data channel whose description is currently highlighted in the Channel Scale Parameters list box.
7-10
January 1998
analysis methods
Auto Range. If this check box is selected, UniPoint automatically plots
data to the minimum and maximum peak height determined across all
collected data channels. Selection of this box overrides any other limits
set for individual data channels in the dialog box.
Channel Scale Parameters. The available data channels. If none are
listed, click in the list box and then click on the Browse button. Use the
dialog box that appears to choose the control method that describes the
data channels being collected.
Analysis Channel. After choosing the channel in the list box, place an X
in this check box to indicate its data is analyzed by the method. Only
one channel can be indicated as the analysis channel. Any reports
generated by the method pertain to this channel.
% Offset. Use this parameter to move the channel’s trace away from the
horizontal axis (and from other channel traces) on chromatogram plot.
Express the offset as a percent displacement from the horizontal axis
(0%).
Minimum and Maximum. The lower and upper limits for the signal axis.
Be aware of the following:
• If the Auto Range check box is selected the software disregards these
values and uses the minimum and maximum heights for all channels
to determine the signal axis.
and maximum values for each channel being collected, the software
uses the lowest and highest values entered to determine the signal
axis. For example, if 0 and 10 mV were entered for the minimum and
maximum values for the 254 nm channel and 0 and 100 mV were
entered for the 280 nm channel, the signal axis would be 0 to 100 mV.
Scale. How UniPoint scales data when it is plotted: mV, user units,
peak name, or tallest peak.
If you indicate a scale other than mV for a channel, make corresponding
changes to the scaling for each of the other channels being collected.
mVolt (displayed for User Units scale). The number of mVolts that
correspond to the value indicated in the User Units text box.
User Units (displayed for User Units scale). The number of user units
that correspond to the value indicated in the mVolt text box.
Label (displayed for User Units scale). The label to identify the user
units.
January 1998
7-11
Peak Name (displayed for Named Peak scale). If you already created the
peak table, described on page 7-13, select the name of the peak using the
list box. If you have not created it, you can type in the name of the peak
as it will be entered in the peak table.
The specified peak extends to 100% on the chromatogram plot. All other
peaks are plotted in relation to that peak. Smaller peaks are less than the
full-scale height; larger peaks are displayed as off-scale.
modifying data channel
descriptions
To add, change, or remove a data channel description:
1 From the Data Channel Scales dialog, choose the Edit button.
The Edit Channels dialog appears. If any data channels were
already named in the Data Channel Scales dialog, their names
appear in the list box.
2 To add a name, type the description in the text box of the Edit Channels dialog and click on Add. Repeat for each channel.
To change a channel name, click on its description in the list box and
type the new description in the Name box. Then click on the previous description in the list box to update the list.
To remove a channel name, click on it in the list box and then click on
Delete.
3 Click on OK to exit the Edit Channels dialog. The names of the data
channels appear in the list box in the Data Channel Scales dialog.
4 Select the analysis channel and set scaling parameters for that
channel and any other data channels, as described previously.
checking attributes
for lines and symbols
To review and modify the color assigned to data channel traces or to
turn on or off gridlines in the chromatogram plot:
1 From the Data Channel Scales dialog, choose Attributes.
2 When the Data Channel Display Attributes dialog appears, select a
channel from the list box and check the options for it. If necessary,
make any necessary modifications. When finished, choose OK or
Cancel.
7-12
January 1998
analysis methods
Data Channel. Lists the description for each data channel.
Style. Lists available styles for the line: solid, dashed, or dotted.
Color. Lists available color choices for the line.
Thickness. Identifies the width of the line in pixels.
Signal Grid. Indicates which gridlines appear for the Y axis. Major
Time Grid. Indicates which gridlines appear for the X axis. Major
Peak table
The Peak Table dialog is where you tell UniPoint about the peaks in
data analyzed by the method. If you name peaks in the peak table, your
reports refer directly to those peaks when reporting areas, heights,
amounts, and so on.
In the Peak Table dialog, you also provide information about the amount
of material in calibrators. Remember, you must run calibrators at one or
more calibration level to obtain an internal standard, external standard,
or percent normalization report.
To display the Peak Table dialog:
1 Choose Peak Table from the Analysis menu.
The top of the dialog shows the Time/Name list box that identifies any
peak information that has been set. As a default, the Names option
button is selected and you see the Peak Names area at the bottom of the
dialog. However, the options in this area change depending on the
option selected in the View area.
January 1998
7-13
Naming peaks
When you select the Names option button in the View area, options
appear in the Peak Table dialog for indicating peak names and their
retention times. You get retention time information by injecting and
acquiring traces for test samples.
Time. The retention time for the peak. The limit of resolution is hundredths of a minute (0.01 min).
Peak retention time is based on start of data collection indicated in the
control method executed at the same time as the analysis method. If the
beginning of data collection and injection are not synchronous, retention
times reported deviate from actual retention times by their difference.
Name. Identify each peak for the component it represents.
Reference Peak (optional). The software uses reference peaks to correct
for retention time shifts that can occur during runs that analyze multiple
samples. When the software notices a difference between a reference
peak’s expected and actual retention times, it adjusts the retention times
of the preceding non-reference peaks in its internal peak table.
You can designate an unlimited number of reference peaks in both
calibration and unknown samples. An ideal reference peak is a large
isolated peak with a consistent retention time. You can designate
several reference peaks with retention times at the beginning, middle
and end of the run. If you designate just one reference peak, it should be
a late-eluting peak.
Color. Available color fills for the peak. The default is black. If you
select a color, choose a pattern other than <None>.
Pattern. Available design fills for the peak. The default is <None>.
Absolute Error and Relative Error. These are the retention time window
parameters. To compensate for possible retention time drift, UniPoint
defines a window around the retention time for each peak. If a peak
elutes at any time during that window, the software identifies it.
7-14
January 1998
analysis methods
Absolute error is a constant amount of time on either side of a peak’s
nominal retention time. The software automatically searches for eluted
peaks at every named retention time plus or minus this amount of time.
Relative error is a percentage of peak retention time. Relative error, and,
therefore, the width of retention time windows, increase with increasing
retention time. Because late-eluting peaks are often broader than early
peaks, the software uses this correction factor to improve the likelihood
of locating late-eluting peaks.
UniPoint uses the following formulas to calculate the beginning and
end of any peak’s time window. Each peak's time window appears in
the graph pane, if displayed.
Beginning:
End:
identifying peaks
Ret. Time - [Abs. Error + (Ret. Time x Rel. Error)]
Ret. Time + (Abs. Error + Ret. Time x Rel. Error)
To name and set retention time for peaks:
1 Check that the Peak Names area is displayed at the bottom of the
Peak Table dialog. If not, choose the Names option button.
2 Type the retention time for the first peak.
3 Type the name of the peak.
4 Optional - Choose the Reference Peak check box.
5 Optional - Indicate a color and pattern fill for the peak.
6 If necessary, modify the absolute error and relative error.
7 Choose Insert to add the peak information to the Time/Name list box.
8 Repeat the above for each peak.
modifying peaks
To modify information for a peak:
1 Choose the peak’s name in the Time/Name list box.
2 Modify the appropriate information in the Peak Names area.
3 Once again, choose the peak’s name in the Time/Name list box, and
its information is updated.
deleting peaks
To delete the information for a peak:
1 Choose the peak name in the Time/Name list box.
2 Choose Delete.
January 1998
7-15
Entering level information for peaks
When you select the Levels option button in the View area, the options
described below appear in the Peak Table dialog. These options are for
entering the amount of material present at each calibration level.
Note: To identify internal standard(s) and set amount(s), follow the
instructions on page 7-18.
Level/Amount. This list box shows the levels set for the peak selected in
the Time/Name list box. (If information is grayed, the peak has been
identified as an internal standard.)
Amount. The amount of material injected for the peak. Enter the
amounts from smallest to largest.
Unit Label. The unit label associated with the amounts, usually mass
units. This label appears next to the amount axis on calibration plots.
specifying levels
To set amounts for calibration levels:
1 Choose the peak name in the Time/Name list box in the upper part of
the dialog.
2 If necessary, choose the Levels option button. The Peak Levels area
appears at the bottom of the dialog.
3 Type the amount injected at the first level.
4 Choose Insert.
5 Continue inserting amounts for each calibration level for the peak.
6 Repeat steps 3 - 5 for each additional peak. Remember if the peak is
an internal standard, refer to Indicating internal standard peak(s) on
page 7-18 to indicate amount(s).
7 To associate a units label with amounts, indicate the label before
exiting the Peak Table dialog.
7-16
January 1998
analysis methods
changing level amount
To change an amount indicated for a level:
1 Click on the amount in the Level/Amount list box.
2 Type the correct value in the Amount box.
3 Click in the Level/Amount list box to update its information.
deleting level
To delete a level:
1 Click on the level and amount in the Level/Amount list box.
2 Click on Delete.
January 1998
7-17
Indicating internal standard peak(s)
When you select the Int Std option button in the View area, you can
indicate one or more peaks as an internal standard and indicate amount
of material and the time frame during which to use the standard.
Internal Standard. When checked, indicates that the peak highlighted in
the Time/Name list box is an internal standard.
Amount. The amount of internal standard material injected for the
internal standard peak.
Start Time. The time at which to begin using the internal standard.
End Time. The time at which to stop using the internal standard. It
must be later than the Start Time.
Internal Standard Actual Amounts. Select this check box if you want to
indicate the actual amount of the internal standard added to an unknown injected during a run. When you set up an operations list that
uses this analysis method, UniPoint automatically provides a text box so
you can indicate this amount.
specifying internal
standard peaks
1 If necessary, choose the Int Std option button.
2 Choose the name of an internal standard peak in the Time/Name list
box.
3 Choose the Internal Standard check box.
4 Enter the amount for the internal standard.
5 Enter the time range in which UniPoint uses the internal standard to
normalize sample amounts.
6 Click on the name of an internal standard peak in the Time/Name
list box to update its information.
7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each internal standard peak. Make sure
that the Start and End Times for each internal standard peak do not
overlap.
7-18
January 1998
analysis methods
8 If you want to indicate the internal standard actual amount when
you set up an operations list that uses this method, place an X in the
Internal Standard Actual Amounts check box.
Grouping peaks
When you select the Groups option button in the View area, options for
grouping peaks appear in the Peak Table dialog. UniPoint reports total
area or height amounts for all peaks selected in addition to the area or
amount of each individual peak.
setting up group names
To indicate group names:
1 Choose the Groups option button.
2 In the Group box, type the name to assign to a collection of peaks.
3 Choose Insert to add the name to the Group Names list box.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set up a group name for each collection of
peaks.
5 If you discover a mistake, select the name in the Group Names list
box and revise the text in the Group box. When you click on another
area of the dialog, the change is automatically made.
If you want to delete a group name, select it in the Group Names list
box and choose Delete.
grouping peaks
To place peaks into groups:
1 Choose the name of the peak in the Time/Name list box.
2 Choose the group name in the Group Names list box.
3 Choose the Group command button.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to assign other peaks to groups.
5 To remove a peak from a group, choose its name in the Time/Name
list box and choose Ungroup.
January 1998
7-19
Additional peak options
UniPoint provides additional options for keeping track of and reporting
on peaks.
1 Choose the Options command button in the Peak Table dialog.
2 Check and if necessary modify the settings in the Peak Table Options
dialog – see descriptions below. Then choose OK to return to the
Peak Table dialog.
Track Retention Times. When this box is checked, UniPoint
automatically corrects for retention time shifts that may occur during
a run in which multiple samples are injected. When the software
notices a difference between a peak’s expected and actual retention
times, it adjusts the retention times for all peaks so they are
integrated.
Void Volume Retention Time. The retention time of unretained
effluent. This value is used to calculate capacity factor (k’).
7-20
January 1998
analysis methods
Background removal
The Chromatogram Background Removal dialog lets you identify the
blank chromatogram whose data is subtracted from sample data during
a run or during re-analysis processing.
1 Choose Background Removal from the Analysis menu.
2 Set the parameters, described below, in the dialog and choose OK.
Blank Location. None indicates that you do not want UniPoint to
perform background subtraction. Choose Internal if the first injected
sample in the run is the blank. Choose External if the information for
the blank is located in a data file.
Data File. The name of the file containing the blank chromatogram.
Click in this field and then use the Browse button to locate the file,
sample, and data channel to use for background subtraction.
Sample. The description indicated in the operations list for the sample.
Channel. The channel via which the data for the external sample was
collected.
January 1998
7-21
Producing reports
To set reporting conditions and set report formats, use the Report menu.
• Report Type—identifies how collected data are reported.
• Report Output—indicates what reports are saved to disk or printed.
• Calibrator Format, Unknown Format, Calibration Summary Format,
Unknown Summary Format—identify the column information
printed for each type of report; let you select from additional choices
to customize reports.
Report type
The Report Type dialog identifies the kind of report to generate for each
sample analyzed by the method. To set report type information:
1 Choose Type from the Report menu.
2 Set the parameters, described below, in the dialog and choose OK.
report type
The report type is the technique used to determine the amounts of
components in a sample. Choose the report type that gives you the most
relevant information about your samples.
Area or Height Percent. This report type can be used during method
development while you try to stabilize chromatographic conditions and
determine component retention times. In unknown samples, the actual
area or height of each peak is reported. The area or height is also given
as a percentage of the total area or height of all integrated peaks in the
sample. This report type assumes that the detection properties of all
peaks are identical.
Percent Normalization, External Standard, and Internal Standard. These
are calibration report types. These report types require that you inject
calibrators and provide information in the Peak Table dialog about each
component of interest before injecting unknown samples. Calibrators
account for differences in absorbance properties among peaks. They
provide data that UniPoint uses to generate a calibration table that is
then used to calculate and report amounts for unknowns.
7-22
January 1998
analysis methods
Additional options appear in the dialog box when you select one of the
calibration report types.
quantify by
UniPoint quantifies peaks by measuring either the area or height of
integrated peaks. Peak area and height measurements are a function of
many chromatographic variables, including mobile phase composition
and flow rate.
Peak Area. Because peak area is relatively independent of mobile phase
composition changes, it is the preferred measurement technique for
gradient elution. Peak area determination is less subject to variations in
instrument conditions or operator technique than is peak height. The
major disadvantage is that peak area measurements are affected by the
presence of neighboring peaks.
Peak Height. Peak height is less subject to interference by adjacent,
overlapping peaks and is, therefore, the method of choice when measuring overlapping peaks, particularly small peaks on the tailing edge of a
larger peak. Peak heights are also relatively independent of flow rate
changes.
include
By default, UniPoint reports information about every peak that meets its
integration requirements. However, for some applications, you may
want to get information only about the peaks of interest.
Unnamed Peaks. If you want UniPoint to report information about every
peak that meets its integration requirements, place an X in this check
box. If you only want information on peaks named in the peak table, do
not place an X in the check box.
If the software integrates peaks that have not been named in the peak
table, it assigns the peak a name based on the order in which it eluted.
For example, the peak table named two peaks, Phenol and Benzaldehyde. However during the run, the software detects a peak between
those two peaks. The unnamed peak would be labeled “Peak 2”.
Min. Area or Height. You can specify a minimum valid peak area or
height to exclude insignificant peaks from reports. Peaks with area or
height smaller than the specified value are not reported and baselines
are not drawn for those peaks.
January 1998
7-23
calibration
When using one of the calibration report types, UniPoint requires
additional information about the calibration procedure.
Arrangement. Indicate when calibrators are injected during the run (or
ordered for re-analysis processing).
• Sequential: All calibrators are injected before unknowns.
• Bracketed: A group of calibrators is injected before and after each
group of unknowns. Both groups of calibrators are used for analysis
of the unknowns.
• Random: Calibrators are dispersed throughout the run.
• Preloaded: Calibrators were injected and analyzed during a previous
run. The software uses the specified Preloaded Calibration File and
Calibration Table Number within the file to analyze samples.
Curve Fit. Indicate how to construct calibration curves. The software
generates curves using data collected from calibrators and uses the
curves to determine component amounts in unknowns.
• Point to Point: UniPoint connects the mean amount at each calibration level using a linear segment. For a one-level calibration plot,
UniPoint generates a linear segment between the origin (0 area, 0
amount) and the mean peak area at the calibration level.
• Point to Point through Zero: UniPoint generates a linear segment
between the origin (0 area, 0 amount) and the mean peak area at the
first calibration level. It then connects the mean amount at each
additional calibration level using a linear segment.
• Linear: UniPoint constructs a line that best represents the set of
means.
• Quadratic: UniPoint generates a smooth curve that best represents
the set of means. The curve may have one bend.
• Cubic: UniPoint generates a smooth curve that best represents the set
of means. The curve may have two bends.
7-24
January 1998
analysis methods
After the run or before re-analysis, you should print or view the calibration curves to make sure that only one amount can be determined for a
given area (or height). See Section 12, Calibrations.
Preloaded Calibration File. If you indicated preloaded in the Arrangement list box, click in this box and then choose the Browse button. Use
the dialog that appears to select the calibration file.
Cal. Number. If multiple calibration tables are stored in the preloaded
calibration file, indicate the table to use.
options
When you select the Options button, the Report Type Options dialog
appears.
Sample Amount. Select this check box if you want to indicate the total
amount of material present in the injection volume of an unknown
sample. When you set up an operations list that uses this analysis
method, UniPoint automatically provides a text box for indicating this
amount.
If you indicate a sample amount, the percent concentration (as related to
the total sample amount) of each reported peak is included in each
report.
The sample amount is unitless—UniPoint lets you use any unit appropriate to the separation. Usually, sample amount is expressed in mass
units.
Nominal/Actual Amounts. If you want to indicate nominal and actual
amounts for unknowns injected during a run, select this check box.
When you set up an operations list that uses this analysis method,
UniPoint automatically provides text boxes for indicating these
amounts.
Actual amount is the amount you actually measured to prepare a
particular unknown sample. Nominal amount is the amount you
wanted to measure.
Using the actual and nominal amount, UniPoint automatically adjusts
the amount of material in each calculated peak and reports instead the
amount that would have been found if the sample had contained exactly
the nominal amount of unknown:
Unknown Peak Groups. Select this check box if you want to group
unknown samples and obtain statistical data, such as standard deviation and standard error, for their peaks. When you set up an operations
list that uses this analysis method, UniPoint automatically provides a
text box for indicating the group number (1, 2, 3...) to assign to an
unknown sample.
January 1998
7-25
Report output
The Report Output dialog identifies which reports should be saved to
disk and which should be printed when the analysis method is executed.
2 Choose whether to save, export, and print reports for samples
analyzed by the method and what to print. Choose OK to exit.
Each calibrator, unknown, and summary report has default
information, identified by Gilson, that are inserted into its report.
You can modify the report format as described on page 7-31.
Each time you analyze raw data, a report file and summary file can
be saved to disk. In some cases, it is easier to save reports to disk
during the run and then print them later. When you print reports at
run time, each report may include the following:
• annotation that identifies the data file and how it was collected
and analyzed.
• table of peak information and amounts if calibrators were injected
or if a pre-stored calibration table was specified.
• graph of chromatogram plot for acquired traces or calibration plot
for a calibration summary report.
The check boxes in the Export area let you select which reports
should be saved to a text file. The File Name box indicates the path
and name to which the report information is saved. You can use the
Browse button to locate an existing export file. If you want to
overwrite the previous file with new information, do not modify the
name in the File Name box. If you do not want the file overwritten,
indicate a different file name.
7-26
January 1998
analysis methods
setting layout options
For report printouts generated during a run or re-analysis processing,
you can specify the width of page margins, size of chromatogram plot,
and printing order for report components.
2 In the Report Output dialog, choose the Layout button.
3 When the Report Layout dialog appears, review and if necessary
modify the current settings.
Margins. In the text box next to each margin (left, right, top, and
bottom), specify the width of the margin. The software adds the
indicated width to the default print area set for the page by the
printer.
The measurement system, mm or inches, is set using the International
program in the Windows Control Panel.
Graph Height. Indicate the size of the chromatogram plot as a
percentage of the page. It is printed on a different page than the
annotation or report if necessary.
Position Order. The order in which the various parts of the report are
printed, by default: annotation, graph, then table.
4 Choose OK to save any changes.
January 1998
7-27
report annotation
You can choose which parts of the analysis report’s annotation will be
viewed and printed. To make your selections:
2 In the Report Output dialog, choose the Annotation button.
3 When the Annotation Contents dialog, use the check boxes to turn off
or on parts of the annotation or enter a custom calculation. The next
2 pages identify the various parts of a report annotation so you can
determine which parts to include in reports. See page 7-37 for
information on entering a custom calculation into the annotation.
7-28
January 1998
analysis methods
Example annotation
Data File: c:\gilson\tstmx\tstmxlvl.gdt
Date acquired: Tue Apr 02 1996 14:14:35
Control Method: C:\JEAN\FC_205\TSTMXLVL.GCT
Analysis Method: C:\GILSON\TSTMX\TSTMX254.GAN
Sample name: Step 1
Injection Number: 1
*Unknown*
Analyzed on: Mon Jan 20 1997 09:17:13
Events
1 0 Default Baseline
initial default
2 0 Disable Negative Peak Integration
initial default
3 0 Peak Width 0.2
initial default
4 0 Peak Sensivity2
initial default
Associated files
Sample description
Analysis description
Analysis events
Sample description
Fractions Collected: 5 (FRACTIONS:1-5)
W0=-0.00092 AU at 254 nm at 1.05 min
Number of Peaks Detected: 5
Channel Scales
<Auto range>
254nm 0.00 to 10.00 mVolts (0 %offset), Data rate: 20.00 (points/second)
10 mVolts == 0.01 AUFS
220nm 0.00 to 10.00 mVolts (0 %offset), Data rate: 20.00 (points/second)
10 mVolts == 0.01 AUFS
Realtime event
Sample description
<Analysis Channel>
Reporting
External Standard Report (quantify by area)
Min area reported: 0
Calibration type: Sequential
Calibration curve fit: Linear
Include summary statistics for unknown group samples
Include individual values for unknown group samples
Include summary statistics for standard samples
Include individual values for standard samples
Use actual sample amount from operations list
Channel scales
Report description
Calibrator Report Format Columns
Inj. Number (Inj. Number) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Peak Name (Peak Name) Factor:1.00, Width:18, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
R. Time (R. Time) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Area (Area) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Level Amount (Level Amount) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Sample Descrip. (Sample Descrip.) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Unknown Report Format Columns
Amount (Amount) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Amount % (Amount %) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Report columns
Calibrator Summary Report Format Columns
Level Amount (Level Amount) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Unknown Summary Report Format Columns
January 1998
7-29
Amount (Amount) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Amount % (Amount %) Factor:1.00, Width:12, Justify:Center, Format:Decimal, Decimals:2
Report columns
Report Output
Save report to file
Save calibration summary
Save unknown summary
Print: <nothing>
Peak Analysis Error Conditions
Report description
Background Blank Removal
<None>
Track peak retention time
Variables
Name: S_NOM_AMT, Prompt: Nominal Amt, Limits: <None>, Default: <None>
Name: S_ACT_AMT, Prompt: Actual Amt, Limits: <None>, Default: <None>
Peak Table
1) 2.80
Lvl. Amount
[ 1] 5 0
2) 3.70
Lvl. Amount
[ 1] 50
3) 4.80
Lvl. Amount
[ 1] 2 0
4) 5.60
Lvl. Amount
[ 1] 4 0
Peak 1
Lvl. Amount
[ 2] 9 0
Peak 2
Lvl. Amount
[ 2] 100
Peak 3
Lvl. Amount
[ 2] 4 0
Peak 4
Lvl. Amount
[ 2] 8 0
Lvl. Amount
[ 3] 180
Lvl. Amount
[ 3] 220
Peak table
Lvl. Amount
[ 3] 9 0
Lvl. Amount
[ 3] 150
Peak Detection Parameters
Relative Error: 5 (%) Absolute Error: 0.1 (min)
Control Method Notes
Notes entered into the control method print here.
Data notes
Data Notes
Notes entered into the operations list print here.
Analysis Method Notes:
Notes entered into the analysis method print here.
7-30
Analysis notes
January 1998
analysis methods
Report format review and modification
If you want to vary the default format for reports, use the Format commands under the Report menu. You can add or remove column information.
checking columns
To view what is printed for unknown, calibrator or summary reports:
1 From the Report menu, choose Column Formats.
2 When the Report Column Format dialog appears, click on the option
button to see the columns available for calibrator, unknown, and
summary reports.
Column Contents. The contents of each column currently specified
for the report type. The names of the columns are listed in the order,
from left to right, that they appear on the report.
Contents (or Expression if you clicked on the Custom check box). The
contents of the selected column. The types of contents that can
appear in a report type are set by Gilson. To view additional
selections click on the down arrow.
You see the Expression label if you indicated a custom calculation for
the column. You can then type the formula that UniPoint uses to
generate the amount that appears in the column, or click on the
Builder button to display the Expression Builder dialog. See page 331 for procedures on specifying a custom calculation.
Note: You must add the column for the custom expression to each
report format if you want UniPoint to generate the
information. Highlight the text in the Expression text box and
press CTRL+C to copy the text to the Clipboard. Then choose
the option button in the Report Type area. Click on the
Custom button and click in the Expression text box and press
CTRL+V. Then click on Insert. Use the up or down arrow
button to move the new column to the appropriate location.
January 1998
7-31
Custom. Choose the Custom check box if you want to include a
column that is not part of UniPoint's default columns. When you
click on the Custom check box, a Builder button appears and the
Contents text box becomes the Expression text box. If you click on the
Builder button, you see the Expression Builder dialog. See page 3-31
for procedures on specifying a custom calculation.
Heading. The descriptive text that appears at the top of a column and
identifies the type of information that appears within the column.
Width. The width of the column in which the information is placed.
For most columns, the default value is appropriate. However, you
may need to widen the columns for sample description and peak
name depending on your application.
Factor. A number by which each value in a column is multiplied.
Justify. How information in the column is aligned.
Format. How numbers are displayed: decimal, with or without
commas, or scientific notation.
Decimals. The number of positions displayed after the decimal point.
Individual Peaks (for summary report formats only). When selected,
causes the information specified in the Column Contents list box to
be reported for each integrated peak.
Statistics (for summary report formats only). When selected, causes
the mean, standard deviation, standard error, and number average to
be reported for each numerical entry specified in the Column
Contents list box. (This includes items such as injection number and
level amount in addition to area and height.)
Note: If you remove the X from both the Individual Peaks and
Statistics check boxes, no summary report information is
generated.
3 If you want to customize a report's contents, refer to the sidebars
below. Otherwise, choose OK to exit the dialog.
Note: If you are controlling a Gilson fraction collector via UniPoint,
add the Fraction Site(s) column to report formats. The column
lists tube locations for eluent collected for a peak.
changing an attribute
To assign a new attribute to a report column:
attributes for the column appear in the text and drop-down list boxes.
2 Use the text and drop-down list boxes to make the necessary changes.
7-32
January 1998
analysis methods
3 Choose Change.
4 If you are done making modifications, choose OK to exit the dialog.
When the report is generated, UniPoint formats text in the column
using the new attributes.
renaming a column
To change a column heading in a report:
2 Type a new heading in the Heading box.
3 Choose Change.
When the report is generated, UniPoint assigns the new heading to
the column.
inserting a column
In the table, columns are inserted to the left of the column selected in the
Column Contents list box. You can place the highlight after the last
column to insert a column there.
To add a column:
1 Select the appropriate column in the Column Contents list box. Or,
click beneath the last column to add a column there.
2 Use the text and drop-down list boxes to set the attributes for the new
column.
3 Choose Insert.
4 If you are done adding columns, choose OK to exit the dialog. When
the report is generated, UniPoint includes the column.
removing a column
To remove a column:
2 Choose Delete.
When the report is generated, UniPoint does not include the column.
If you need that column later, use the inserting a column procedures.
changing the position
of a column
To move a column:
2 Click on the up and down buttons to change the position of the
column in the report.
January 1998
7-33
Report customization
In UniPoint, you can specify custom calculations that enable you to
generate report results to meet your needs. You can indicate custom
calculations in report columns, report annotations, and peak labels.
Note: For a description of the calculations that UniPoint currently uses
to generate its chromatography calculations, refer to Appendix F.
inserting custom calculation
into report column
The following example shows you how to include a column in individual and
summary reports that uses the United States Pharmacopoeia calculation
to generate the plate number for each peak. The United States
Pharmacopoeia (USP) calculation is as follows:
Note: UniPoint uses the British Pharmacopoeia calculation to generate
plate number, which is as follows:
To insert a report column that will generate the USP plate number for
each reported peak:
1 Create or open the analysis method.
2 Choose Column Formats from the Report menu.
3 Select the option button of the report to which the column will be
added. In this example, the Unknown report type is selected.
7-34
January 1998
analysis methods
4 Click in the Custom check box.
5 Click on Builder to access the Expression Builder dialog which will
assist you in specifying your custom calculations.
The Expression Builder dialog lists UniPoint quantities,
mathematical operators, peak names, and variable names that can be
used in your calculation. To learn more about the dialog, click on its
Help button. For the items in the Calculable Quantities list box, the
description includes syntax and usage information.
6 In the Expression text box, type the custom calculation to generate the
USP plate number for each reported peak:
RETENTION_TIME/WIDTH(0)^2*16
The (0) argument in the equation identifies the fraction peak height,
which in this example is 0 because the calculation requires the width
at the baseline.
Be aware that instead of typing the calculation, you can double-click
on an identifier (such as WIDTH) and have it appear at the cursor
location in the Expression text box.
7 Click on OK to return to the Report Column Format dialog.
8 In the Heading text box, indicate a description for the custom
calculation. For this example, the heading could be USP Plate.
9 Click on Insert.
January 1998
7-35
10 Use the up and down buttons to position the column in the report.
11 To include the column in another report type, highlight the
calculation in the Expression text box and press CTRL+C to copy the
calculation.
12 In the Report Type area, choose the option button for another kind of
report.
13 Click on Custom.
14 If necessary, click in the Expression text box and then press CTRL+V to
paste the calculation.
15 Use the up and down button to position the column in the report.
16 Repeat steps 12 - 15 if you want to include the calculation in
summary reports.
The following example shows the USP Plate column and the results
generated for each peak.
7-36
January 1998
analysis methods
adding custom calculation
into report annotation
A calculation in the annotation pertains to the entire report while a
calculation for a report column pertains to each peak listed in the
report.
To include a custom calculation in the annotation:
2 Choose Report Output from the Report menu.
3 When the Report Output dialog appears, choose the Annotation
button.
The Annotation Contents dialog appears.
4 Type the text for the calculation in the Custom Information text box.
The calculation must be within curly brackets, {}. See the examples
below.
Or, click on Builder to access the Expression Builder dialog and use
its options to specify the calculation. Once again, the calculation
entered in the Expression text box must be within curly brackets.
Example 1: To display the total area for three integrated peaks, the
custom calculation would be: {AREA(1)+AREA(2)+AREA(3)}
Example 2: To insert text identifying the custom calculation, type
the text but do not place it within brackets, for example: Total Peak
Area = {AREA(1)+AREA(2)+AREA(3)}
January 1998
7-37
adding custom calculation
into peak label
UniPoint allows you to modify what is displayed next to a peak in
the chromatogram plot printed in reports. You can include the peak
name plus additional information next to each integrated peak, for
example, the peak area can be listed.
To identify what you want to appear next to peaks:
3 Use the Peak Table dialog to set peak information.
4 Choose the Options button to display the Peak Table Options dialog.
5 In the Peak Annotation box, type text or indicate a calculation that
will be performed and its results listed next to the peak label. Refer to
the following examples.
Example 1: To display the peak name and its area, indicate the following in the text box: {PEAK_NAME}{AREA}
Example 2: To insert text identifying the expression after the peak name,
type the text but do not place it within brackets, for example:
{PEAK_NAME} Area={AREA}
The following diagrams show the peak name and area as it would
appear depending on what you entered in the Peak Annotation box.
The captions under the diagrams identify what was entered in the Peak
Annotation box.
Instead of area, you could display amount, asymmetry, plates, and so
on, or your own custom calculation after the peak name. You can use
the Expression Builder to create the calculation used to generate the
result that will appear next to the peak. To access the Expression
Builder, select the Builder button in the Peak Table Options dialog.
Remember to place the calculation within brackets.
7-38
January 1998
analysis methods
Variables
To make your analysis methods more flexible, you can indicate a
variable name instead of entering a value in a command parameter box.
A variable name can be any combination of letters and numbers and can
contain special characters (_, $, ?, @) as long as it is not the first character or a mathematical operator (+, -, *, /, %). It cannot include spaces.
Valid variable names would be PeakWidth and Peak_Sensitivity.
a variable name. For example, it views the names PeakWidth,
peakwidth, and PEAKWIDTH as identifying the same value.
The command parameter specified for an event can also be the result of
number. For example, PeakWidth * 2 is a valid command parameter.
You can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (/), and return the
remainder (%).
When setting up the Operations window for a run, UniPoint prompts
you for a value to assign to each variable.
To see what variable names have been set for an analysis method and to
indicate lower and upper limits for and a default for each variable, do
the following:
1 From the Analysis menu, choose Variables.
2 When the dialog appears, choose the variable name in the list box.
colon, for example, 1:100. If the input is required, type an R before the
You can indicate variable names instead of limit values, for example,
1:PeakWidth.
January 1998
7-39
5 If you want to see a default value for the variable name, type that in the
Default Value box.
6 To remove an unused variable name, choose it in the list box and
choose Delete.
variable names
If you add, change, or delete variable names and the analysis method is
used in an operations list, you need to recreate the operations list or
modify each step in the list that uses the analysis method, as outlined
below.
1 Open the operations list.
2 Double-click on the step that executes the analysis method.
3 In the Step Entry dialog, click in the Analysis Method box and use the
Browse to reselect the analysis method.
The parameter text boxes at the bottom of the dialog update to reflect
the changes in the analysis method. If a variable is no longer used by
the method, its parameter box is grayed.
4 Enter the correct value in each parameter box and click on Change to
update the operations table.
5 Use the scroll arrows to display information for the next step that uses
the analysis method.
6 Repeat steps 3 -5 for each step that uses the analysis method.
7 Choose Done when finished modifying steps.
8 To remove the table column for a variable that is no longer used:
a) Display the Format Columns dialog by choosing its command from
the Table menu or double-clicking on the header row in the table.
b) In the Column Contents list box, choose the variable name and
choose Delete.
c) Choose OK to exit.
9 Save and close the operations list using the File menu.
7-40
January 1998
analysis methods
Error handling
UniPoint can perform validation and system performance checks on
peaks in samples.
The Error Handling dialog identifies the error conditions that UniPoint
should be aware of when analyzing data using the method. To display
the dialog box:
1 From the Analysis menu, choose Error Handling.
activating error handling
Selecting a peak name and indicating error conditions for it activates
error handling. What happens during a run or re-analysis processing
then depends on whether an error control method is entered and
whether the Continue on error check box is selected.
• If neither a control method nor the Continue check box is selected, the
run or re-analysis processing is stopped when the error condition is
met.
• If both a control method and the Continue check box are selected,
UniPoint does one of the following:
* during a run, it executes the error handling method and then
proceeds to the next step in the operations list.
* during re-analysis processing, it proceeds to the next step in the
re-analysis list.
• If a control method is indicated but the Continue check box is not
selected, UniPoint does one of the following:
* during a run, it executes the error handling method and then
stops the run.
* during re-analysis processing, it stops processing.
• If a method is not indicated, but the Continue check box is selected,
UniPoint finishes the current step and proceeds to the next step in the
operations list or re-analysis list.
January 1998
7-41
indicating error conditions
To specify error conditions:
1 In the Error Handling dialog, indicate parameters as described
below.
Peak Names. Choose the names of the peak to monitor. The list box
shows the peaks set in the peak table.
Error Method. Specify the path to and name of the control method to
execute when the selected error condition is met. If necessary, click in
this text box and then choose the Browse button to select the file.
Continue on error. Choose this check box if the run or re-analysis
processing should continue even if an error has been encountered.
Refer to activating error handling, above, to see how this check box
affects what happens during the run or re-analysis.
Error Conditions. In the list box, choose the peak calculation or value
to monitor.
Using the option buttons, choose one of the mathematical operators:
greater than, less than, or outside range.
In the text box(es), type the monitor value(s).
2 Repeat for the next peak.
3 When finished, choose OK to exit the dialog box.
removing error conditions
To cancel an error condition set for a peak.
1 Choose the peak name in the list box.
2 Choose Clear.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to remove any other error conditions.
4 Choose OK to exit the dialog box.
7-42
January 1998
8 Operations
Using the options in the Operations window, you specify the list of
steps to execute during a run. A step in the list can identify a sample to
inject and the control and analysis conditions to process that sample.
Or a step may identify a control method to use for system startup or
shutdown. This section describes the components of the Operations
window and how to generate the operations list.
The Operations window is also where you start and monitor the
progress of a run. You learn more about that in Section 9. Plus, it is
where you perform manual control for developing methods, described in
Section 10.
January 1998
8-1
Operations window
You access the Operations window by creating an operations file or by
opening an existing file. Following is an Operations window. When you
first display the window, the graph pane may not be shown. Choose
Show Graph from the Graph menu.
menu bar
toolbar
table pane
status box
graph pane
annotation
box
legend
box
status bar
menu bar
Choose available functions from the drop-down menus found beneath
the items on the menu bar.
Menu
File
Edit
List Entry
Manual
Run
Table
Graph
Window
Help
table pane
Description
Set step-by-step instructions to perform during a run.
Control HPLC system manually.
Start, stop, pause run and indicate file naming parameters.
annotation or toolbar.
Lists the steps to execute during a run.
Double-clicking on a row automatically displays the dialog box used to
set up parameters for the step.
Using the right mouse button, you can double-click on the control or
analysis method in a step and display the window that shows the
instructions set in the method.
8-2
January 1998
operations
graph pane
Shows the run-time chromatographic plot of acquired data, gradient
profile of the control method, plus run-time events. (See page 5-27 for a
description of the lines and symbols used for run-time events.)
The trace begins at the data collection begin time (usually synchronized
with injection).
For the gradient profile, the mobile phase composition (Y axis — labeled
% Mobile Phase) is plotted with respect to time (X axis).
toolbar
Provides tools for manipulating the graph and for starting, pausing, and
stopping the run and/or stopping pump flow. To activate a tool, just
click on its icon.
navigator tool
Displays Navigator.
open tool
save tool
Stores operations list to disk. If it has not
been saved, displays the Save As dialog.
print tool
arrow tool
Turns off magnifying glass and cross-hairs
tools.
magnifying glass tool
For enlarging portion of graph.
cross-hairs tool
For identifying the mV (or user units) and
time values for a point on the trace.
full-scale tool
For returning graph axes to minimum and
maximum values for displayed trace(s).
original view tool
maximum values set in control method’s
Strip Chart Options dialog. See page 6-11.
stop tool
For terminating run.
pause tool
For pausing run.
go tool
For starting run.
stop pumps tool
For stopping pumps.
January 1998
8-3
legend box
Identifies the symbols and lines shown in the graph. To turn on/off the
legend, choose its command from the Graph menu.
For each trace being collected, the legend identifies the following:
By double-clicking on an item in the legend, you can access the Attributes dialog. Use that dialog box to remove events from display or to
change the size of symbols and lines shown in the graph.
Note: The symbols and lines used for run-time events (such as detector
autozero) are not identified in the legend. See page 5-27 for a
description of those symbols and lines.
status box
Displays status information for the components of the HPLC system.
You see pressure information and contact status in this box. Plus
during the run, you see user comments indicated in the method or
routines file being executed.
For system control to occur, the message System Status must be displayed
in this box .
If the message Disconnected is shown, you can set up and modify the list;
however, it cannot be run. To run the list, manually start the Method Executor,
described on page 9-2.
If you see the message No Control Method - Edit Only Mode, you must set
up and save a control method before controlling system components via
an Operations window.
annotation box
Displays user comments for the operations list. To turn on/off the
annotation, choose its command from the Window menu.
To add comments, use the Notes command in the Edit menu.
status bar
8-4
Shows operational status or help message if a menu command is
highlighted.
January 1998
operations
Setting up an operations list
You can set up and make changes to the operations list using the Run
Entry dialog or using the commands in the Edit menu. If you are
building a new operations list, you can use the Express Entry dialog or
the Step Entry dialog to get started. If you are making changes to an
existing operations file, use the commands in the Edit menu or Step
Entry dialog.
Multi-system users. Make sure only one configuration file is referenced
by the steps in the list.
before creating list
Before you set up an operations list, create the control and, optionally,
analysis methods to use during the run.
If injected samples are analyzed and reported on by more than one
analysis method, you need to add columns to the table. To add a
column for an additional analysis method:
1 Double-click on the top line in the table to reveal the Format Columns
dialog. (Or choose Format Columns from the Table menu.)
2 Select a column in the Column Contents list box. (In the operations
table, the new column inserts to the left of this column.)
3 Choose Analysis Method 2 in the Contents drop-down list box.
4 Make any additional changes in the other text boxes.
5 Choose Insert.
6 Repeat steps 2 - 5 to insert another analysis method column if
necessary.
7 When finished, choose Done to exit the dialog.
The table displays the new column(s).
If the operations list had information in it you see <Replace> in each
row of the added column. You can use the Replace command in the
Edit menu to quickly substitute <Replace> with the path to and name
of the analysis method to use during the run.
January 1998
8-5
Using express entry dialog for list setup
To quickly generate the operations list, you can use the Express Entry
dialog. This method of list setup is preferable if you are injecting all
unknowns or calibrators, or you are injecting a group of calibrators
followed by a group of unknowns. If you are randomly injecting
calibrators and unknowns, refer to Using Step Entry dialog for list setup
and modification on page 8-8.
1 Choose Express from the List Entry menu.
2 Use the options in the Express Entry dialog to set information for the
operations list.
3 Choose Generate to create the list. If steps are currently set in the
operations list, they are replaced by the newly generated steps.
4 Refer to Modifying the operations list using edit menu on page 8-13
for details on quickly assigning descriptions to samples.
Following is a description of the options in the Express Entry dialog.
Calib Levels. For calibration analyses, type the number of calibration
levels being injected for calibrator samples.
Repeats/Level. If you are making multiple injections of each calibrator at
a level, type the number of repeats here. UniPoint averages each level’s
peak data and uses the average peak size to build the calibration curve
for each standard peak.
A value of 1 represents a “no-repeat” condition or in other words one
injection per calibration level.
Number of Unknowns. Tell UniPoint how many unknown samples are
injected after the calibrators.
8-6
January 1998
operations
Repeats/Unknown. If you are making multiple injections of each unknown, type the number of repeats here. A value of 1 represents a “norepeat” condition or in other words one injection per unknown.
Number of Cycles. If running a multi-cycle calibration and unknown
analysis, indicate the number of cycles here.
For example, a calibration analysis consists of 4 calibration levels with 3
repeats per level and 5 unknown samples with 2 repeats per unknown.
How many steps are generated for 1 calibration cycle? For 2 cycles?
1 cycle:
Steps = (4 levels x 3 repeats per level) + (5 unknowns x 2 repeats per
unknown) = 22
2 cycles:
Steps = (22 injections per cycle x 2 cycles) = 44
Control Method. Type, or use Browse to specify, the path to and file
name of the control method used to control devices.
Analysis Method. Type, or use Browse to specify, the path to and file
name of the analysis method used to analyze collected data.
Additional text boxes. Other text boxes may automatically appear
depending on the parameters set in your control and analysis methods.
For example, if an injector protocol requests inputs, such as sample
volume and sample location, text boxes to answer those inputs appear.
If one of the inputs requests the fraction site at which to begin collection,
refer to Setting up operations list for fraction collection on page 8-12.
If you indicated in the analysis method that actual and nominal
amounts should be entered for samples or that unknowns should be
grouped for additional reporting, text boxes appear for those also. See
page 7-25 for a description of actual and nominal amounts.
If you added columns using the Format Columns dialog, you see text
boxes to indicate information for those columns. For example, you may
have added a column for a second analysis method.
January 1998
8-7
Using step entry dialog for list setup and modification
To indicate steps in the operations list, you can use the Step Entry
dialog. This setup method is useful if you are randomly injecting
calibrators.
The Step Entry dialog can also be used to modify or delete steps in an
existing operations list.
1 Choose Step from the List Entry menu. The Step Entry dialog
appears. (If the table already has one or more steps, you can doubleclick on a row to quickly access the dialog.)
2 Use the options in the dialog box to create or modify the operations
list. The text boxes that appear in the dialog box vary depending on
conditions set in the control or analysis method specified for a step.
The Step up and down arrows in the upper right corner enable you to
scroll through existing operations steps.
Description. Text describing the sample. If you enter a number in the
description, you can have UniPoint automatically increment the
number when multiple entries are generated. To see the Inc. box for
incrementing the sample description, include a number in the Description box (for example, Sample 1) before you choose the Multiple
button.
Control Method. The path to and file name of the control method used
to control devices. Double-click in the text box and then use the
Browse dialog that appears to select the file.
Analysis Method. The path to and file name of the analysis method
used to analyze data collected for the sample. Double-click in the text
box and then use the Browse dialog that appears to select the file.
8-8
January 1998
operations
depending on the parameters set in your control and analysis
methods. For example, if an injector protocol requests inputs, such as
sample volume and sample location, text boxes to answer those
inputs appear. If one of the inputs requests the fraction site at which
to begin collection, refer to Setting up operations list for fraction
collection on page 8-11.
If you indicated in the analysis method that actual and nominal
amounts should be entered for samples or that unknowns should be
grouped for additional reporting, text boxes appear for those also.
See page 7-25 for a description of actual and nominal amounts.
boxes to indicate information for those columns. For example, you
may have added a column for a second analysis method.
adding step
To add the first step to a new list or add a step to the bottom of the list:
1 Make sure New Step appears in the upper right corner of the dialog
box. If not, choose New.
2 Specify information in the text boxes. For file names, you must
indicate the complete path to the file. Therefore, click in the text box
and then use the Browse button to select the file.
3 Choose Insert when finished indicating the step’s information.
4 Repeat to add more steps.
inserting step between steps
To insert a step before the first step or between two existing steps:
1 Use the Step up or down arrow to select the step before which the
new step inserts. For example, to place a step between steps 3 and 4,
display information for step 4 in the text boxes.
2 Use the text boxes to specify information for the step.
3 Choose Insert.
generating multiple steps
The easiest way to set up the operations list is to generate a list of all of
the steps and then modify the steps as necessary.
1 Choose the Multiple button. You see additional options. Refer to the
dialog box on next page.
January 1998
8-9
Inc. An Increment box appears next to text boxes that prompt you for
a value, such as Calib. Level. If you do not want to increment the
value for each step, indicate 0 (zero) or leave the box blank.
Num. Steps to Generate. How many steps to add to the bottom of the
list.
Num. Repeats per Step. How many multiples of the step to generate.
This is especially useful for specifying multiple injections of the same
calibrator or unknown.
2 Indicate information in the text boxes.
3 Choose Generate.
If you already have one or more steps indicated, the steps are added
to the bottom of the existing list.
4 Make the necessary changes to each step. See modifying step, below.
Refer to Modifying the operations list using edit menu on page 8-13
for details on quickly assigning descriptions to samples.
deleting step
To remove a step:
1 Use the Step up or down arrow so the information for the step is
displayed.
2 Choose Delete.
modifying step
To change options for a step:
displayed.
2 Use the text boxes to make the necessary changes to the step.
3 Choose Change.
8-10
January 1998
operations
Using the tray file to generate the operations list
When creating an operations list, you can browse to the tray file, select
multiple tube sites, and have UniPoint generate steps in the operations
list.
1 Create or open an Operations window.
2 Choose Step from the List Entry menu.
3 In the Step Entry dialog, indicate control method and analysis method
information.
4 Enter values for all variables except the sample location variable
(usually labeled TUBE or SAMPLE_LOCATION).
5 Click in the text box for the sample location variable and click on
Browse. Or, you can double-click in the text box.
6 When the Browse Tray window appears, choose multiple tube sites as
described below.
To select random tubes within one zone:
a) If necessary, click within the zone to make it active. Its tubes turn
from gray to blue to indicate the zone is active.
b) Press the Ctrl key and select each tube. Selected tubes are red.
To select a range of tubes within one zone:
a) If necessary, click within the zone to make it active. Its tubes turn
from gray to blue to indicate the zone is active.
b) Click on the beginning tube and then press the Shift key and click
on the last tube. Selected tubes are red.
Note: UniPoint will allow you to click and drag over more than one
zone. However, be aware that when the software places the
tube sites in the operations list, it sorts the tube sites by
number only. The software does not sort by tube site within
zone. Therefore, you may need to move steps so they are
ordered the way that you want them.
7 Choose the Add Step(s) button. A message box appears specifying the
number of steps that were added.
8 Click on OK when the message appears that tells how many steps
were added. Then click on Done to return to the Step Entry dialog.
9 Click on Done to exit the Step Entry dialog.
10 Review the operations list and if necessary enter or change the sample
description for each sample. To enter sample descriptions, use the
Step Entry dialog or the Paste Special command within the Edit menu.
January 1998
8-11
Setting up operations list for fraction collection
If you are doing fraction collection, UniPoint can keep track of the tubes
used for each injection (referred to as continuous collection). Or, you can
indicate the tube at which to start collection for each injection (referred to
as specific site collection.)
Note: The Fraction Collector Control Technical Note, available from your
Gilson representative, describes how to set up UniPoint to control
a Gilson fraction collector.
With continuous collection, you indicate the zone in which collection
occurs. For the first injection, collection starts in the first tube of the zone.
For the second and each subsequent sample collected into the zone,
collection will begin in the next available numbered tube. (See Examples
2 and 3, below.)
With specific site collection, you indicate both the zone and tube at which
collection starts for each sample. (See Example 1, below.)
You may use both continuous collection and specific site collection within
the same operations list.
Following are example operations lists. In the operations lists, the TUBE
column identifies the location of the sample to be injected. The
FRACTION_SITE column identifies where collection begins for the
injected sample. TUBE and FRACTION_SITE were variables in the
control method.
Example 1
Specific site collection: collection of each sample’s eluent into
same set of tubes (one zone)
If the fractions for each injection are collected into the same set of tubes,
ensure that the zone:tube for the FRACTION_SITE variable is the same for
each sample, for example, FRACTIONS:1.
Description
Injection 1
Injection 2
Injection 3
Injection 4
Injection 5
8-12
Control Method
C:\233XL\CONTROL.GCT
Analysis Method
C:\233XL\ANALYSIS.GAN
TUBE
TUBE:1
TUBE:2
TUBE:3
TUBE:4
TUBE:5
FRACTION_SITE
FRACTIONS:1
FRACTIONS:1
FRACTIONS:1
FRACTIONS:1
FRACTIONS:1
January 1998
operations
Example 2
Continuous collection: collection of each sample’s eluent into its
own set of tubes (one zone)
If the fractions for each injection are collected into a different set of tubes,
indicate the zone name, followed by a colon, into which collection begins
in each step. Refer to the FRACTION_SITE column.
Description
Injection 1
Injection 2
Injection 3
Injection 4
Injection 5
Example 3
Control Method
Analysis Method
TUBE
TUBE:1
TUBE:2
TUBE:3
TUBE:4
TUBE:5
FRACTION_SITE
FRACTIONS:
FRACTIONS:
FRACTIONS:
FRACTIONS:
FRACTIONS:
Continuous collection: collection of each sample’s eluent into its
own set of tubes (multiple zones)
If the fractions for each injection are collected into a different set of tubes,
indicate the zone name, followed by a colon, into which collection begins
in each step. The following example uses two zones. Fractions from
standard injections are collected into one zone (STD_FRACTIONS), and
fractions from unknown injections are collected into another zone
(UNK_FRACTIONS).
Description
Injection 1
Injection 2
Injection 3
Injection 4
Injection 5
Injection 6
Control Method
Analysis Method
TUBE
STD_TUBE:1
STD_TUBE:2
STD_TUBE:3
UNK_TUBE:1
UNK_TUBE:2
UNK_TUBE:3
FRACTION_SITE
STD_FRACTIONS:
STD_FRACTIONS:
STD_FRACTIONS:
UNK_FRACTIONS:
UNK_FRACTIONS:
UNK_FRACTIONS:
Generating operations list when re-injecting collected fractions
When setting up an operations list to re-inject collected fractions, you can
browse to an open Results window and select fraction site information to
add to the operations list. This feature works with HPLC systems that
use a 233 XL or 215/819 for sample injection and fraction collection.
Following is a description of how to browse to the Results window to
generate steps in the Operations window.
Note: Before creating or opening the operations list, make any necessary
modifications to the control and analysis methods. For example,
in the control method, remove fraction collector events unless you
are collecting eluent for the re-injected fractions. Choose Save As
from the File menu and save the control method to a new name.
January 1998
8-13
1 Display the Results window by opening the data (.GDT) file or report
(.GR?) file.
2 Create or open an Operations window.
3 Choose Step from the List Entry menu.
4 In the Step Entry dialog, indicate control method and analysis
method information.
5 Enter values for all variables except the sample location variable
(usually labeled TUBE or SAMPLE_LOCATION).
6 Click in the text box for the sample location variable and click on
Browse. Or, you can double-click in the text box.
7 When the Browse Tray window appears, click on the Link to Results
button. The Results window then appears, along with the Samples
dialog, sample tray, and fraction collector tray.
8 Use the Samples dialog to select the appropriate sample.
9 Select fraction sites by doing one of the following:
• In the fraction collector tray, hold down the Ctrl key and click on
each fraction site.
• Select the cross-hairs tool. Position the mouse pointer in the
chromatogram plot. Then hold down the Ctrl key and click
between the fraction collector begin and end marks to select
fraction sites. Or, click and drag to draw a rectangle around the
desired fractions.
10 Choose the Add Steps button.
11 Repeat steps 8 - 10 if you want to select fractions collected for other
samples.
12 When finished, choose Done in the Fraction Collector Sites window.
The Operations window appears and its table lists steps for the
selected fraction sites.
13 Review the list and if necessary enter or change the sample
description for each fraction.
8-14
January 1998
operations
Modifying the operations list using edit menu
Once an operations list is set up, you can use the commands in the Edit
menu to make changes. If you need help on deleting, copying, and
pasting rows or on finding and replacing text, see page 5-17.
importing information into
a column
An additional command, Paste Special, in the Edit menu enables you
to bring in a column of information from Notepad and insert it into the
table. This command is useful for quickly entering sample IDs into the
Description column.
1 Set up the operations list as described earlier in this section.
3 When the Paste Special dialog appears, choose the Editor command
button to open Windows Notepad text editor.
4 Use the text editor to identify the sample descriptions. Put each
sample description on a separate line.
Or if you have a file already set up, use the Open command in the File
menu to select the file.
5 Select all of the text in the editor and choose the Copy command.
6 Choose Exit from the File menu. To save the list for future use, choose
Yes when the message box appears. To discard the list, choose No.
7 When the Paste Special dialog re-appears, choose Description in the
list box and then choose Paste to perform the insertion.
8 Choose Cancel to exit the dialog box.
January 1998
8-15
Reviewing where run-generated files are stored
During the run, UniPoint can generate data, report (which include
chromatogram plots of acquired traces), calibration, log, and re-analysis
list files.
UniPoint automatically creates a data/report directory for these files
and assigns default names to the run-generated files.
1 Choose Storage from the Run menu to display the Run File Storage
dialog.
Note: If you have not saved the operations list and assigned a name,
you see a message box. Use the Save As or Save command in
the File menu to store the operations list to disk.
2 In the Run File Storage dialog, check the names assigned to files.
3 To modify default names, choose <Templates> and make the
changes. Then select <Files> to review how the changes affect the file
names.
If you indicate a directory name that does not exist, UniPoint creates
it for you during the run. As a default, UniPoint uses the name of the
operations list as the directory name.
4 Choose OK to accept the settings and exit the dialog.
Following is a description of the areas of the Run File Storage dialog and
how UniPoint assigns names.
Output Directory. Specifies the data/report directory into which rungenerated files are stored. As a default directory name, UniPoint:
• uses the name assigned to the operations list
• adds a 3-digit extension (001 is assigned the 1st time the operations
list is run, 002 is assigned the 2nd time, and so on)
8-16
January 1998
operations
Data File. Specifies the path and file name where information for
collected data is stored. To assign the file name, UniPoint uses the name
of the operations list but adds the .GDT extension. Information for all
samples injected during the run is stored here.
Log File. Specifies the path and file name where run-time events are
stored. To assign the name, UniPoint uses the same naming scheme as
for the data file but adds the .GLG extension.
Save Log. Indicates if a listing of run-time events is generated.
Method File. If multiple analysis methods are used to analyze injected
samples, select the appropriate method file name from the list box. You
can then view and if necessary change the path and file name to use for
storing report and calibration information.
Report File. Specifies the path and file name where report information
for all samples are stored. As a default file name, UniPoint:
• uses file name assigned to the analysis method
• assigns the extension .GR1
If data is later re-analyzed using the same analysis method, the
software increments the number in the extension. (Up to 9 report files
can be created using the same analysis method and stored in the
same directory.)
Calibration File. Specifies the path and file name for calibration plots
generated for standard peaks. To assign the name, UniPoint uses the
same naming scheme as for a report file but adds the .GB1 extension.
Disk Space. Shows how much room is available on the disk and how
much is required for the run. If there is not enough space, do either or
both of the following:
• remove unneeded files from the disk before starting the run
• save the output files to another fixed or network disk drive.
Templates. Allows you to change the default file or directory naming
scheme used by UniPoint. When you choose the <Templates> button,
the software places question marks in the output directory name and file
names. The placement of the question marks identifies which part of the
name automatically increments when the software assigns names. You
can remove or change the placement of the question mark(s) in a name to
meet your needs. However, do not modify the first two characters in the
file name extension for any file type.
Choose <Files> to see how a change to a template affects the name
assigned to the file or directory.
January 1998
8-17
9 Programmed Run
The Operations window is where you start and monitor the progress of
a run. The parts of the window were described in Section 8.
While the run is in progress, you can:
• modify steps that have not yet been executed. This includes modifying a control method or analysis method file so updated conditions
are used, or adding a step to inject a priority sample.
• use the toolbar to manipulate the appearance of the run-time graph.
• perform other types of processing in the UniPoint, for example, view
the results from a previous run, create the operations list for the next
run, or execute a re-analysis.
• access and use another Windows program, such as Microsoft Word.
January 1998
9-1
Method Executor
The Method Executor is an intermediary between UniPoint and Gilson
GSIOC devices. It performs the steps in a run and enables the computer
to perform other tasks while UniPoint is running.
When you open or create an Operations window, UniPoint searches for
and tries to start a Method Executor for programmed and manual
control of the HPLC system. You see the message System Status in the
status box of the Operations window if a Method Executor is available.
UniPoint only allows one Method Executor to communicate with an
HPLC system configuration at a time. If you open multiple Operations
windows, another Method Executor is not started if the Operations
window references a configuration that is currently monitored by a
Method Executor.
If you are viewing a new Operations window, UniPoint checks the
configuration file associated with the last saved control method (the
"default" control method) and determines if a Method Executor has been
started for it. If you opened an existing operations list, the software
checks the configuration associated with the control method named in
the first step of the list to see if a Method Executor has been started for it.
Once a Method Executor has been started for an HPLC system, it
continues monitoring system components until you exit UniPoint.
manually starting the
method executor
If an Operations window is "disconnected" from system components,
you can manually start a Method Executor for it by doing the following:
1 If another Operations window is linked to the Method Executor, close
that window. Or, disconnect it by choosing Method Executor from
the File menu and choosing the Shutdown Method Executor button.
2 In the Operations window to connect to the Method Executor, choose
Method Executor from the File menu and choose the Start Method
Executor button.
9-2
January 1998
programmed run
Starting a run
To get ready for and begin a run:
1 Make sure all system modules are turned on and are ready to run
(pumps are primed, column is equilibrated, samples are in place,
printer has paper and is turned on, and so on).
2 Check that the correct operations list is selected and all files used by
the list exist.
3 Make sure a Method Executor is available. You see the message
System Status in the status box.
4 Choose Start from the Run menu or the go tool (
January 1998
) from the toolbar.
9-3
During the run
Manipulating run-time graph
As data is acquired, the run-time plot is scaled according to the channel
scaling parameters set in the control method for the current step. However, you can change the scaling by zooming.
zooming
You can use the magnifying glass tool to enlarge a region of interest. To
zoom:
1 Choose the magnifying glass tool (
).
2 Place the mouse pointer to one side of the region of interest in the
graph.
3 Click and hold the left mouse button.
4 Drag the mouse to draw a zoom box around the desired peaks. For
example:
• To enlarge the size of peaks and still have the chromatogram plot
update as new data is collected, extend the box slightly past the
end of the traces before releasing the mouse button.
• To scale peaks to a desired height, draw the box using the height
of the peak of interest or the Y axis as a reference, and then release
the mouse button. (See diagram on next page.)
• To display a time period of interest, draw the box using the X axis
as a reference, and then release the mouse button. (See diagram on
next page.)
9-4
January 1998
programmed run
5 Be aware of the following:
• If the zoom box extended past the end of the displayed trace(s), the
plot continues to update as additional data is acquired. However,
the time period duration shown in the X axis remains the same.
To display the entire chromatogram plot, choose the full-scale tool.
• If the zoom box did not extend past the end of the displayed
trace(s), the plot does not update as additional data is acquired.
The chromatogram plot remains static. It begins to update again if
you choose the arrow tool ( ) or the full-scale tool ( ) or when
data for the next injected sample begins to appear.
moving plot along X axis
To move the plot along the X axis:
1 Use the magnifying glass tool (
of the plot.
) as described above to enlarge part
2 Use the scroll bar that appears along the bottom of the plot. To
examine peaks with longer retention times, move the scroll box to the
left. To examine peaks with shorter retention times, move the box to
the right.
finding peak information
To determine retention time and voltage information:
1 Click on the cross-hairs tool (
).
2 Move the mouse pointer to the peak of interest. In the information
line at the bottom of the window, you see:
• retention time
• mV height (or specified user-defined units)
If you are looking at a test chromatogram, this is a convenient way to
determine the retention time of a peak.
January 1998
) to turn off the cross-hairs tool (
).
9-5
returning X and Y axes
to control method settings
Choose the original view tool ( ) from the toolbar or its command from
the Graph menu to return the X and Y axes to the minimum and maximum settings in the control method. UniPoint uses the values in the
method's Strip Chart Options dialog (see page 6-11).
removing/replacing traces
and symbols from display
To remove one or more traces or symbols:
1 Double-click on an item in the legend. Or, choose Attributes from the
Graph menu.
2 When the Attributes dialog appears, choose the description for the
item to remove from the Legend list box.
3 Remove the X from the Display/Symbol check box.
remove the X from the Display Event check box. (For a description of
symbols and lines for run-time events, see page 5-27.)
7 Choose OK.
To re-display an item, follow the instructions above but insert the X in
the Display check box.
displaying/removing gridlines
You can turn off and on the display of gridlines in the graph:
1 In the Graph menu of the document window, choose the Signal Axis
(for the Y axis) and Time Axis (for the X axis).
2 When the dialog box appears, remove or insert the check mark in the
Major or Minor check boxes and choose OK.
3 Repeat for the other axis.
9-6
January 1998
programmed run
Interrupting a run
You can choose to pause, stop flow, or terminate a run in progress.
pause run
To pause a run, choose Pause from the Run menu or its tool (
toolbar.
) from the
This option causes the run time and gradient progression to enter a
timed hold. The duration of the pause is indicated in the status area.
Mobile phase continues to flow at the current composition and flow rate.
If you pause a run, data collection is not interrupted. It proceeds until
the data collection time for the current control method elapses.
To continue the gradient progression, choose Pause again from the Run
menu or its tool from the toolbar. The run time and the gradient profile
continue as programmed.
stop flow
To stop flow, choose Stop All Pumps from the Manual menu or its tool
( ) from the toolbar.
This option causes the run time and gradient progression to enter a
timed hold. The duration of the hold is indicated in the status area.
However, unlike the Pause option, mobile phase does not flow. Like the
pause option, data collection is not interrupted. It proceeds until the
data collection time elapses.
To restart the flow and remain in the timed hold, choose Mobile Phase
from the Manual menu. Then click on Start Flow in the dialog box.
To restart the flow and continue the run as programmed in the control
method, choose Pause from the Run menu or its tool ( ) from the
toolbar.
January 1998
9-7
stop run
To stop the run before it completes, choose Stop from the Run menu or
its tool ( ) from the toolbar.
This option stops the run. When asked, verify that you want to quit the
run by clicking on Yes. If you choose No, the run continues.
If you choose Yes, a message box appears that asks you whether or not
to save collected data. Choosing Yes saves the data collected for the
operations step on which the run was stopped to the data file, along
with the data collected for any previous steps. If you choose No,
UniPoint does not save the data collected for the step to the data file.
Note: If you stop the run on the first data collection step and indicate
that you do not want to save data, UniPoint asks if you want to
delete the data/report output directory that was also created for
the run and any files, such as the log file, stored in it.
If you stop a run and no data was collected in any of the executed
steps, UniPoint automatically deletes the data/report output
directory and any files in it, such as the log file.
The mobile phase composition and flow conditions in effect at the time
of termination remain in effect. Flow does not stop automatically after a
run! To stop flow, choose Stop All Pumps from the Run menu or its tool
Resuming a run after termination
You can restart a run that was stopped while in progress. You can
resume the run at the same step at which it was terminated. Or, you can
resume the run at an earlier step if you want to repeat a series of steps.
1 Choose Resume from the Run menu.
2 Type the number of the step at which to resume. You can indicate the
same step number at which the run was terminated. Or, specify the
number of a step prior to that one so you can repeat steps within the
run.
9-8
January 1998
programmed run
The information for each sample is added to the end of the data and
report files created for the terminated run. If you repeat a series of
steps, there is duplicate information for the repeated injections. To
generate meaningful reports, you can do a batch re-analysis that
omits any “bad” injections.
3 You will see a Fraction Collection area at the bottom of the Resume
Run dialog if the data (.GDT) file specified in the File text box
contains any fraction collection events.
If the steps in your operations list identify the zone and tube number
(specific site collection), UniPoint will collect into the specified tube when
you resume the run and will not use the information in the Fraction
Collection list box. Therefore, you can disregard the information in the
Fraction Collection list box.
If the steps in your operations list identify just the zone name (continuous
collection), UniPoint uses the information in the Fraction Collection list
box to identify the tube at which to start collection for a zone. You can
review and if necessary modify the information in the Fraction Collection list box, described below.
In the Fraction Collection list box, UniPoint lists each zone used in the
data file specified in the File text box and lists the next tube to be accessed in the zone. Be aware that every zone required for the resumed
run may not be listed if the previous run was terminated before all of the
zones were used at least once. During the resumed run, collection
begins in tube 1 for any unlisted zone. Also be aware that a listed zone
may not be required by any of the steps in the resumed run.
When the run is resumed, fraction collection will begin in the specified
tube for the first step that uses a zone. For each subsequent step that
identifies the zone, collection will begin in the next available numbered
tube in the zone.
If you want to change the start tube for a zone in the Fraction Collector
list box, do one of the following.
• Click on the zone:tube item in the list box so it appears in the Fraction
Collection text box. Replace the tube number with the new tube
number; do not change the zone name. Click on Change to modify
the zone:tube item in the Fraction Collection list box.
January 1998
9-9
• Click on the zone:tube item in the list box so it appears in the Fraction
Collection text box. Use the Browse button to access the Tray Editor
Browse dialog. To choose the fraction site, click within the zone, on
the tray image, so its tubes become cyan (light blue). Click on the
desired tube so it becomes red. Click on OK to return to the Resume
Run dialog. When the dialog re-appears, the selected fraction site
appears in the Fraction Collection text box. Click on Change to
modify the zone:tube item in the Fraction Collection list box.
After the run
Status of UniPoint
A run is complete once UniPoint has finished all of the steps in the
operations list (or after you have selected Stop).
The mobile phase composition and flow conditions in effect when the
run is finished remain in effect. Flow does not stop automatically after a
run! To stop flow, choose Stop All Pumps from the Run menu or its tool
If the method was set to save data and analysis reports to the fixed disk,
those data and report files can be viewed and/or printed using the
Results window; see Section 11. Stored data can also be re-analyzed
using new analysis conditions; see Section 13.
If the run was a calibration run, the internal calibration curves used to
analyze unknowns were saved to a calibration file. This file is named for
the analysis method and has the .GB? extension. See Section 12 for
information on viewing calibration plots.
9-10
January 1998
programmed run
Shutting down the HPLC system
Shutdown methods are control method files that include conditions that
you want in effect after each run. A shutdown method might reduce the
flow rate to zero and extinguish the lamp on a detector. You create
shutdown methods as you would any other control method.
To automatically shut down your HPLC system at the end of a run,
specify the name of the shutdown control method as the last step in the
operations list.
If your operations list does not automatically execute a shutdown method,
Gilson recommends the following shutdown procedure:
2 In the Time box, specify the ramp time over which to achieve the
desired shutdown conditions.
3 In the Flow and % boxes, specify shutdown conditions appropriate to
your column.
4 Choose Begin.
5 After achieving the desired composition and flow rate, turn off the
pumps and mixer.
Note: When pumping salt solutions, leave the pump running at a
very slow flow rate (0.05 ml/min) to avoid precipitating salt
crystal deposits that might scratch the pump head’s piston.
If the system will remain unused for a long time, rinse the salt
solutions from the pump heads with HPLC-grade water before
shutdown.
6 Choose Done to exit the Manual Mobile Phase Control dialog.
Viewing log file
To display the log file produced during a run:
1 Choose Open from the File menu.
2 Locate and choose the name of the log file. It is stored in the data/
report output directory created for the run and has the extension .GLG.
3 Choose OK. The file appears in a text editor box. You can add your
own comments, change the font, and print the log file. See page 5-34
for more information on using a text editor.
January 1998
9-11
10
Manual HPLC System Control
In addition to timed runs, UniPoint also provides manual control over
HPLC system components. Manual control is useful for getting the
system up and running, for method development, and for checking
HPLC system operation before a run.
Note: Before running your system in manual mode, be sure that the
devices in the HPLC system are turned on and the appropriate
connections are made as described in the UniPoint System
Installation Guide.
Manual control is available from the Manual menu of an Operations
window. The first command in the menu stops all pumps. The middle
group of commands displays dialog boxes for issuing instructions to
system components. The last command is for checking or selecting the
manual control method.
When a manual mode command is issued, the system responds immediately. There are no timed event schedules in manual mode, but you can
instruct the pumps to achieve a specific flow over time.
Note: A protocol file cannot be run at the same time as other types of
manual control.
When you open or create an Operations window, UniPoint searches for
and tries to start a Method Executor for programmed and manual
control of the HPLC system. You see the System Status message in the
status box of the Operations window if a Method Executor is available.
January 1998
10-1
Manual control method
For manual control to occur, UniPoint needs the system configuration
and device description information set in a control method. By default,
the software uses the control method in the first step of the operations
list. If no steps have been set, it recalls the name of the last control
method saved to disk.
Use the following procedures to see which method is used for manual
control and change that method if necessary.
1 Choose Control Method from the Manual menu.
2 Review the name of the control method listed in the File Name box.
This is the method used for manual operation.
3 Do one of the following:
• Click on Cancel if the control method listed is appropriate.
• Or, use the options in the dialog box to select a different control
method and click on OK.
modifying the control
method
During manual control, you may realize that a device or one of its
resources, such as an output contact or data channel, has not been
assigned a description. You can modify the manual control method and
reflect these changes in the Operations window.
1 Open the document window for the control method.
2 Make the necessary changes using the Device menu.
3 Save and close the control method.
4 Reselect the method using the Control Method command in the
Manual menu of the Operations window. UniPoint reads the
information in the updated control method so it can be used for
manual control.
10-2
January 1998
manual HPLC system control
Control of mobile phase pumps and
manometric module
In the Mobile Phase Control dialog, you can zero the manometric
module and instruct Gilson pumps to achieve a desired mobile phase
composition and flow rate over a specified time. To display this dialog
box:
Note: If you are using UniPoint with SF Pressure Control (ordered
separately), you will also see a text box for setting the Pressure for
the 821 Pressure Regulator. Pressure is the pressure to achieve at
the column outlet. Values between 0 and 40 MPa (400 bar or
8700 psi) are valid.
zeroing the manometric
module
Caution: Before zeroing the manometric module, there must be no pressure
on the HPLC system. Check that the pumps are not pumping and
the prime/purge valve is open before following these procedures.
To zero the manometric module:
1 Click on the Zero Mano. Module button.
2 When the caution box appears, once again ensure there is no
pressure on the HPLC system.
3 Click on OK to zero the manometric module and return to the Mobile
Phase Control box.
Or, click on Cancel to return to the Mobile Phase Control box without
zeroing the manometric module.
January 1998
10-3
controlling the pumps
To control the pumps:
1 In the Time box, type the amount of time to ramp from the current
flow and composition conditions to the desired conditions.
The limit of resolution is 0.01 min. Press BACKSPACE to correct typing
errors.
For immediate results, type 0 min. Use this with caution — column
shock can result from drastic shifts in composition or flow.
2 In the Flow box, type the desired flow rate. You can set a flow
resolution of 0.001 times the maximum flow of the pump head. At or
below 10% of the maximum flow, settable resolution is 0.0001 times
the maximum flow.
3 In the mobile phase composition box for each pump except the first
one, type the desired percent composition from that pump.
4 After specifying all parameters, click on one of the command buttons.
The labels of the some of the buttons change once the button is
selected. For example, when you click on Begin, it changes to End.
Begin/End. Choose Begin to ramp the pumps from the existing flow
and composition conditions to the new conditions you just set.
Choose End to stop ramping to new conditions. Mobile phase
continues to flow at the flow rate and composition in effect when you
chose End. To ramp again to new conditions, choose Begin.
Hold/Resume. Choose Hold to temporarily stop the ramping of the
pumps to new conditions. Mobile phase continues to flow at the flow
rate and composition in effect when you chose Hold.
To continue ramping after a “hold” state has been entered, choose
Resume.
Stop Flow. Choose Stop Flow to stop the pumps. Mobile phase does
not continue to flow. To restart flow, click on Begin.
Unlock/Lock. Choose Unlock to return control of the pumps to their
front panels. The front panel settings on the pumps immediately
become active.
To restore control to UniPoint, choose Lock.
5 Choose Done to remove the Mobile Phase Control dialog from the
screen. When you close this dialog box, the conditions indicated
remain in effect.
10-4
January 1998
Strip chart control
The Manual Strip Chart dialog allows you to set scaling options for and
to start and stop data collection. You can view a strip chart for one, two,
or several data channels in the graph pane of the Operations window.
1 Choose Strip Chart from the Manual menu.
2 Review and if necessary modify the options in the dialog box. The
default conditions are those set in the manual control method.
The data rate, strip chart speed, and auto-range options pertain to
data collection for all channels. The other options in the dialog relate
to the data channel whose description is currently highlighted in the
list box.
Channel. Select the channel to set or modify its display, offset, or
minimum and maximum signal axis options.
Display. Remove the X from the check box if you do not want to see
the channel once data collection is initiated using the Start command
button.
% Offset. Use this parameter to move the channel’s trace away from
the horizontal (time) axis and from other channel traces. Express the
offset as a percent displacement from the horizontal axis (0%). The
default value is 0% offset.
Min (mVolt) and Max (mVolt). Set the lower and upper limits for the
signal axis. Be aware of the following:
• If the Auto Range check box is selected the software disregards
these values and uses the minimum and maximum heights for all
channels to determine the signal axis.
and maximum values for each channel being collected, the
software uses the lowest and highest values entered to determine
the signal axis. For example, if 0 and 10 mV were entered for the
minimum and maximum values for the 254 nm channel and 0 and
100 mV were entered for the 280 nm channel, the signal axis
would be 0 to 100 mV.
January 1998
10-5
Auto Range. If this check box is selected, UniPoint automatically
scales incoming data to its minimum and maximum on the on-screen
strip chart.
Data Rate. The number of data points collected per second for all
channels. The maximum value is 80 points per second.
Display Time. Identifies the time period to display on the X axis of the
strip chart.
3 To begin viewing data from the channels, choose Start. The traces for
the channels appear in the graph pane of the Operations window.
The legend identifies the channels.
4 To get a better view of the data in the graph pane, choose Done to
remove the Manual Strip Chart dialog from the screen.
Data collection continues until you choose Stop in the Manual Strip
Chart dialog or close the Operations window. When data collection is
halted, a dialog box appears that enables you to print or save the
collected data.
If you select to save the strip chart, it is stored to the output directory
identified in the Run File Storage dialog. UniPoint assigns the file
name STRIP??M.GDT where ?? is a number (01-99) that is
incremented each time a manual strip chart is saved to the directory.
UniPoint also assigns the description Manual to the sample.
If you select to print the strip chart, you see an Operations Strip Chart
Print dialog. This dialog identifies the connected printer and enables
you to indicate strip chart speed (mm/min) and set printer options.
10-6
January 1998
Contact control
The I/O Contact Control dialog offers control over output contacts. You
can open, close, or pulse output contacts.
Before opening the I/O Contact Control dialog, you can check the state
of an output contact by referring to the status box.
1 Choose Contacts from the Manual menu.
2 To change the state of or pulse a contact, click on its name in the list
box. Then choose Open, Close, or Pulse.
3 Choose Done to remove the I/O Contact Control dialog from the
screen. When you close this box, each output contact remains in its
current state.
January 1998
10-7
Control of injector, detector, collector, computer, and other devices
During manual control, you can send instructions to the injector,
detector, fraction collector, and any other Gilson device that has been set
in the configuration file of the manual control method.
To issue a command to one of these devices:
1 Choose the device name from the Manual menu. The Generic
command enables you to issue commands for devices not included
under one of the other commands, such as for the 817 Valve Actuator.
2 Use the areas in the dialog to select the command to issue and choose
the Send command.
3 When finished issuing commands, choose Done.
10-8
January 1998
GSIOC command strings
Each device has a set of commands that it understands. Most, but not
all, of these commands have been provided in the dialog boxes accessed
from the Manual menu. If there is another feature that you would like to
perform with a device, refer to its User’s Guide. A complete list of available GSIOC commands is listed there.
To issue a command string to a device:
1 Choose Generic from the Manual menu.
2 If necessary, choose the Custom> button when the Generic Device
Control dialog appears. If the Custom> button is already active, its
label becomes List>. Therefore, if you see a List> button, proceed to
the next step because the options necessary for sending a GSIOC
command string are already shown.
3 Type the command string in the Command box.
4 Using the options buttons, choose the type of command. The
documentation for the GSIOC command tells what type of command
it is.
5 Monitor the unit’s response to your command in the Response area.
6 Choose Done to remove the dialog box from the screen.
January 1998
10-9
11 Results
The Results window enables you to view chromatogram plots and
analysis information for collected data. You can do this by opening a
data file or report file.
Note: If your system includes a 170 Diode Array Detector, refer to the
detector user's guide for information on viewing and manipulating acquired diode array data.
difference between data
and report files
From a run, UniPoint produces a file containing the channel data
collected and stored for all injected samples. This data file contains time
and signal information for each sample. No analysis amounts are
stored in a data file. Therefore when you open a data file, you do not see
analysis information unless you associate an analysis method and
optionally a calibration file with the data file. (Procedures for associating method and calibration files with a data file are in this section.)
To view results of data analysis, you select the report file generated
during a run or re-analysis processing. Along with the calculations, the
report file identifies the data file, analysis method, and, if applicable,
calibration file used to generate amounts.
January 1998
11-1
Results window
The following illustrations show the components of the Results window
that can be displayed for a data file and a report file.
menu bar
toolbar
annotation
box
summary
graph
graph
pane
Results window for data file
table pane
legend box
status bar
Results window for report file
11-2
January 1998
results
menu bar
items on the menu bar. Some menu items are not available if a report file is
open.
Menu
File
Edit
View
Linking
Analysis
Comparisons
Table
Graph
Window
Help
table pane
Description
Transfer information.
Select sample data or report and associated tray file(s) to view.
Associate method and calibration files with displayed data.
Modify integration, peak, and data channel parameters.
Generate new trace by subtracting or dividing two traces or
removing baseline shift from a trace.
Re-arrange windows or icons, or activate a window;
display file annotation or toolbar.
Shows information for integrated peaks. If no information is shown in
the table for a report, no peaks were integrated.
The columns in the table depend on the report type and format specified
in the analysis method used to produce the report file or linked to the
data file.
Note: As you can see in the example data file window above, you do
not see the table pane if you have not linked to an analysis
method.
For external standard, internal standard or percent normalization
reports, note the following when looking at amounts:
• If a linear regression or point to point curve fit was used to determine
amounts for an unknown sample, the software lists amounts for
areas (or heights) that are up to 10% above the highest level amounts
on the calibration curve. Beyond that, it lists ** high ** for the amount.
• If a quadratic or cubic curve fit was used, the software lists ** high **
or ** low ** for areas (or heights) that are above or below the highest
and lowest level amounts on the calibration curve.
• If the calibration curve was invalid or the amount was calculated as a
negative value, the software lists ** error ** for the amount associated
with a peak.
• If an integrated peak was not named in the analysis method's peak
table, the software lists 0.00 for its amount(s).
• If you are viewing a data file and a calibration table has not been
linked, you see ** N/A ** for amounts, indicating they are not available.
January 1998
11-3
graph pane
Shows the chromatogram plot for collected traces plus run-time events
and peak names, if data file is linked to an analysis method or report file
is displayed. (For a description of run-time symbols and lines, see page
5-27.)
legend box
Identifies the traces shown in the graph. If there is a > in front of a
description, that trace’s peak information is reported in the table pane.
By double-clicking on the legend, you can access the Attributes dialog to
change how traces appear and remove traces, run-time events, and peak
names from display. See page 5-26.
summary graph
Shows the complete chromatogram plot for the selected traces.
toolbar
Allows for manipulating the appearance of the chromatogram plot plus
provides quick access to file maintenance and selection options. To
activate the tool, just click on its icon.
11-4
navigator tool
Displays Navigator.
open tool
save tool
Displays Save Report dialog. (Not available
if report file is open or if data file is not
linked to an analysis method.)
print tool
arrow tool
Turns off magnifying glass, move trace, and
cross-hairs tools.
For enlarging area of graph.
cross-hairs tool
For identifying mV (or user units) and time
values for point on trace.
move trace tool
For moving trace(s) to different location in
graph.
adjust baseline tool
For modifying the baseline beneath a peak.
(Not available if report file is open or if data
file is not linked to an analysis method.)
full-scale tool
maximum values for displayed trace(s).
January 1998
results
original view tool
Returns graph to the settings shown when
the window was first opened, or if a data file
is linked to an analysis method to the
settings in the method.
integration tool
Displays the Integration Events dialog.
peak table tool
Displays the Peak Table dialog.
analysis channel tool
Displays the Analysis Channel dialog.
spectral library tool
Displays the Spectral Library Entry dialog.
annotation box
Lists information for the displayed data or report. To turn off/on the
annotation, choose its command from the Window menu.
status bar
Displays help message if a menu command is highlighted. Displays mV
(or user units) and time values for point on trace if cross-hairs tool is
being used.
January 1998
11-5
Opening report and data files
To view results from a chromatographic run, you can choose a report file
to view both trace and analysis information or a data file to view traces.
Both file types display the Results window.
Selecting report file information to view
To select a report file to view:
1 From the File menu, choose Open. Or, use the Navigator to click on
the Results option and then click on Open.
2 When the Open dialog appears, type or select a report file. If the file
is not listed in the File Name box, do one or more of the following:
When you select a report file, additional options appear in the
Open dialog.
3 When the desired report file is shown in the File Name box, do one of
the following:
• Click on OK to view report information for the first sample and
then view report and summary report information for all other
samples.
• Or, highlight the description of a sample or summary report in the
Report list box and then click on OK. This enables you to initially
display report information for a sample other than the first
injection.
The Results window appears, displaying the report information and
chromatogram plot for the selected sample. The traces are scaled to
the settings specified in the analysis method.
11-6
January 1998
results
The title bar identifies the name of the report file and the injection
number of the sample whose information is shown. If multiple
traces were collected for the sample, the table pane contains
information for the analysis channel selected in the analysis
method.
Note: If the data file associated with a report file was deleted, only
the report information appears; no chromatogram plot is
shown.
4 To view the report for another sample, choose Samples from the
View menu. In the list box, double-click on the description. It may
take a few seconds for the report's information to display in the
Results window.
You can keep the Report dialog on-screen and browse through
each report by selecting its name and then choosing View. To move
the Reports dialog, click on its title bar and drag it to a new
location.
To size the Report dialog, position the mouse pointer at the side or
corner of the box. Click and drag the box to the desired size.
Choose Done to remove the Reports box.
5 If injector and/or fraction collector tray information is available for
the report file, use the commands in the View menu to display the
tray files. The Display All command automatically sizes and shows
the Results window, Samples dialog, injector tray (if available), and
fraction collector tray (if available).
Refer to Appendix B for more information on setting pre-run
parameters so you can view injector and fraction collector tray
information after the run.
January 1998
11-7
Selecting data file information to view
You can select samples from one or more data files and view their data
in the Results window.
Note: If an analysis method is open, UniPoint uses the conditions in
that method to try to integrate peaks. If you do not want analysis
to occur, close the method before opening the data file.
If you have multiple analysis methods open, you see the Analysis Method Link dialog and then you can select the method to
use.
2 When the Open dialog appears, type or select a data file. If the file is
not listed in the File Name box, do one or more of the following:
3 Refer to the side bars below depending on what you want to view.
step through traces collected
for each injected sample
To view the data collected for the first injected sample and
then view data collected for any additional injections:
1 When the desired data file is shown in the File Name box, do one of
the following:
• Click on OK to see the trace(s) for the first sample.
• Or, highlight the description of a different sample in the list box
and then click on OK. This enables you to initially display the
trace(s) for a sample other than the first injection.
11-8
January 1998
results
The Results window appears, displaying the trace(s) for the first
sample or the selected sample. The traces are displayed at full scale.
The title bar identifies the name of the data file and the injection
number of the sample whose information is shown.
2 To view the trace(s) for another sample, choose Samples from the View
menu. In the list box, double-click on the sample description. It may
take a few seconds before the sample information is displayed.
You can keep the list box on-screen and browse through each sample
by selecting its name and then choosing View. To move the Samples
dialog, click on its title bar and drag it to a new location.
Using the Samples dialog, you can also select a sample and add its
trace(s) to the chromatogram plot in the graph pane. To do this, press
the CTRL key then double-click on the sample's description. The
chromatogram plot updates to show the additional trace(s) and realtime events for the selected sample. The title bar does not update.
To size the Samples dialog, position the mouse pointer at the side or
Choose Done to remove the Samples dialog.
3 If injector and/or fraction collector tray information is available for the
data file, use the commands in the View menu to display the tray files.
The Display All command automatically sizes and shows the Results
window, Samples dialog, injector tray (if available), and fraction
collector tray (if available).
Refer to Appendix B for more information on setting pre-run
parameters so you can view injector and fraction collector tray
information after the run.
4 To analyze displayed data and see report information, link to an
analysis method. See page 11-16 for details.
view each trace in
its own window
To view each trace collected for a sample in its own document window:
1 When the desired data file is shown in the File Name box of the Open
dialog, choose the sample(s) in the Sample list box. To select multiple
samples, hold down the CTRL key while clicking on each sample name.
2 Choose the data channel(s) for the trace(s) to display.
January 1998
11-9
3 Choose the Add button to insert the sample and channel
combinations into the bottom-most list box.
4 Continue adding information to the bottom-most list box. You can
select samples from another file by choosing a different data file in
the File Name box.
5 Choose OK when you are done selecting samples.
A Results window appears for each of the selected traces. The traces
are displayed at full scale.
6 Use the commands in the Window menu to re-arrange the document
windows. Also use the Window menu to make a window active.
11-10
January 1998
results
compare traces for different
samples in the same window
You can view traces collected for different samples in the same docu
ment window by doing the following:
1 When the desired data file is shown in the File Name box of the Open
dialog, choose the sample(s) in the Sample list box. To select multiple
samples, hold down the CTRL key while clicking on each sample
name.
2 Choose the data channel(s) of the trace(s) to display.
3 Choose the Add button to insert the sample and channel
combination(s) into the bottom list box. Up to 8 trace(s) can be
compared at one time.
4 Continue adding information to the bottom list box. To view sample
information from a different data file, type or select the name of the
data file so it appears in the File Name box. Then use the Sample and
Channel list boxes.
5 Choose the Compare check box.
6 Choose OK. The Results window appears and displays full-scale
trace(s) for the selected samples. And, the title bar displays
COMPARE.
January 1998
11-11
Locating and opening a data file using sample description
UniPoint can search for a string of text that appears in the sample
description located in one or more data files. If the software finds the
text string, it lists the complete path for the file. You can then choose to
open the file and view the data collected for the sample.
To search for a sample description:
1 From the File menu, choose Sample Search. The Sample Search
dialog appears.
2 In the Sample Search Pattern box, type the string of text to find.
3 Use the Start Directory and Drives boxes to specify the path of the
data files to search. The software searches all data files located in the
path, including all subdirectories, listed above the Start Directory list
box.
4 To further pinpoint the search:
• Select the Match Whole Word Only check box to find occurrences
of the text that are complete words and not part of larger words.
• Select the Match Case check box to find occurrences of the search
text that appear in the same upper and lower case combination
indicated in the Sample Search Pattern box.
5 Choose Search.
6 To print a listing of the files whose sample descriptions include the
search text, choose Print when the search completes.
11-12
January 1998
results
7 To view information associated with a sample description, choose it
in the Matching Samples/Files list box. The Selected Sample
Information area shows annotation information for the selected
sample.
To view the chromatogram plot for the sample, choose Open to
display the Results window.
8 To remove the Sample Search dialog from display, choose Done.
January 1998
11-13
Overlaying (or merging) additional chromatogram data
If a data file is open, you can select sample information from the same
data file or another data file, and view it along with the trace(s) already
displayed. (You cannot overlay or merge data into a report file.)
overlaying data from the
same file
Using the Samples dialog, you can also select a sample and add its
trace(s) to the chromatogram plot in the graph pane.
1 Choose Samples from the Edit menu.
2 When the Samples dialog appears, press the CTRL key then doubleclick on the sample's description in the list box. The chromatogram
plot updates to show the additional trace(s) and real-time events for
the selected sample. The title bar does not update.
3 To close the dialog box, double-click on its control-menu box.
overlaying data from a
different file
To display sample data from a different file:
1 If multiple Results windows are displayed, choose the appropriate
window by clicking on its title bar.
2 Choose Merge from the File menu.
3 Use the dialog to select a data file, the sample, and its trace(s). Then
choose Add to insert its information into the list box.
4 Choose OK. The information is shown in the selected Results
window (see next page).
11-14
January 1998
results
Before Overlaying Trace(s)
After Overlaying Trace(s)
removing overlaid trace(s)
To remove one or more overlaid traces from the graph:
1 Choose Remove Trace from the Graph menu.
2 When the Trace Removal dialog appears, choose the description for
the trace in the list box and then choose Remove.
3 Choose Done to exit the dialog.
January 1998
11-15
Analyzing data or analyzing it in a different way
The Results window enables you to link displayed data with an analysis method or a calibration plot so the data can be analyzed using new
conditions. It also lets you modify analysis parameters so you can see
how the changes affect the integration of peaks. You can then store the
outcome of the analysis to a report file.
Linking to an analysis method
If you opened a data file and want to integrate peaks, you need to link to
an analysis method file.
1 Choose Analysis Method from the Linking menu.
2 Select the name of the method in the list box. If the method’s name is
not displayed:
a) Choose Browse.
b) When the Browse dialog appears, locate the method and choose
OK.
c) When the Analysis Method Link dialog appears again, select the
method in the list box and choose OK.
The software opens the document window for the method and puts
its icon at the bottom of the window. Plus, the software uses the
conditions in the method to scale the chromatogram plot and to
generate new reporting information. If a calibration report type is
indicated in the method but a pre-loaded calibration file is not, you
need to link to a calibration table to see amounts for unknown
samples, described on next page.
In the legend, the trace with a > sign in front of its description is the
one reported in the table pane. If an additional trace can be analyzed
using the conditions in the linked method, choose the Analysis
Channel command in the Analysis menu. The table pane reports
areas (or heights) for the channel. If report information cannot be
generated, the table pane is blank.
11-16
January 1998
results
3 If necessary, use the commands in the Analysis menu to modify
analysis parameters. You can:
• change the peak table. See page 7-13.
• change integration events. See page 7-5.
• change channel scaling parameters. See page 7-10.
If you made any changes to method conditions, you are prompted to
save them when you close the Results window.
4 To save report information for the displayed information, chose Save
Report from the File menu. (See Generating new report on page 1131 for information on using the dialog box.)
Before Method Link
After Method Link
January 1998
11-17
Linking to a calibration file
To report amounts for unknown samples, you can link to a calibration
file previously generated during a run or re-analysis processing.
Before linking to a calibration file, you must link to an analysis method,
as described above.
1 Choose Calibration from the Linking menu.
2 Select the name of the calibration in the list box. If the calibration
file’s name is not displayed:
a) Choose Browse.
b) When the Browse dialog appears, locate the file name and choose
OK.
c) When the Calibration Link dialog appears again, select the
The software opens the document window for the calibration file and
puts its icon at the bottom of the window. Plus, the software uses the
calibration curve to generate amounts for unknown samples and
displays that information in the table pane when an unknown
sample is shown in the graph pane.
3 To save report information for the displayed information, chose Save
Report from the File menu.
11-18
January 1998
results
Before Calibration Link
After Calibration Link
January 1998
11-19
Linking to a control method
To view the method conditions used to collect sample data, you can link
to the control method.
1 Choose Control Method from the Linking menu.
2 Select the name of the method in the list box. If the method’s name is
not displayed:
a) Choose Browse.
b) When the Browse dialog appears, locate the method and choose
OK.
c) When the Control Method Link dialog appears again, select the
The software opens the document window for the method and puts
its icon at the bottom of the window. And, the graph pane in the
Results window is updated to display the events set in the method.
You also see an additional Y axis that helps identify mobile phase
percentage.
Since the legend automatically sizes itself to display its information,
the legend may block the chromatogram plot so it cannot be viewed.
Choose Legend in the Graph menu to remove it, or drag the legend to
a new location.
3 Notice that the beginning of the trace(s) is adjusted to reflect the start
of data collection set in the control method.
4 To identify symbols and lines shown in the graph, choose Attributes
from the Graph menu. Or double-click on an item in the legend.
Note: The symbols and lines used for run-time events (such as
detector autozero) are not identified in the legend. See page 527 for a description of those symbols and lines.
11-20
January 1998
results
Before Method Link
After Method Link
January 1998
11-21
Manipulating graph and table
Viewing and scaling techniques in graph pane
The following procedures are applicable whether you are viewing a
report file or data file.
finding peak information
To determine retention time and voltage information:
).
2 Move the mouse pointer to the peak of interest. In the information
line at the bottom of the window, you see:
• retention time
• mV height (or specified user-defined units)
• peak name, if the data has been linked to an analysis method or if
you are viewing a report file
If you are looking at a test chromatogram, this is a convenient way to
determine the retention time of a peak.
zooming
).
To enlarge an area of the graph:
1 Click on the magnifying glass tool (
).
2 Place the mouse pointer to one side of the region of interest in either
the graph or summary graph, if displayed.
3 Click and hold the left mouse button.
4 Drag the mouse to draw a box around the desired peaks. Release the
mouse button. The region of interest now fills the graph, while the
summary graph, if displayed, shows the plot of the entire data set. A
box within the summary graph identifies the region that was
enlarged.
11-22
January 1998
results
5 To display the entire chromatogram plot, click on the full-scale tool
( ).
moving plot along X axis
To move the plot along the X axis:
1 Zoom on part of the plot.
2 Use the scroll bar that appears along the bottom of the plot. To
examine peaks with longer retention times, move the scroll box to the
right. To examine peaks with shorter retention times, move the box to
the left.
moving traces within
plot
You can move one or more of the trace(s). This option can be used to
offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful
when subtracting or dividing chromatograms since you can adjust for
varying retention times by aligning peaks in chromatograms.
1 Click on the move trace tool (
).
2 In the legend, click on the description of each trace to move. The
associated trace line in the chromatogram plot becomes highlighted.
3 Move the mouse pointer into the graph pane.
January 1998
11-23
4 Click and hold down the mouse button to move the trace to the
desired location. By holding down the CTRL key while moving the
trace, the trace only moves vertically. By holding down the SHIFT key,
the trace can only be moved horizontally.
5 To remove the highlight from each selected trace, click on its
description in the legend.
scaling peaks to a
desired height
) to turn off the move trace tool (
).
To scale peaks to the same height, do either of the following:
• Zoom using the Y axis as a reference for the beginning and ending of
the expansion box. When you release the mouse button, all peaks are
scaled to that height.
• Display the Signal Axis dialog by choosing its command from the
Graph menu or by clicking the right mouse button while the mouse
pointer is on the Y axis in the graph. When the dialog appears,
indicate the scaling values in the Minimum and Maximum boxes.
Then choose OK.
displaying time period of
interest
To display the traces within a certain time period, do either of the
following:
• Zoom using the X axis as a reference for the beginning and ending of
the expansion box. When you release the mouse button, only information within the selected time frame is shown in the graph.
• Display the Time Axis dialog by choosing its command from the
Graph menu or by clicking the right mouse button while the mouse
pointer is on the X axis in the graph. When the dialog appears,
indicate the time period using the Minimum and Maximum boxes.
Then choose OK.
11-24
January 1998
results
displaying trace(s) at
full scale settings
To return to a full-scale display along the X and Y axis:
1 Choose the full-scale tool ( ) from the toolbar. If you moved any
traces, they are returned to their original locations.
offsetting traces
To have UniPoint offset traces in the plot:
1 Optionally, remove the display of any real-time events because they
are not offset along with the traces. Use the Attributes command in
the Graph menu.
2 Click on the move trace tool (
).
3 Move the mouse pointer into the graph pane. The mouse pointer
resembles the move trace tool.
4 Click the right mouse button to reveal the pop-up menu, shown at the
left. Then using the left mouse button, click on Stagger Traces.
The mouse pointer changes to the following shape:
5 Using the left mouse button, click then drag the mouse pointer to
draw the offset line (refer to the left-hand diagram below). This line
identifies the angle at which each of the traces will be offset from the
other. The starting point of the line is where the start of the first trace
is positioned. The ending point of the line is where the start of the
last trace is positioned. Each additional trace is evenly spaced
between the first and last trace.
When you release the mouse button, UniPoint staggers the traces
(refer to the right-hand diagram below).
6 To “unstagger” the traces, re-display the pop-up menu and click on
Remove Shifts.
removing/replacing traces
and symbols from display
January 1998
To remove one or more traces or symbols:
1 Double-click on an item in the legend. Or, choose Attributes from the
Graph menu.
11-25
2 When the Attributes dialog appears, choose the description for the
item to remove from the Legend list box.
3 Remove the X from the Display/Symbol check box.
remove the X from the Display Event check box. (For a description of
run-time event symbols/lines, see page 5-27.)
7 Choose OK.
To re-display an item, follow the instructions above but insert the X in
the Display check box.
1 In the Graph menu of the document window, choose the Signal Axis
(for the Y axis) or Time Axis (for the X axis) command.
returning to original view
To return the graph display to its “original appearance:”
1 Choose Original View from the Graph menu or its tool ( ) from the
toolbar. If you are viewing a report file or a data file that is not
linked to an analysis method, the graph returns to its appearance
when the file was first opened. If you turned off any traces or
modified the colors of traces, they are returned to their previous
settings.
If you are viewing a data file that is linked to an analysis method,
the software uses the settings in the method to display the
information in the graph.
11-26
January 1998
results
Peak integration techniques
When you have a data file open and have linked to an analysis method,
you can modify peak information for the analysis channel. To store the
results for future review, see Generating a report file on page 11-31.
The following procedures are not available if you are viewing a report file.
checking/changing
analysis channel
To quickly determine which trace is reported in the table pane, look at
the legend. The trace with a > sign before its description is the analysis
channel.
If an additional trace can be analyzed using the conditions in the linked
analysis method, choose the Analysis Channel command in the Analysis
menu. The table pane reports peak information for the data channel. If
report information cannot be generated, the table pane is blank.
adjusting baseline
To adjust the baseline beneath a peak:
1 Zoom on the peak, if necessary.
end points (down triangle) appear on the baseline under each
integrated peak.
3 Click and drag the begin or end point for the peak’s baseline. Peak
information in the table pane automatically updates.
4 Click on the arrow tool ( ) to remove peak begin and end points
from display in the chromatogram plot.
January 1998
11-27
integrating peak
To integrate a peak:
integrated peak.
3 Move the mouse pointer to the peak to integrate. Using the right
mouse button, click on the peak. When the menu appears, choose
Insert Baseline.
4 Move the mouse pointer to the begin point for the peak.
5 Click and drag the mouse pointer below the peak to draw its baseline.
Release the mouse button to set the end point for the peak.
To name the peak in the peak table, see changing peak table, on the
next page.
removing peak integration
To inhibit integration of a peak:
integrated peak.
3 Move the mouse pointer to the peak. Click on the right mouse button.
When the menu appears, choose Delete Baseline.
4 Click on the begin or end point of the baseline to remove.
11-28
January 1998
results
reverting to method
baselines
If you made modifications to baselines and want to return to
conditions as set in the linked analysis method.
1 Click on the adjust baseline tool (
).
2 Move the mouse pointer onto the chromatogram plot.
3 Click on the right mouse button. When the menu appears, choose
Reset Baselines.
changing peak table
To modify the peak table:
2 Use the dialog as described on page 7-13.
Shortcut. To quickly specify the name and retention time for a peak, do
the following:
1 Choose the cross-hairs tool (
).
2 Move it to the peak.
4 When the dialog appears, check and if necessary modify the retention
time and type the name of the peak. (The software puts a default
peak name in the text box, for example, Peak 2.)
5 Choose OK.
6 Repeat steps 2 - 5 for each peak.
January 1998
11-29
changing integration events
To modify integration events:
1 Choose Integration Events from the Analysis menu.
changing channel scaling
To modify channel scales set in the linked analysis method:
1 Choose Data Channels from the Analysis menu.
11-30
January 1998
results
Generating new report file
When you link a data file to an analysis method, and if appropriate, a
calibration file, you can store the results for the currently displayed trace(s)
to a report file.
1 Choose Report Save from the File menu.
2 Indicate information in the dialog box. And, choose OK.
3 To include information for another sample in the report file:
a) Display the next sample using the Samples command in the Edit
menu.
b) Display the Report Save As dialog. The name of the report file
automatically displays.
c) Make sure the Append check box is selected.
d) Choose OK.
4 Repeat step 3 for each additional sample whose information is
included in the file.
January 1998
11-31
Comparison commands
Using the commands in the Comparisons menu, you can perform
mathematical calculations on one or two traces to produce another trace.
(This menu is not available if report file information is displayed in the
Results window.)
subtracting two traces
You can generate a chromatogram that represents the subtraction of the
heights of two chromatograms. This option can be used for subtracting
a background chromatogram from a chromatogram.
1 Choose Subtract from the Comparisons menu.
2 In the Channel 1 list box, choose the name of the trace from which
data is subtracted.
3 In the Channel 2 list box, choose the name of the trace whose data is
subtracted.
4 Choose OK.
The resulting comparison trace appears in the chromatogram plot.
The legend identifies the trace.
5 To save the comparison, create a report file for the information
displayed in the window. See page 11-31.
dividing two traces
You can generate a trace that represents the ratio of the heights of two
chromatograms. The ratio scale is logarithmic.
UniPoint uses each peak’s baseline as the threshold value dividing the
traces. (That is why you must link to an analysis method before this
command becomes available.) UniPoint begins the calculation for the
ratio 10% above the baseline.
You can use the ratio feature to check peak purity. Since many variables
affect the ratio, it is recommended that you refer to sources such as the
following articles if you are going to use the Ratio command.
11-32
January 1998
results
R. N. Yost, J. Stoveken, and W. Maclean. “Positive peak identification
in liquid chromatography using absorbance ratioing with a variablewavelength spectrophotometric detector.” Journal of Chromatographic
Science, 134: 73-82 (1977).
Paul A. Webb, Dean Ball, and Tony Thornton. “Real-time absorbance
ratio and absorbance difference measurements using dual-wavelength HPLC detectors.” Journal of Chromatographic Science, 21: 447453 (1983).
Haiyung Cheng and R. Rao Gadde. “Absorbance ratio plots in high
performance liquid chromatography.” Journal of Chromatographic
Science, 23: 227-230 (1985).
To display a ratio chromatogram:
1 Choose Ratio from the Comparisons menu.
in the numerator.
in the denominator.
4 Choose OK.
The legend identifies the trace.
5 To save the comparison, create a report file for the information
displayed in the window. See page 11-31.
January 1998
11-33
removing shift from a trace
Using the Shift Removal option, you can generate a new trace that
represents a reduction of a trace’s non-peak heights to zero. Any nonintegrated peaks are also reduced to zero. Since the resulting trace has
no baseline artifacts, peaks are more defined.
The Shift Removal option performs the same function as subtracting a
baseline trace from another trace.
1 Choose Shift Removal from the Comparisons menu.
2 Choose the name of the trace in the Channel list box.
3 Choose OK.
normalizing traces
Using the Normalize All command in the Comparisons menu, you can
display traces on the same scale. When the traces are normalized, there
is a maximum amplitude of 1000 units between the lowest and highest
signal points.
To turn off normalization, choose Original View from the Graph menu
or its tool ( ) from the toolbar.
11-34
January 1998
12
Calibrations
Calibration plots are generated during an HPLC run or a batch reanalysis of calibrator samples.
To view calibration plots, you use the Calibration window. Using the
options in the window, you can modify the appearance of a plot and
save it to a new file name. Once saved, its name can be entered into an
analysis method and used as a pre-stored calibration for future runs and
re-analyses. Or, you can link to the calibration file while viewing a data
file in the Results window and display peak amounts.
January 1998
12-1
Calibration window
The following illustration shows the Calibration window.
menu bar
toolbar
table pane
annotation box
graph pane
legend
box
status bar
menu bar
Menu
File
Edit
View
Curve Fit
Table
Graph
Window
Help
table pane
Description
Transfer information.
Select standard peak or calibration table to view.
Select type of curve to display.
The table is the summary report generated for the displayed calibration
curve. This report includes the statistical data used to produce the
calibration curve for the peak. It also indicates if calibration data has
been removed or is absent for a calibration level.
If you ran a single level calibration, a response factor is the only thing
listed in the table. The response factor is the amount at the calibration
level divided by the area. The resulting ratio is multiplied by the area of
an unknown to determine the amount listed in the unknown's report.
12-2
January 1998
calibrations
graph pane
The graph pane shows the calibration plot:
X axis
Y axis
solid vertical lines
squares
red lines
toolbar
Amount
Area (or height)
Level amounts entered into the peak table for
the peak
Peak area (or height) for a repeat
Thicker red line is the mean, thinner red lines
identify standard deviations from the mean
Allows for manipulating the appearance of the calibration curve plus
provides quick access to file maintenance and selection options. To
activate a tool, just click on its icon.
navigator tool
Displays Navigator.
open tool
save tool
Displays Save As dialog.
print tool
arrow tool
Turns off magnifying glass and cross-hairs
tools.
For enlarging area of graph.
cross-hairs tool
For identifying amount and area value for
point on plot.
full-scale tool
maximum values for displayed calibration
curve.
legend box
Identifies the symbols shown in the calibration table. To turn off/on the
legend, choose its command from the Graph menu.
annotation box
Lists information for each of the samples used to build the calibration
plot. It also lists statistical information for the displayed calibration
curve. To turn off/on the annotation, choose its command from the
Window menu.
status bar
January 1998
12-3
Building calibrations
To build calibrations using data collected from calibrators, use the ReAnalysis window. See Batch Re-Analysis Processing for more information. Here is a review of the steps to perform:
1 Open the re-analysis file that contains information for the calibrators.
Or, generate a new re-analysis list using the options in the ReAnalysis window.
2 Make any changes to the re-analysis steps. Each step lists
information about the sample and the analysis method(s) to use
during re-analysis processing.
If you only want to re-analyze calibrators, delete any steps for
unknown samples.
3 Execute the re-analysis.
12-4
January 1998
calibrations
Viewing calibrations
Since calibration plots are used to calculate amounts for unknown
samples, you should examine the calibration curve generated for each
standard peak. Viewing calibration plots is especially important if
quadratic or cubic was the curve fitting method used to generate them.
opening file
To open a calibration file:
1 From the File menu, choose Open. Or, use the Navigator to click on
the Calibrations option and then click on Open.
2 When the Open dialog appears, type or select a calibration file. If the
file is not listed in the File Name box, do one or more of the following:
3 If multiple calibrations were generated from a run and you want to
view a table other than the first one generated, choose the specific
table in the bottom list box.
4 Choose OK.
The Calibration window shows the summary report and calibration
plot generated for the first standard peak of the selected calibration.
If you see an error message, refer to page 12-10.
January 1998
12-5
determining area (or height)
at given point on curve
Use the cross-hairs tool to determine the area (or height) at a given point
on the curve:
calibration plot.
). Then move the mouse pointer to the
You see curve intersect lines. These lines show where an area (or
height—horizontal arrow) and its associated amount (vertical arrow)
intersect the curve. Amount and area (or height) values are shown in
the message line at the bottom of the application window.
By moving these lines, you can identify the amount calculated for an
area (or height).
2 Move the mouse pointer along the Y axis.
When you do, the curve intersect lines also move.
3 When the mouse pointer is in the desired location, refer to the area (or
height) and its associated amount displayed in the message line.
Because of screen resolution, you may not be able to position the
mouse pointer exactly at the desired area (or height).
changing curve fitting method
).
You can view a different curve fitting method for the calibration curve.
1 Choose the method from the CurveFit menu.
12-6
January 1998
calibrations
zooming
To enlarge an area of the calibration plot:
1 Click on the magnifying glass tool (
).
2 Place the mouse pointer to one side of the region of interest in the
graph.
3 Click and drag to draw a box around the region. Release the mouse
button. The region of interest now fills the graph.
4 To display the entire calibration plot, click on the full-scale tool ( ).
getting file information for a
repeat
To learn about the injected sample associated with a repeat:
1 Zoom on the repeat's square, if necessary.
2 Click on the square using the right mouse button.
3 When the menu appears, click on Info. A dialog giving information
on the repeat appears.
4 Choose OK to remove the dialog.
January 1998
12-7
disabling/restoring repeats
You remove or re-apply the value of one or more repeats from or to the
calibration calculation.
1 Zoom on the repeat's square, if necessary.
2 Click on the square using the right mouse button.
3 When the menu appears, choose Disable Point.
The calibration curve is automatically redrawn using the new mean
and deviations, and the report information is updated.
4 To remove a calibration level, disable each repeat at that level.
To enable one or more repeats:
1 Click on the repeat's square using the right mouse button.
2 When the menu appears, choose Restore Point.
3 To re-apply a calibration level, restore each repeat.
1 In the Graph menu of the document window, choose the Area/
Height Axis (for the Y axis) or Amount Axis (for the X axis)
command.
selecting another peak
To view and, if necessary, modify the calibration curve for another peak:
1 Choose Peaks from the View menu.
2 From the list box, select the peak name and choose View. (Or, doubleclick on the name.) It may take a few seconds for the calibration plot
for the peak to display.
You can keep the list box on-screen and view the calibration plot for
each additional peak in the calibration. To move the Peaks dialog,
click on the title bar and drag the dialog to the desired location.
12-8
January 1998
calibrations
To size the Peaks dialog, position the mouse pointer at the side or
3 Choose Done to remove the dialog.
selecting another calibration
If multiple calibration tables were generated for injected samples:
1 Choose Calibrations from the View menu.
2 From the list box, select the calibration description and choose View.
(Or, double-click on the description.) It may take a few seconds for
the calibration plot for the currently selected peak to display.
You can keep the list box on-screen and view the calibration plot for
the selected peak in each calibration. To move the Calibrations
dialog, click on the title bar and drag the dialog to the desired
location.
To size the Calibrations dialog, position the mouse pointer at the side
or corner of the box. Click and drag the box to the desired size.
3 Choose Done to remove the dialog.
Merging calibrations
You can merge the calibration table information stored in another file
with that for the currently open calibration file.
1 Choose Merge from the File menu.
2 Use the dialog to select a calibration file and choose OK.
The table and calibration plot for the currently selected peak updates
to incorporate the information from the merged file.
January 1998
12-9
Use the features of the Calibration window as described earlier in
this section to view calibration curves and reports for other standard
peaks.
3 To save the new calibration table for future use, choose Save As from
the File menu and indicate a new name for the file.
Error messages
If no calibration plot is drawn in the graph pane, an error message
appears in the upper left corner. That message is Peak not identified or
method is incompatible with data. If you get this message:
1 Use the Results window to view the sample data used to produce the
calibration curves. After linking to the analysis method, change the
analysis parameters until baselines are drawn beneath peaks.
2 Then use the Re-Analysis window to analyze the data again and
rebuild calibration curves for standard peak.
If all or a portion of a calibration curve is flat or contains a negative
slope, an error message appears to the left of the peak name, for example,
INVALID calibration of Phenol. If you get this message:
1 Remove one or more calibration levels from the calibration curve by
removing each repeat at those levels.
Or preferably, re-inject the calibrator samples and have the software
generate new calibration curves for standard peaks.
12-10
January 1998
13
Batch Re-Analysis Processing
The Re-Analysis window enables you to perform a post-run batch
analysis on previously acquired data. The data to analyze can be from
one or several data files.
When you execute a run, UniPoint automatically generates a re-analysis
file (.GAR) and places it in the data/report directory. The file contains a
list of the injected samples and the analysis method(s) used during the
run. You can use and if necessary modify the information in this file
before executing a batch re-analysis.
To determine if a batch re-analysis is required, refer to the reports generated at run time or view the data in the Results window and link to the
appropriate analysis method. You may decide to do a re-analysis for any
of the following reasons:
• peaks were not integrated correctly
• peaks were not named
• injections were not labeled correctly
• wrong actual and nominal amounts were entered for samples
• you want a different report type generated for samples
• you want to remove background information
• you want to analyze unknown samples using calibration curves in a
calibration file (the name of the calibration file is set in the Report Type
dialog)
The following parameters set in an analysis method affect how data are
analyzed:
• analysis events (peak width and sensitivity, baseline construction
techniques)
• analysis channel
• quantification technique (area or height)
• peak table information
• reporting parameters (you may want to turn off report print until after
the re-analysis)
• chromatogram scaling parameters
• background subtraction
Refer to Section 7 for more information on how to set analysis parameters.
Make the necessary changes to the analysis method so data is analyzed
correctly. Then perform the batch re-analysis to generate new reports.
To get ready for and start a batch re-analysis, you:
1 Open an existing re-analysis (.GAR) file. Or, create a re-analysis list
using the List Entry menu in the Re-Analysis window.
2 Make any modifications to the re-analysis file using the Edit menu or
Step Entry dialog.
3 Check that peaks are integrated by previewing the re-analysis.
4 Optionally, indicate that you want to manually adjust baselines
during processing.
5 Check where re-analysis output is stored.
6 Start processing.
January 1998
13-1
Re-Analysis window
Using the options in the Re-Analysis window, you specify information
that UniPoint uses to re-analyze data. You access this window by
creating or opening a re-analysis file.
The following illustration shows the Re-Analysis window. When you
first access the window, the graph pane may not be displayed. Choose
Show Graph from the Graph menu.
menu bar
toolbar
table pane
annotation
box
summary
window
graph pane
status box
legend box
status bar
menu bar
Menu
File
Edit
List Entry
Analyze
Table
Graph
Window
Help
table pane
Description
Set step-by-step instructions to execute during a re-analysis.
Start, stop, pause a re-analysis and indicate file naming parameters.
Lists the steps for re-analysis processing.
Double-clicking on a row for a step displays the dialog box used to set up
the step.
13-2
January 1998
batch re-analysis
Using the right mouse button, you can double-click on a step and display
the window that shows the instructions set in the analysis method. (If
multiple methods are listed, displays instructions for first method.)
Double-clicking on the top (header) row displays a dialog for manipulating
the columns shown in the table.
graph pane
During re-analysis processing or if previewing the re-analysis, shows a
chromatogram plot of the data being re-analyzed.
If previewing the re-analysis and there are multiple analysis methods
named in the re-analysis list, you see an Analysis Method box with option
buttons in it. Choose the option button for another method to see how
peaks are integrated.
legend box
During re-analysis, identifies the traces shown in the graph.
toolbar
Provides quick access to options for starting and stopping processing,
manipulating the chromatogram plot, and file maintenance and selection.
To activate a tool, just click on its icon.
navigator tool
Displays Navigator.
open tool
save tool
Displays Save As dialog.
print tool
arrow tool
Turns off magnifying glass tool.
For enlarging portion of graph.
adjust baseline tool
For manual adjustment of peak baselines
full-scale tool
maximum values for displayed data.
stop tool
For terminating re-analysis processing.
pause tool
For pausing re-analysis processing.
go tool
For starting re-analysis processing.
status box
Displays status information during re-analysis processing.
annotation box
Displays any user-entered comments about the re-analysis list. To turn
off/on the annotation, choose its command from the Window menu.
To add comments, use the Notes command in the Edit menu.
January 1998
13-3
status bar
Shows operational status or help message if a menu command is highlighted.
Setting up a re-analysis list
In most cases, the quickest way to set up a re-analysis list is to open and
modify a previously created re-analysis list. At run time, UniPoint
automatically generates a re-analysis file (.GAR extension) for the samples
being processed and stores it in the data/report directory. To perform a
re-analysis on those samples, open the file and make any necessary
changes. You can make changes using the commands in the Edit menu
(see page 13-10) or by double-clicking on a row and accessing the Step
Entry dialog (see page 13-7).
You can also build a new re-analysis list using the Express Entry dialog
(see page 13-5) or using the Step Entry dialog.
before creating or
modifying the list
Before you set up a re-analysis list, you should have created or modified
each analysis method used during processing.
To add a column for an additional analysis method:
1 Double-click on the top line in the table to reveal the Format Columns
dialog. (Or, choose Format Columns from the Table menu.)
2 Select a column in the Column Contents list box. (The new column
inserts to the left of the selected column.)
3 Choose Analysis Method 2 in the Contents drop-down list box.
4 Make any additional changes in the other text boxes.
5 Choose Insert.
6 Choose Done to exit the dialog.
13-4
January 1998
batch re-analysis
The table displays the new column. If the re-analysis table already
had information in it, you see the text <Replace> in the new column.
Use the Replace command in the Edit menu to quickly substitute
<Replace> with the path to and name of the analysis method to use
7 Repeat steps 2 - 6 to insert another analysis method column if
necessary.
Using express entry dialog for list setup
For rapid list setup, you can use the Express Entry dialog.
1 Choose Express Setup from the List Entry menu.
2 Use the options in the dialog to set information for the re-analysis list.
3 Choose Generate to create the list. If steps are currently set in the reanalysis list, they are replaced by the newly generated steps.
Following is the default Express Entry dialog and a description of its
options. Additional fields may appear in the dialog if you added
columns to the table or if additional columns were indicated in the reanalysis file generated by the run.
Calib Levels. For calibration analyses, type the number of calibration
levels being analyzed for calibrator samples.
January 1998
13-5
Repeats/Level. If multiple injections were performed for each calibrator
at a level, type the number of repeats here. UniPoint averages each
level’s peak data and uses the average peak size to build the calibration
curve for each standard peak.
A value of 1 represents a “no-repeat” condition or in other words one
injection per calibration level.
Number of Unknowns. Tell UniPoint how many unknown samples are
analyzed after the calibrators.
Repeats/Unknown. If multiple injections were performed for each
unknown, type the number of repeats here. A value of 1 represents a
“no-repeat” condition or in other words one injection per unknown.
Number of Cycles. To repeat the entire calibration and unknown
analysis more than once, indicate that here.
Example. A calibration analysis consists of 4 calibration levels with 3
repeats/level and 5 unknown samples with 2 repeats per unknown.
How many steps are generated for 1 calibration cycle? For 2 cycles?
1 cycle:
Steps = (4 levels x 3 repeats per level) + (5 unknowns x 2 repeats per
unknown) = 22
2 cycles:
Steps = (22 injections per cycle x 2 cycles) = 44
Inj. Number. Type the number of the injection to use to generate the list,
usually 1.
Data File. Type, or browse to select, the path to and file name of the data
file containing the sample information to analyze.
Analysis Method. Type, or browse to select, the path to and file name of
the analysis method used to analyze collected data.
13-6
January 1998
batch re-analysis
depending on the parameters set in the control and analysis methods,
used during the run. For example, if an injector protocol requests inputs,
such as sample volume, a text box to indicate that appears in the Express
Entry dialog. UniPoint does not use the information in these text boxes
during re-analysis. You can display the text boxes, if they provide helpful
identification. Or, you can remove them from display using the Format
Columns dialog accessed via the Table menu.
If you indicated in the analysis method that actual and nominal amounts
should be entered for samples, text boxes appear for those also. See page
7-25 for a description of actual and nominal amounts.
boxes to indicate information for those columns. For example, you may
have added a column for an additional analysis method.
Using step entry dialog for list setup and modification
To indicate steps in the re-analysis list, you can use the Step Entry dialog.
Use this setup method if sample data was collected via multiple runs.
The Step Entry dialog can also be used to modify or delete steps in an
existing re-analysis list. To display the dialog:
1 Choose Step from the List Entry menu. The Step Entry dialog appears.
(If the table already has one or more steps, you can double-click on a
row to quickly access the dialog.)
2 Use the options in the dialog to create or modify the re-analysis list.
Refer to the instructions starting on page 13-8.
Following is a default Step Entry dialog and a description of its options.
Additional fields may appear in the dialog if you added columns to the
table or if additional columns were indicated in the re-analysis list file
generated by the run.
The Step up and down arrows in the upper right corner enable you to step
through the re-analysis list.
January 1998
13-7
Injection Number. The position at which the sample was injected during
the run. This number helps to identify the sample if no description is
indicated.
Data File. The path to and name of the file containing the channel data
for the sample. Double-click in the text box and then use the Browse
dialog that appears to select the file.
Analysis Method. The path to and file name of the analysis method used
to analyze data collected for the sample. Double-click in the text box and
then use the Browse dialog that appears to select the file.
Description. Text describing the sample. If you enter a number in the
description, you can have UniPoint automatically increment the number
when multiple entries are generated. To see the Inc. box for incrementing
the description, include a number in the Description box (for example,
Sample 1) before you choose the Multiple button. See example dialog box
on the next page.
Calib. Level. If the sample is a calibrator, its calibration level. If the
sample is an unknown, leave the text box blank or enter 0 (zero).
Additional text boxes. Other text boxes may automatically appear depending on the parameters set in your analysis method(s). For example, if
the analysis method requests that actual and nominal amounts should be
entered for samples, text boxes appear for those. See page 7-25 for a
description of actual and nominal amounts.
boxes to indicate information for those columns, such as for additional
analysis methods.
adding step
1 Make sure New Step appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box.
If not, choose New.
2 Indicate information in the text boxes. For file names, you must
indicate the complete path to the file. Therefore, click in the text box
and then use the Browse button to select the file.
3 Choose Insert.
1 Use the up or down arrow to select the step before which the new step
inserts. For example, to insert a step between Steps 3 and 4, display
information for step 4 in the text boxes.
2 Type information for the step.
3 Choose Insert.
13-8
January 1998
batch re-analysis
generating multiple step
The easiest way to set up the re-analysis list is to generate a list of all
steps and then modify the steps as necessary.
1 Choose the Multiple button. You see additional options.
Inc. An Increment box appears next to text boxes that prompt you for
a value, such as Calib. Level or Injection Number. If you do not want
to increment the value for each step, indicate 0 (zero).
Number of Steps to Generate. How many steps to add to the bottom
of the list.
Number of Repeats per Step. How many multiples of the step should
be generated. This is especially useful for multiple injections at the
same calibration level.
2 Indicate information in the default text boxes.
3 Choose Generate. If you already have one or more steps indicated,
the steps are added to the bottom of the list.
4 Make the necessary changes to each step. See modifying step, below,
and Modifying the re-analysis list using edit menu, on next page.
deleting step
To remove a step:
displayed.
2 Choose Delete.
modifying step
displayed.
2 Use the text boxes to make the necessary changes to the step.
3 Choose Change.
January 1998
13-9
Modifying the re-analysis list using edit menu
Once a re-analysis list has been setup, you can use the commands in the
Edit menu to make changes. If you need help on deleting, copying, and
pasting rows or on finding and replacing text, see page 5-17.
importing information into
a column
An additional command, Paste Special, in the Edit menu enables you
to bring in a column of information from Notepad and insert it into the
table. This command is useful for quickly entering sample descriptions
into a column.
1 Set up the re-analysis list as described earlier in this section.
3 When the Paste Special dialog appears, choose the Editor command
button to open Windows Notepad text editor.
4 Use the text editor to identify the sample descriptions. Put each
sample description on a separate line.
Or if you have a file already set up use the Open command in the File
menu to select the file.
5 Select all of the text in the editor and choose the Copy command.
6 Choose Exit from the File menu. To save the list for future use, choose
Yes when the message box appears. To discard the list, choose No.
7 When the Paste Special dialog re-appears, choose Description in the
list box and then choose Paste to perform the insertion.
8 Choose Cancel to exit the dialog box.
13-10
January 1998
batch re-analysis
Indicating baseline adjustment
During a re-analysis processing, you can view and possibly modify the
baseline generated for samples. To set parameters for baseline adjustment:
1 Choose Baseline Adjust from the Analyze menu.
2 Indicate options, described below, in the dialog box. Then choose OK
to exit.
Analysis Method. Lists the name of each method used during reanalysis processing. Choose the method name and then select from
among the other options in the dialog.
Manual Baseline Adjust. Indicates if you want to modify the systemgenerated baseline for peaks during re-analysis.
Use Manual Baseline. Indicates if you want to view a manual
baseline used to generate peak information for the data. This
baseline was generated either during a previous batch re-analysis or
during an individual re-analysis using the Results window.
Report File. Type, or use the Browse button to select, the name of the
report file that contains the previously-generated manual baseline(s).
Reviewing where files are stored
During the re-analysis, UniPoint generates new report files (which
include chromatogram plots of acquired traces) and, if appropriate,
calibration files.
1 Choose Storage from the Analyze menu.
If the re-analysis list is not named, you see a message box. Use the
Save As or Save command in the File menu to store the list to disk.
January 1998
13-11
2 When the Re-Analysis File Storage dialog appears, check the name of
the data/report output directory in which the files are saved. Also
check the names assigned to files.
3 To modify default names, choose <Templates> and make the changes.
Then select <Files> to review how the changes affect the file names.
If you indicate a directory name that does not exist, UniPoint creates it
for you during the re-analysis. As a default, UniPoint uses the name of
the re-analysis list as the directory name.
4 Choose OK to accept the settings and exit the dialog.
Following is a description of the areas of the Re-Analysis File Storage
dialog and how UniPoint assigns names.
Output Directory. Specifies the directory into which files are stored.
Method File. If multiple analysis methods are used to analyze data, select
the appropriate method file name from the list box. View and if necessary
change the path and file name used for storing report and calibration
information.
Report File. Specifies the path and file name where information for
reports are stored. As a default file name, UniPoint:
• uses file name assigned to the analysis method,
• assigns the extension .GR?
where the question mark is replaced with a number between 1 and 9
each time the analysis method is used to analyze the data.
Calibration File. Specifies the path and file name for the calibration plots
generated for standard peaks. To assign the name, UniPoint using the
same naming scheme as for a report file but adds the .GB? extension.
Disk Space. Shows how much room is available on the disk and how
much is required for the re-analysis. If there is not enough space:
• remove unneeded files from the disk before starting the re-analysis
• save the files to another fixed or network disk drive.
13-12
January 1998
batch re-analysis
Templates. Allows you to change the default file or directory naming
scheme used by UniPoint. When you choose the <Templates> button,
the software places question marks in the directory or file name. The
placement of the question marks identifies which part of the name
automatically increments when the software assigns names. You can
remove or change the placement of the question marks in a name to meet
your needs. However, do not modify the first two characters in the file
name extension for the report or calibration file.
Choose <Files> to see how a change to a file name’s template affects the
name to assign to the file.
Previewing the re-analysis
Before executing the re-analysis, you can view the chromatogram plot
for some of the data and make sure the integration parameters are
appropriate.
1 Open or set up the re-analysis list.
2 Choose the Analysis menu and make sure Preview Re-Analysis has a
check mark next to it.
3 Make sure the graph pane is displayed.
4 Click on a step in the table. The graph updates and displays the
chromatogram plot for the trace(s) collected for the sample.
5 Use the magnifying glass tool ( ) and full-scale tool ( ) as
necessary to get a better look at the chromatogram plot.
Zooming. Choose the magnifying glass tool ( ). Place the mouse
pointer to one side of the region of interest in the chromatogram plot.
Click and hold the left mouse button. Drag the mouse to draw a box
around the desired peaks. Release the mouse button. The region of
interest now fills the graph. A box within the summary graph
identifies the region that was enlarged.
Returning plot to full-scale. To display the entire chromatogram plot,
choose the full-scale tool ( ).
6 If there are multiple analysis methods named in the re-analysis list,
you see an Analysis Method box with option buttons in it. Choose
the option button for another method to see how peaks are integrated.
7 Repeat steps 4 - 6 to view additional chromatogram plots to make
sure peaks are integrated properly.
8 If necessary, open, make any changes to, and save the updated
analysis method(s). You can then click on the same step or different
step to see how the change affects peak integration.
January 1998
13-13
Executing the re-analysis
1 Choose Start from the Analyze menu or its tool (
)from the toolbar.
The software begins processing the first sample using the conditions
in the analysis method. The status box and status line in the
document window identifies step and method information.
If baseline adjustment was selected for the method, processing
automatically “pauses” so you can make any necessary
modifications to the baseline. See manually adjusting baselines
below. Click on Continue in the message box when you are finished
making changes.
Before continuing to the next step, the software processes the sample
using the conditions set in any additional analysis methods.
The software displays the message Re-analysis finished when
processing completes.
manually adjusting
baselines
When re-analysis processing pauses for baseline adjustment, the
software displays the begin point (up triangle) and end point (down
triangle) for each integrated peak. You can adjust a peak’s baseline,
integrate a peak, or disable integration of a peak. When finished making
adjustments, click on the Continue button in the Manual Baseline Adjust
message box.
Adjusting a peak’s baseline. To adjust the baseline beneath a peak,
zoom on the peak. Point and drag the peak’s begin or end point.
Integrating a peak. To integrate a peak not currently integrated, zoom
on the peak. Using the right mouse button, click on the peak. When the
menu appears, choose Insert Baseline. Move the mouse pointer to the
starting point for the peak. Click and drag the mouse pointer below a
peak to draw its baseline. Release the mouse button to set the end point
for the peak.
Removing peak integration. To inhibit integration of a peak, zoom on
the peak. Using the right mouse button, click on the peak. When the
menu appears, choose Delete Baseline. Then click on the begin or end
point of the baseline to remove.
13-14
January 1998
batch re-analysis
manually pausing re-analysis
You can pause the re-analysis by choose Pause in the Analyze menu or
the pause tool ( ). Pause mode is for viewing only; you cannot adjust
the baseline beneath peaks and have those changes stored to the generated report file.
stopping re-analysis
To stop the re-analysis before it completes, choose Stop in the Analyze
menu or the stop tool ( ). UniPoint completes the current step before
stopping the re-analysis.
Resuming a re-analysis after termination
You can restart a re-analysis that was terminated while in progress.
You can resume the re-analysis at the same step at which it was
stopped. Or, resume the re-analysis at an earlier step to repeat a series of
steps.
1 Choose Resume from the Analyze menu.
2 Type the number of the step at which the re-analysis resumes. You
can indicate the same step number at which the re-analysis was
terminated. Or, specify the number of a prior step prior to repeat
steps within the list.
The information for each sample is appended to the report files
created for the terminated re-analysis. If you repeat a series of steps,
there is duplicate information for the repeated steps.
January 1998
13-15
14
Protocols
A protocol consists of a set of instructions executed one after another by
a device. The protocol is started by indicating a timed event for it in a
control method. Each step in the protocol is performed independently of
what is going on in the control method, unless synchronization events
have been established between them.
A protocol can also be started in the Operations window using the
Manual menu. This enables you to test the protocol before it becomes
part of a control method. See Section 10 for information on manual
control.
There are two kinds of protocols that can be created: injector protocols
to control an injector and its syringe pump or dilutor and generic
protocols to control any Gilson device connected along the GSIOC.
Gilson has supplied a set of injector protocols for you to use or modify to
meet your needs. See page 14-12 for a description of the supplied
protocols.
January 1998
14-1
Protocol windows
There are two Protocol windows available in UniPoint:
• Injector Protocol window supplies options for controlling an injector
and its syringe pump or dilutor
• Generic Protocol window supplies options for controlling any Gilson
device
menu
bar
toolbar
table
pane
annotation
box
status
bar
Injector Protocol window
menu bar
Menu
File
Edit
Device
Event
Table
Window
Help
table pane
Generic Protocol window
Description
Make changes to or transfer information.
Name installed devices and other resources used by the protocol.
Issue instructions to devices.
Re-arrange windows or icons, or activate a window; display file
Lists the steps currently set for the protocol.
which a command was previously set is not listed in the configuration
for the protocol. Before executing the protocol during a run, check the
configuration using the System Configuration command in the
protocol's File menu. This message also occurs if a routines file is not
available or listed in the Injector dialog or Generic Device dialog accessed via the Device menu.
14-2
January 1998
protocols
Double-clicking on a row for an event automatically displays the dialog
box used to set up the event.
specifies an event for a routine and open the file containing the instructions set in the routine.
toolbar
Provides quick access to some options available in the Injector or
Generic Protocol window. To activate a tool, just click on its icon. (Not
all of the tools below are available in the Injector Protocol window.)
navigator tool
Displays Navigator.
open tool
save tool
Stores protocol to disk. If not yet named,
displays Protocol dialog and then Save As
dialog.
print tool
data channels tool
contact tool
injector tool
detector tool
generic tool
system tool
annotation box
Displays configuration information for and parameters set in the
protocol file. To turn off/on the annotation, choose its command from
the Window menu.
status bar
January 1998
14-3
Overview of creating a protocol
Following is an overview of how to set up a protocol.
1 If running multiple configurations, ensure that the appropriate
configuration file has been selected. To do this:
a) Exit all open document windows. (The Navigator if it appears
can be left open.)
b) Choose Default System Configuration from the File menu.
c) When the dialog appears, check the name of the file indicated at
the bottom of the dialog to see if the correct one is chosen. If not,
use the Browse button to select the appropriate file.
2 Create the document window for the protocol. You can do either of
the following:
• Using the Navigator, choose Advanced to access the window for
selecting the Injector or Generic Protocol option. Then choose
New.
• Or choose New from the File menu. When the dialog appears,
choose More Documents to access the list box containing the
selections for protocols. Choose the type of protocol: Injector or
Generic.
3 When the Protocol window appears, use the Device menu to check or
assign descriptions to, and specify options for, system components.
(See page 14-5.)
If you created routines files, use the Injector and Generic commands
to make the information in those files available for use in the protocol
file. (See page 14-5.)
4 Use the Event menu to indicate steps for the protocol. (See page 14-6.)
5 Once the steps for the protocol are set, choose Save from the File
menu. In the Protocol dialog, type a description for the protocol in
the Description box and choose OK. (See page 14-10.)
6 When the Save As dialog appears, indicate the name and path to
which the protocol file is saved and choose OK.
14-4
January 1998
protocols
Before you can issue commands to Gilson components, you must assign
a user-defined description to them. To assign descriptions, use the
command(s) under the Device menu.
Device menu for
injector protocol
Following is an example dialog for assigning description(s). The
procedures for checking and modifying descriptions are the same as
those for a control method. See Section 6 for more information.
Device menu for
generic protocol
Note: Gilson uses the special character * when assigning descriptions
in the example protocol files supplied with the software. This
causes the software to forgo the device configuration checks it
performs when a protocol file is associated with a control
method. Use this symbol with care in your files.
For example, if the configuration for the protocol file has a 231 XL
injector and the configuration for the control method has a 234
injector, the software does not warn you of any mismatches if the
description for the 231 XL injector is Injector*. It warns you if the
description is Injector.
loading routines files
Within a protocol file, you can access the routines set up in a routines
file and use them to set up the protocol. (Routines are groups of named
commands that make building protocols easier. See Section 15.)
1 Choose the Injector or Generic command. The dialog box that
appears includes a Routines Files Description area.
2 Choose the Browse button to select the routines file and place its label
in the Routines Files Description area.
3 Repeat step 2 for each routines file to use.
When you choose Injector or Generic from the Event menu. You can
insert a command that executes the instructions in a routine.
January 1998
14-5
Issuing commands
Each command issued when the protocol is executed is referred to as a
“step.” You can specify steps using the dialog boxes in the Event menu.
Plus you can quickly duplicate, remove, modify steps in the table using
the commands in the Edit menu.
To display an Event dialog box:
Event menu for
injector protocol
Or, click on a tool in the toolbar.
Or, double-click on an event in the table.
Hint: While an Event dialog box is on-screen, you can quickly
access the dialog for another device type by selecting its tool
from the toolbar.
Following is an Event dialog. The appearance and procedures for
setting events within each dialog box is similar. For a description of the
commands available for each Gilson device, refer to page 6-21.
Event menu for
generic protocol
Note: When creating a generic protocol for a 116 Detector, you may
need to insert a wait time between each command sent to the
detector. To program the wait, use the Wait Time command in
the System Event dialog.
adding step
1 Make sure New Event appears in the upper right corner of the dialog
2 Use the areas in the dialog box to select a command or routine and
indicate any parameters. (If a routines file is loaded, it is selected in
the Device/Routines File list box.)
14-6
January 1998
protocols
Note: Instead of entering a value in the parameter box for a
command, you can indicate a variable name, for example,
SampleVol or Wavelength#. See page 14-8 for more
information.
The command parameter can be the result of performing a
mathematical function on two variables or a variable and
number, or even two numbers. For example, AirGap +
SampVol and SampVol * 5 are valid command parameters.
You can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/).
3 Choose Insert.
1 Use the up or down arrow to locate the step before which the new
step inserts. For example, to insert a step between Steps 3 and 4,
2 Use the areas in the dialog to select the command and indicate any
parameters for the device.
3 Choose Insert.
deleting step
To remove a step:
1 Use the up or down arrow so the information for the step is
displayed.
2 Choose Delete.
modifying step
displayed.
2 Use the areas in the dialog to make the necessary changes to the step.
3 Choose Change.
January 1998
14-7
Variables
To make your protocols more flexible, you can indicate a variable name
instead of entering a value in a command parameter box for a step. A
variable name can be any combination of letters and numbers and can
contain special characters (_, $, ?, @) as long as it is not the first character or a mathematical operator (+, -, *, /, %). It cannot include spaces.
Valid variable names would be Wavelength# or Sample_Vol1.
a variable name. For example, it views the names Wavelength, wavelength, and WAVELENGTH as identifying the same value.
The command parameter specified for a step can also be the result of
command parameters. You can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide
(/), and return the remainder (%).
When you set up a step in a control method that executes the protocol,
UniPoint prompts you for a value to assign to each variable in the
protocol. You can indicate the value in the control method or wait and
indicate the value in the operations list that uses the control method for
a run.
To see what variable names have been set for a protocol and to indicate
lower and upper limits for and a default for each variable, do the
following:
2 When the dialog box appears, choose the variable name in the list
box.
colon, for example, 1:100. If the input is required, put an R before the
14-8
January 1998
protocols
5 To set a default value for the variable name, type the number in the
Default Value box.
choose Delete.
variable names
If you add, change, or delete variable names and the modified protocol is
used in a control method, do the following:
1 Open the control method.
2 Locate and double-click on the event for the modified protocol.
The parameter boxes at the bottom of the dialog update to reflect any
variable changes made in the protocol.
3 Make sure the correct information is indicated in each parameter box. If
you make changes, click on Change again to update the control method
table.
4 Choose Done to exit the Event dialog.
5 Save and close the control method using the File menu.
If any variables are no longer being used in the method, UniPoint asks
you if it should remove them from the External Variables dialog
(accessed via the Event menu). Choose Yes.
January 1998
14-9
Saving the protocol file
When you save a protocol for the first time, you see an additional dialog
box before you see the Save As dialog. In the dialog, indicate a description for the protocol in the Description box. You can indicate any
combination of upper and lower case letters in the text box. If you use an
& in the description, the character following the & is underlined, for
example, Rinse&Home.
UniPoint shows the protocol's description whenever you load the
protocol file into a control method.
If you have not referenced the protocol in a control method, you can
change the description even though the protocol file has been saved.
Choose Save As in the File menu. When you see the Protocol dialog,
type the new description and choose OK. When the Save As dialog
appears, choose OK again and overwrite the current version of the
protocol file.
14-10
January 1998
protocols
Synchronizing injector protocol and control method
So the start of data collection corresponds with the time of injection,
coordinate the control method and the injector protocol. The following
diagram shows the interaction between the control method and injector
protocol during a run.
As the diagram shows, once the control method gets system components
ready, it starts the protocol and then puts itself, and the computer, into a
wait state.
While the control method waits, the protocol performs steps for preparing the sample. Once the protocol tells the injector to inject the sample, it
issues a command to release the wait. The control method can then
initiate data collection and issue other device control commands.
Note: The synchronize command in the protocol can be located in a
routine used by the protocol.
where to find synchronize
command
January 1998
The Synchronize command is in the command lists for the System and
for the Injector under the Event menu of the Control Method or Protocol
window.
14-11
Gilson-supplied protocols
Gilson supplies example protocol files on the UniPoint installation disks.
Unless you changed the default installation path for the software, the files
are in C:\GILSON\UNIPOINT\INJ_RP.
Note: If you are using the 215 Liquid Handler/819 Valve Actuator as
your sampling injector, example protocols are in the
C:\GILSON\INJ_215 directory. For more information on the 215/
819 protocols, refer to the Using the 215/819 for Injection and Using
the 215/819 for Injection and Collection Technical Notes, available
from your Gilson representative.
Gilson recommends that you copy the protocol(s) to be used into your
working directory. Keep the original protocols in case you need to refer to
them.
Following is a description of each protocol file. Open the protocol file to
view its steps.
diln.gip
Dilutes sample using diluent from tube. Performs multiple aspirations
and dispenses to mix diluent and sample. Variables used:
• DILUENT_LOCATION - diluent tube location
• DILUENT_VOLUME - diluent volume to aspirate and dispense into
mix tube
• MIX_TUBE - mix tube location for diluent and sample
• TUBE - sample location
• SAMPLE_VOLUME - sample volume to aspirate and dispense into mix
tube
diln_rvr.gip
Dilutes sample using diluent from syringe pump or dilutor’s reservoir.
Variables used:
• DILUENT_VOLUME - diluent to dispense into tube
inj_cenl.gip
Locates and aspirates a sample; uses centered loop fill injection technique
to load and inject the sample; includes synchronization command to
coordinate protocol and control method. Variables used:
• INJECT_VOLUME - sample volume
• PUSH_VOLUME - solvent volume from reservoir
inj_parl.gip
Locates and aspirates a sample; uses partial loop fill injection technique
to load and inject the sample; includes synchronization command to
inj_totl.gip
Locates and aspirates a sample; uses total loop fill injection technique to
load and inject the sample; includes synchronization command to
• LOOP_VOLUME - size of injection loop
14-12
January 1998
protocols
mix.gip
Mixes by aspirating and dispensing sample volume. Variables used:
• MIX_TUBE - tube used for mixing
• MIX_VOLUME - sample volume to mix
rinse.gip
Cleans needle and injection port.
fc233par.gip
(Used to control a 233 XL that is being used for injection and collection)
Locates and aspirates a sample; uses partial loop fill injection technique
to load and inject the sample; issues synchronization command to
indicate the sample has been injected; rinses the injection port and the
outside of the needle; issues a second synchronize command to let the
control method know that the 233 XL can be issued fraction collector
events. Variables used:
fc233tot.gip
(Used to control a 233 XL that is being used for injection and collection)
Locates and aspirates a sample; uses total loop fill injection technique to
load and inject the sample; issues synchronization command to indicate
the sample has been injected; rinses the injection port and the outside of
the needle; issues a second synchronize command to let the control
method know that the 233 XL can be issued fraction collector events.
Variables used:
Note: For more information on FC233PAR.GIP and FC233TOT.GIP,
obtain a copy of the Using the 233 XL for Injection and Collection
Technical Note from your Gilson representative.
Updating protocol configuration
Before modifying the Gilson protocol file that you copied to your working directory, update its configuration information. You need to change
the configuration so it specifies the injector and syringe pump or dilutor
installed in your HPLC system. The Gilson example protocols were
written for a 231XL injector and 401C dilutor. And, if you have a
different sampling injector and syringe pump or dilutor, additional
commands may be available.
1 Open the protocol file.
2 Choose System Configuration from the File menu.
3 When the System Configuration dialog appears, choose Browse.
4 Use the options in the Browse System Configuration dialog to select
the configuration file for your HPLC system and then choose OK.
January 1998
14-13
5 If a Configuration Comparison box appears, choose Yes to replace the
protocol configuration with the updated configuration.
When the System Configuration dialog appears again, the devices for
your configuration appear in the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box.
6 Check the setup parameters for the injector and, if necessary, the
dilutor:
a) Choose the injector in the Device list box.
b) Choose the Setup button.
c) When the dialog box appears, modify the parameters as needed
and choose OK.
d) If necessary, repeat for the dilutor.
7 Choose Save.
8 When the Save As dialog appears, choose OK. When prompted,
indicate that you want to replace the configuration.
9 Choose OK to exit the System Configuration dialog.
10 Choose Save then Close from the File menu.
11 Repeat the above for each protocol file.
Checking protocol
Before using a protocol in a programmed run, test it to see if it works.
1 Create or open a control method.
2 Load the protocol into the control method using the Injector dialog,
accessed via the Device menu; see page 6-14.
3 Save and close control method.
4 Create an Operations window.
5 Choose Control Method from the Manual menu and verify that the
correct control method is being used for manual control.
If the method’s name is shown, choose Cancel.
If not, use the options in the Browse Control Method dialog to select
the method and choose OK.
6 Choose Injector from the Manual menu.
7 Choose the protocol in the dialog and click on Send.
14-14
January 1998
15
Routines
Routines consist of a set of instructions executed as part of a protocol.
They can make creating protocols easier because the name of the routine
identifies what it does, for example, Make Air Gap. Consequently when
you set events for routines in a protocol, you can more quickly identify
what is happening instead of reading through individual commands.
There are two kinds of routines that can be created: injector routines to
control an injector and its syringe pump or dilutor and generic routines
to control any Gilson device connected along the GSIOC. One or more
routines can be stored to the same file.
Gilson has supplied routines for injector systems. You can modify these
to meet your needs. See page 15-13 for a description of the supplied
routines.
January 1998
15-1
Routines windows
There are two Routines windows available in UniPoint:
• Injector Routines window supplies options for controlling an injector
and its syringe pump or dilutor.
• Generic Routines window supplies options for controlling any other
Gilson device.
menu
bar
toolbar
table
pane
annotation
box
status
bar
Injector Routines window
menu bar
Choose available functions from the drop-down menus found beneath the items
on the menu bar.
Menu
File
Edit
View
Device
Event
Table
Window
Help
table pane
Generic Routines window
Description
Select a routine so its steps can be viewed.
Name installed devices and other resources used by the routines.
Issue instructions to devices.
Re-arrange windows or icons, or activate a window; display file
Lists the steps currently set for a routine. The name of the routine is listed
in the title bar for the document window.
which a command was previously set is not listed in the configuration for
the routine. Before executing the routine during a run, check the configuration using the System Configuration command in the routine's File
menu. This message also occurs if a routines file is not available or listed
in the Injector dialog or Generic Device dialog accessed via the Device
menu.
15-2
January 1998
routines
Double-clicking on a row for an event automatically displays the dialog
box used to set up the event.
specifies an event for a routine and open the file that shows the instructions set in the routine.
toolbar
Provides quick access to some options available in the Injector or
Generic Routines window. To activate a tool, just click on its icon. (Not
all of the tools, below, are available in the Injector Routines window.)
navigator tool
Displays Navigator.
open tool
save tool
Stores routine to disk. Displays Routine
Name then Save As dialog.
print tool
data channels tool
contact tool
injector tool
detector tool
generic device tool
system tool
annotation box
Displays configuration information for and parameters set in the
routines file. To turn off/on the annotation, choose its command from
the Window menu.
status bar
January 1998
15-3
Overview of creating routines
Following is an overview of how to set routines.
1 If running multiple configurations, ensure that the appropriate
configuration file has been selected. To do this:
a) Exit all open document windows. (The Navigator if it appears
can remain on-screen.)
b) Choose Default System Configuration from the File menu.
c) When the dialog appears, check the name of the file indicated at
the bottom of the dialog to see if the correct one is chosen. If not,
use the Browse button to select the appropriate file.
2 Create the document window for the routines. You can do either of
the following:
• Using the Navigator, choose Advanced to access the window for
selecting the Injector or Generic Routines option. Then choose
New.
• Or choose New from the File menu. When the dialog appears,
choose More Documents to access the list box containing the
selections for routines. Choose the routine category: Injector or
Generic.
3 When the Routines window appears, use the Device menu to check
or assign descriptions to, and specify options for, components. (See
page 15-6.)
If you have created routines files, you can use the Injector and
Generic commands to load the information from another routines file
into the routines file being created.
4 Use the Event menu to indicate each step for the routine. (See page
15-7.)
SampleVol or Wavelength#. (See page 15-10.)
You can also indicate a mathematical operator (+, -, *, /) in the
parameter box. For example, when aspirating a volume you
can indicate SampVol * 5 as a valid parameter.
5 When the steps for the routine are set, choose Save from the File
menu. (See page 15-12.)
6 When the dialog appears:
a) Type a description for the collection of routines in the Routines
box, for example, Injector Routines.
b) In the other text box, type the name to assign to the group of
commands you just set up, for example, Make Air Gap if that is
what they do.
c) Choose OK.
15-4
January 1998
routines
7 When the Save As dialog appears, indicate the name and path to
which the routines file is saved and choose OK.
8 Choose New Routine from the Edit menu. This clears the table so you
can set steps for the next routine.
9 Use the Event menu to indicate each command for the routine.
10 When finished indicating steps, choose Save from the File menu and
assign a routine name. The file description can be modified only if
you want to.
11 Repeat steps 8 to 10 for each additional routine to create.
12 When the last routine is created, save and name it as described in
step 10. Then choose Close from the File menu.
January 1998
15-5
Before you can issue commands to Gilson components, assign a userdefined description to them. To assign descriptions, use the
command(s) under the Device menu.
Device menu for
injector routine
Following is an example dialog for assigning description(s). The
procedures for checking and modifying descriptions are the same as
those for a control method. See Section 6 for more information.
Device menu for
generic routine
Note: Gilson uses the special character * when assigning descriptions
in the example routines files supplied with the software. This
causes the software to forgo the device configuration checks it
performs when a routines file is associated with a protocol file.
Use this symbol with care in your files. Problems may occur at
run time if device parameters do not match.
For example, if the configuration for the routines file has a 231 XL
injector and the configuration for the protocol has a 234 injector,
the software does not warn you of any mismatches if the description for the 231 XL injector is Injector*. It warns you if the description is Injector.
loading routines files
Within a routines file, you can access the routines in another routines
file and use them to set up a new routines file.
1 Choose the Injector or Generic command. The dialog box that
appears includes a Routines Files Description area.
2 Choose the Browse button to locate the routines file and place its
label in the Routines Files Description area.
3 Repeat step 2 for each routines file to use.
When you choose Injector or Generic from the Event menu, you can
insert a command that executes the instructions in a routine.
15-6
January 1998
routines
Issuing commands
Each command issued when a routine is executed is referred to as a
“step.” You can specify steps using the dialog boxes in the Event menu.
Plus you can quickly duplicate, remove, or modify steps in the table
using the command in the Edit menu.
The Event dialog boxes are used to set the commands to send to defined
components. To display an Event dialog box:
Event menu for
injector routine
Or, click on a tool in the toolbar.
Or, double-click on an event in the table.
Hint: While an Event dialog box is on-screen, you can quickly
access the dialog for another device type by selecting its tool
from the toolbar.
Following is an Event dialog. The appearance and procedures for
setting events within each dialog box is similar. For a description of the
commands available for each Gilson device, refer to page 6-21.
Event menu for
generic routine
Note: When creating a generic routine for a 116 Detector, you may need
to insert a wait time between each command being sent to the
detector. To program the wait, use the Wait Time command for a
System Event.
adding step
1 Make sure New Event appears in the upper right corner of the dialog
2 Use the areas in the dialog box to select a command or routine and
indicate any parameters.
January 1998
15-7
SampleVol or Wavelength#. See page 15-10 for more
information.
The command parameter can be the result of performing a
mathematical function on two variables or a variable and
number, or even two numbers. For example, AirGap +
SampVol and SampVol * 5 are valid command parameters.
You can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/).
3 Choose Insert.
1 Use the up or down arrow to locate the step before which the new
step inserts. For example, to insert a step between Steps 3 and 4,
2 Use the areas in the dialog to select the command and indicate any
parameters for the device.
3 Choose Insert.
deleting step
To remove a step:
displayed.
2 Choose Delete.
modifying step
displayed.
2 Use the areas in the dialog to make the necessary changes to the step.
3 Choose Change.
Viewing and modifying routines via the edit menu
You can use the commands in the Edit menu to select a routine to view
and then if necessary make changes to it. If you need help using Edit
menu commands for deleting, copying, and pasting steps in a routine,
see page 5-17. The procedures for clearing the table to create a new
routine, for selecting a routine to view, for deleting a routine, and for
copying between two routines are given below.
15-8
January 1998
routines
creating new routine
To clear the table so you can create a new routine, choose New Routine
from the Edit menu.
If the currently displayed routine has been saved, it is not deleted. It is
just no longer displayed on-screen. You can re-display it using the
procedures in viewing a routine, below.
viewing a routine
To view the steps in a routine that has been created but is not currently
being displayed:
1 Choose Routines from the View menu.
2 In the Routine Names box, choose the routine’s description in the list
box and choose OK. (Or just double-click on the description.)
The steps set for the routine appear in the table.
3 Repeat the previous step to review another routine.
The Routine Names dialog is sizeable. Position the mouse pointer at
the side or corner of the dialog box. Click and drag the box to the
desired size.
The dialog is also moveable. Click on the title bar and drag the box to
the desired location.
Choose Done to remove the Routine Names box.
deleting a routine
To delete a routine:
1 Choose Routines from the Edit menu.
2 In the Routine Names box, choose the routine’s description in the list
box and choose Delete.
copying steps between
routines
To use the steps in one routine to generate a new routine:
1 View the source routine as described above.
2 In the table, highlight the steps to copy. (To highlight multiple lines,
just drag the mouse pointer.) Then choose Copy from the Edit menu.
3 Choose New Routine from the Edit menu. Or if the routine already
exists, display the destination routine as described above.
4 In the table, highlight the line before which the step insert and
choose Paste from the Edit menu.
If any variables are set in the copied lines, they are also copied to the
modified routine.
January 1998
15-9
Variables
To make your routines more flexible, you can indicate a variable name
instead of entering a value in a command parameter box for a step. A
variable name can be any combination of letters and numbers and can
contain special characters (_, $, ?, @) as long as it is not the first character
or a mathematical operator (+, -, *, /, %). It cannot include spaces. Valid
variable names would be Wavelength# and Sample_Vol1.
UniPoint does not differentiate between upper and lower case letters in a
variable name. For example, it views the names Wavelength, wavelength,
and WAVELENGTH as identifying the same value.
The command parameter specified for a routine step can also be the result
of performing a mathematical function on two variables or a variable and
command parameters. You can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (/
), and return the remainder (%).
When you set up a step in a protocol that executes the routine, UniPoint
prompts you for a value to assign to each variable in the routine. You can
indicate the value in the protocol. Or, you can wait and indicate the value
in the control method that uses the protocol or the operations list that uses
the control method.
To see what variable names have been set for a routine and to indicate
lower and upper limits for and a default for each variable, do the following:
2 When the dialog box appears, choose the variable name in the list box.
colon, for example, 1:100. If the input is required, put an R before the
15-10
January 1998
routines
5 To set a default value for the variable name, type the value in the
Default Value box.
choose Delete.
variable names
If you add, change, or delete variable names and the modified routine is
used in a protocol or another routines file, do the following:
1 Open the protocol or routines file.
2 Locate and double-click on the event for the modified routine.
The parameter boxes at the bottom of the dialog update to reflect any
variable changes made in the routine.
3 Make sure the correct information is indicated in each parameter box.
If you make changes, click on Change again to update the protocol or
routine table.
4 Choose Done to exit the Event dialog.
5 If you are updating a routines file, repeat steps 2 - 6 in each routine that
uses the modified routine.
6 Save and close the protocol or routines file using the File menu.
If any variables are no longer being used in the file, UniPoint asks you
if it should remove them from the External Variables dialog (accessed
via the Event menu). Choose Yes.
January 1998
15-11
Saving a routine and the routines file
When you select the Save or Save As command from the File menu, you
are prompted for two labels, as you can see in the dialog box below.
The Routines File Description describes the collection of routines
included in the routines file. You see this description whenever you
load the routines file into a protocol or another routines file. Once this
has been set for the file, there is no need to change it unless you come up
with a better description while setting routines. (Use the rename feature
with care especially if the routines file has been referenced in other
protocol or routines files.)
The Routine Name identifies the routine whose commands you just
setup (or are about to set up) in the Routines window. If the Routines
Name text box is blank, no name has been assigned to the routine; the
title bar refers to it as New. If there is a name in the text box, you can
rename it. (Once again, use the rename feature with care.)
For each description, you can indicate any combination of upper and
lower case letters and blank spaces in the text box. If you use an & in the
description, the character following the & is underlined, for example,
Rinse&Home.
If the Routines window is "untitled" or if you selected the Save As
command, you see the Save As dialog (shown on next page) after you
exit the Routines dialog. Use the dialog to name the routines file.
15-12
January 1998
routines
Gilson-supplied routines file
Gilson supplies an example routines file INJ_ROUT.GIR on the UniPoint
installation disks. Unless the default installation path for the software, it
is copied to C:\GILSON\UNIPOINT\INJ_RP.
Note: If using the 215 Liquid Handler/819 Valve Actuator as the injector,
use the 215_ROUT.GIR file in the C:\GILSON\ INJ_215 directory.
For more information, refer to the Using the 215/819 for Injection or
Using the 215/819 for Injection and Collection Technical Note,
available from your Gilson representative.
Gilson recommends that you copy the routines file into your working
directory. Since the routines file is referenced by Gilson-supplied protocols, do not change its name if using a Gilson-supplied example protocol.
Keep the original routines file in case you need to refer to it.
Following is a description of each routine. To view the commands in each
routine, open the routines file. Then use the Routines dialog accessed via
the Edit menu to select a routine to view.
air gap
Aspirates air gap.
aspirate
Aspirates sample. Variable used:
• SAMPLE_VOLUME - volume to aspirate
dilution
Aspirates diluent from tube and dispenses into mix tube. Variables used:
• DILUENT_LOCATION - diluent tube
• DILUENT_VOLUME - diluent volume to aspirate and dispense
• MIX_TUBE - mix tube location
dilution/reservoir
Aspirates and dispenses diluent, from syringe pump or dilutor reservoir,
into sample tube. Variables used:
• DILUENT_VOLUME - volume to aspirate and dispense
dispense
Dispenses sample volume. Variable used:
• SAMPLE_VOLUME - volume to aspirate
home
Moves arm to left rear of tray; homes syringe pump or dilutor syringe;
lowers needle into rinse station.
injection / centered loop
fill
Loads and injects sample using centered loop fill technique. Variables
used:
• PUSH_VOLUME - solvent volume from reservoir
injection / partial loop fill
Loads and injects sample using partial loop fill technique. Variable used:
injection / total loop fill
Loads and injects sample using total loop fill technique. Variable used:
mix
Performs multiple aspirations and dispenses to mix. Variable used:
• MIX_VOLUME - volume to mix
January 1998
15-13
reservoir
Aspirates solvent from syringe pump or dilutor’s reservoir. Variable
used:
• SOLVENT_VOLUME - solvent volume
rinse injection port
Moves needle to injector port and cleans injection port using solvent
from syringe pump or dilutor’s reservoir.
rinse needle inside
Moves needle to rinse station and cleans it using solvent from syringe
pump or dilutor’s reservoir.
rinse needle outside
Moves needle to rinse station and cleans it using solvent from syringe
pump or dilutor’s reservoir.
sample location
Moves arm and lowers needle into sample tube. Variable used:
synchronize
Releases synchronize set in control method (used for injector/control
method coordination).
Updating routines’ configuration
Before modifying the INJ_ROUT.GIR routines file that you copied to
your working directory, update its configuration information. You need
to change the configuration so it specifies the injector and syringe pump
or dilutor installed in your HPLC system. The routines in
INJ_ROUT.GIR were written for a 231XL injector and 401C dilutor.
And, if you have a different injector or syringe pump or dilutor, additional commands may be available.
1 Open the routines file.
2 Choose System Configuration from the File menu.
3 When the System Configuration dialog appears, choose Browse.
4 Use the options in the Browse System Configuration dialog to select
the configuration file for your HPLC system and then choose OK.
5 Check the setup parameters for the injector and, if necessary, the
syringe pump or dilutor:
a) Choose the injector in the Device list box.
b) Choose the Setup button.
c) When the dialog box appears, modify the parameters as needed
and choose OK
d) If necessary, repeat for the syringe pump or dilutor.
6 Choose Save.
7 When the Save As dialog appears, choose OK. When prompted,
indicate that you want to replace the configuration.
8 Choose OK to exit the System Configuration dialog.
9 Choose Save then Close from the File menu.
15-14
January 1998
16 Tray Editor
This section introduces the Tray Editor Software supplied with the
Gilson UniPoint System Software. You use the Tray Editor to create a
tray file that contains rack, zone and tube information for your Gilson
injector or fraction collector. UniPoint then uses this information to
access tubes during a run.
Setting up a tray file consists of the following:
• Choosing the template for the work area of the auto-injector or
fraction collector. (When you open the Tray Editor from UniPoint, the
template is automatically selected and displayed.)
• Placing each rack into the appropriate location in the template.
• Identifying the zone names to assign to groups of tubes. (By default,
UniPoint sets up the descriptions TUBES and FRACTIONS for you.
You can use these names or specify different names.)
• Assigning a zone and number to each tube location used.
This section describes how to do the above. However, first you learn
how to start the Tray Editor and learn about the Tray Editor window.
January 1998
16-1
Starting the tray editor
You can start the Tray Editor using UniPoint.
You access the Tray Editor by selecting its command button in the
Injector and Fraction Collector dialogs of the Device menu. This menu is
available in the Control Method, Protocol, and Routines windows.
When the Tray Editor window appears, you see a work area containing
a template for the work area of the device. See diagram on next page.
Tray editor window
Following is an example Tray Editor window with tray information
already set up.
menu bar
toolbar
template
status bar
menu bar
Choose Tray Editor functions from the drop-down menus found beneath
the seven items on the menu bar.
Menu
File
Edit
View
Zone
Options
Window
Help
16-2
Description
Create, open, save or print files; exit the Tray Editor.
Add or remove zones, racks, and tubes.
Change size of graphic; remove toolbar and status bar.
Select a zone.
Change tubing numbering or place rack in custom
position.
Re-arrange windows or icons, or activate a window.
Learn about the Tray Editor.
January 1998
tray editor
template
Displays a graphical representation of instrument’s work area. It
illustrates the position of racks and tubes.
toolbar
Consists of several tools that represent various functions of the Tray
Editor. The table below describes each of the tools, from left to right. To
activate a tool, just click on its icon.
Tool
New
Open
Save
Print
About
Zone
Left and Right
Arrows
Tube Numbering
Description
Creates a tray file.
Recalls existing tray file.
Stores tray file to disk.
Generates a printout of the active tray file.
Displays current software version and copyright
information.
Sets the names assigned to groups of tubes.
Activates each zone in turn. The name
of the active zone appears in the status bar located at
the bottom of the window and described below.
Identifies how blocks of tubes are numbered.
The toolbar can be turned on and off from the View menu.
tatus bar
Shows the following information, from left to right:
Field
message
X Location
Y Location
zone indicator
Description
Shows operational status of Tray Editor or a help
message if a menu command is being highlighted.
Shows the X axis position, in millimeters, of the mouse
pointer.
Shows the Y axis position, in millimeters, of the mouse
pointer.
Shows the name of the currently selected zone. If no
zone is active, then No Zone Selected appears.
The status bar can be turned on and off from the View menu.
January 1998
16-3
Setting up a tray file
The following sections take you through creating a tray file. As stated
earlier, you do the following to set up a tray:
•
•
•
•
•
Choose a template.
Insert rack(s).
Set up zone names.
Assign zone name and numbers to tubes.
Save the tray file.
Choosing a template
The first step in creating a tray file is to select a template file supplied with
the Tray Editor. Unless their destination was changed when the Tray
Editor was installed, these files are located at
C:\GILSON\TRAY\RACKS.
A template file identifies the work area of Gilson injectors and fraction
collectors. Each template file contains rack locations on an instrument
bed outline. The instrument bed outline represents the actual limitations
of the instrument probe or dispense head. The area outside of this outline
is inaccessible to the probe or dispense head.
The name of each template file identifies the following:
• the model number of the device, for example, m203 is for the FC 203
Fraction Collector or m234 is for the 234 Autoinjector.
• if applicable, the version of the device, such as m203b for version B of
the 203 Fraction Collector, m231a for the non-XL version of the 231
Auto-Sampling Injector, and m231x for an XL version of the 231 AutoSampling Injector.
• type of rack locator installed “_an” for narrow antlers, “_aw” for wide
antlers “_p” for tray, “fn” for funnel adapter, or “mt” for microtiter
plate adapter.
When you open the Tray Editor from UniPoint, the template is automatically selected for the installed injector or fraction collector and displayed
on-screen. To create a second tray file for the injector or fraction collector
while in the Tray Editor, you must select a template.
1 Choose New from the File menu. Or, click on the New tool in the
toolbar.
16-4
January 1998
tray editor
2 When the dialog box appears, type or select the file to open. If the file
is not listed in the File Name list box, do one or both of the following:
3 Choose OK after selecting a template file.
The Tray Editor displays a document window with a graphical
representation of the instrument’s work area. (An example template
is shown on page 16-2.) On-screen, the blue outline represents the
area that can be accessed by the device. The gray rectangles identify
locations for racks.
Defining racks
Once a template file has been selected, you identify the rack.
Unless their destination was changed when UniPoint was installed,
rack files are located at C:\GILSON\TRAY\RACKS.
For rack files, the file name identifies the rack code and has the extension .GRK, for example, CODE_028.GRK. Also be aware of the following:
• Some rack codes can be installed on a tray or on wide antlers. The
file name with the “T” after the code number is for use with a tray, for
example, CODE_30T.GRK. The other file is for use with wide antlers,
for example, CODE_030.GRK.
• If using rack code 29, the file CODE_29L.GRK is for use with large
Eppendorf vials and CODE_29S.GRK is for use with small
Eppendorf vials.
January 1998
16-5
identifying rack information
To identify information for pre-determined rack locations, follow the
procedures below.
Note: Refer to page 16-18 if using non-Gilson racks or placing racks in
non-standard location in the work area.
1 Click on one of the rack positions in the template to select it. A red
outline appears whenever a rack position is selected. Then choose
Add Rack from the Edit menu.
Or, double-click on the rack location in the template.
The Select rack to add dialog appears. The File Name list box
displays valid rack files for the selected position.
2 In the File Name box, type or select the file to open. If the rack file is
not listed in the File Name list box, do one or both of the following:
3 Click on OK.
Note: If you see the Custom Placement dialog at this point, that
feature has been turned on. Just click on OK. The Tray Editor
positions information in the correct location. To turn off
custom placement, choose its command from the Options
menu. For more information on custom placement of racks,
see page 16-18.
The template now displays tube locations that can be accessed for the
rack.
4 Repeat the above until each rack has been defined.
16-6
January 1998
tray editor
deleting rack
If a rack was just defined, you can choose Undo Last Add from the Edit
menu. This command is only available immediately after a rack file has
been opened. Once another action is performed, this command is
dimmed.
You can also delete a rack by double-clicking outside of a tube or insert.
You see message box asking you to verify the deletion.
Setting up and modifying zone names
After identifying racks, you name the groups of tubes to process, for
example Reagents, Samples, and so on.
When you access the Tray Editor from UniPoint, the Tray Editor automatically assigns the default zone names, TUBES and FRACTIONS, and
lists them in the Zone menu. You can use those zone names or different
ones.
Note: If you use the New command in the Tray Editor to create a new
template, the Tray Editor assigns the default zone names, Zone 1
- 4.
To the right of the zone name is its identifier (or shortcut key). When the
template window is on-screen, pressing the letter (A - Z) on the keyboard
enables you to activate the zone without having to use the Zone menu.
When the zone is inactive, this is also the letter that appears in any tubes
associated with the zone.
The No Zone Selected command makes all zones inactive. Only the
identifier (A - Z) appears in tubes assigned to a zone.
To view the dialog box for managing zones, choose Zone Names from
the Edit menu. Or, click on the Zones tool in the toolbar.
You see the Edit Zones dialog that enables you to identify up to 26 zone
names (identified by a letter between A and Z). Refer to the procedures
below to make changes to, add, and remove zones. The new and
updated zone names are then listed in the Zone menu.
January 1998
16-7
changing a zone name
To modify a zone name:
1 Select the zone to replace.
2 In the text box, type the new name.
3 Click on Replace to change the old name to the new name.
adding a new name
To identify another zone name:
1 In the text box, type the new name.
2 Click on Add to add the new name to the list. Plus, the Tray Editor
also indicates the 1-letter identifier for quickly activating the zone.
When a zone is inactive and tubes have been assigned to it, this letter
appears in the tubes associated with the zone.
New zones are added to the list in the order they are entered. To
change the order, use the changing a zone name procedures, above.
removing a zone name
To delete a zone name:
1 Choose the zone to delete. The name of the zone appears in the text
box.
2 Click on Delete to remove the zone from the list. Remaining zones
move up in the order to replace the deleted zone.
Assigning zone and number to tubes
You can select tubes to put into different zones that you have named for
your convenience.
Numbering tubes establishes identification information for each one.
The liquid handling program can then refer to a specific tube by zone
name and sequence number.
When adding tubes to and removing them from a zone, note the following:
• Tubes can be numbered individually, across single rows or columns,
or in blocks.
• Tubes from more than one rack can be in the same zone.
• Tubes in the same zone can have different numbering patterns.
16-8
January 1998
tray editor
numbering tubes
individually
Tubes can be numbered one at a time without an apparent pattern. To
number tubes individually:
1 Select a zone from the Zone menu.
2 Click on tubes in the order that you want them numbered in the zone.
To remove a tube from a zone, click on the tube again. Higher
numbered tubes are renumbered to maintain the sequence.
numbering tubes in a
single column or row
Tubes can be numbered sequentially across a column or row. The
numbering order is determined by the direction they are selected. For
example, tubes that are selected from left to right display numbers in
ascending order from left to right. If tubes are selected across racks, the
numbering sequence is not interrupted.
To number tubes in a column or row:
2 Position the mouse pointer just outside the first tube to assign to the
zone.
3 While holding down the left mouse button, drag the mouse in the
direction you want the tubes numbered. You can select a row of
tubes across multiple racks.
4 When all of the tubes have been selected in the single row or column,
release the mouse button.
Tubes can be numbered from left to right, right to left, back to front, or
front to back
Re-selecting tubes remove them from the zone.
Note: If you select multiple rows or columns, the Tray Editor thinks
you are selecting a block of tubes and uses the default numbering pattern. This pattern is set using the Tube Numbering
command in the Options menu.
January 1998
16-9
numbering blocks of tubes
Tubes can be numbered in a selected pattern across multiple columns
and rows. The numbering order is determined by the pattern selected in
the Numbering Patterns dialog. To number blocks of tubes:
2 Choose Tube Numbering from the Options menu. The Numbering
Pattern dialog appears.
3 Select where numbering begins and the pattern to use. As you can
see, numbering patterns can be rectangular or serpentine.
By selecting each of the Starting corner option buttons and then
looking at the pattern diagrams, you can see how the numbering of
tubes is affected. There are 16 different numbering patterns available.
(The numbering patterns shown in the dialog box are representative
and can be expanded to include as many tubes as needed.)
4 Click on OK to close the dialog box and return to the Tray Editor
window so you can select tubes.
5 Point the mouse just outside of one of the corner tubes to assign to the
zone.
6 Holding down the left mouse button, drag the mouse until all of the
tubes have been selected. You can select multiple racks. Release the
mouse button.
When you are numbering a block of tubes, the direction they are
selected does not affect the pattern.
When the selected block of tubes expands across racks, the
numbering sequences are not interrupted and the pattern continues
as if the rack outlines do not exist.
16-10
January 1998
tray editor
7 Repeat the above to assign numbers to additional blocks of tubes.
Remember to change the zone and tube numbering scheme if
necessary before selecting the tubes.
changing tube numbers
You can change the numbers assigned to tubes in a zone as described
below:
1 Choose a zone name from the Zone menu to select and highlight all
of the tubes associated with a zone.
2 Select a tube or group of tubes to renumber. This action removes the
tubes from the current zone and removes the numbers as well. Gray
filled circles appear for the tubes.
Remaining tubes in that zone adjust their numbering so that no
numbers are skipped.
3 Select the tubes again in the pattern that you want them numbered.
removing tubes from zone
To remove tubes from a zone:
1 Choose No Zone Selected from the Zone menu.
2 Then click on each tube or select a group of tubes by clicking and
dragging to draw a box around the tubes to remove.
Remaining tubes in the zone are renumbered so that no numbers are
skipped. The removed tubes are displayed as gray-filled circles.
Viewing techniques
determining tube status
The appearance of a tube determines its current status.
Gray-filled - The tube does not belong to a zone and is consequently not
numbered. Clicking on the tube assigns it to the currently selected zone.
(If the No Zone Selected option is active; the state of the tube remains the
same.)
Blue-filled, numbered - The tube is in the currently selected zone.
Clicking on the tube:
• Reverts the tube to an ungrouped and unnumbered state. A grayfilled circle results.
• Causes remaining tubes in the zone to adjust their numbering so that
no number is skipped.
Lettered - The tube is assigned to a zone that is represented by the letter.
Clicking on the tube activates its zone so you can see the tube number
assigned to the tube plus any other tubes in the zone. The name of the
zone is then shown in the status bar.
January 1998
16-11
scrolling through zones
Do any of the following to scroll through zones and see what tubes have
been assigned to each one:
1 In the toolbar, click on the left or right arrow to move through the
assigned zones, activating each in turn.
Or, choose the name of the zone from the Zone menu. Repeat for each
additional zone.
Or, using the keyboard, press the 1-letter shortcut key assigned to the
zone.
getting tube information
SHIFT +
getting template and
rack information
Pressing the SHIFT key while simultaneously clicking on a tube displays
a box showing the current state of the tube (zone and number assignment) and the tube’s physical dimensions.
Pressing the SHIFT key while simultaneously clicking outside a tube
displays a box showing the name of the associated template and rack
file.
SHIFT +
16-12
January 1998
tray editor
enlarging/reducing size
of the template
You can zoom in and out on the information displayed in the template
by changing its size. To do this, choose Scaling from the View menu.
The Scaling dialog appears.
Some considerations when using the Scaling dialog are:
• Maximum scale factor is 400% and the minimum scale factor is 25%.
• Choose the Auto Scale check box to display the entire instrument bed
in the opened window. (Note that manually setting scale factor turns
off this option.)
• You can indicate the scale factor directly by highlighting the current
scale factor in the text box and typing the new number or by using the
scroll bar to select the factor.
turning off/on toolbar
To remove the toolbar from display, choose Toolbar from the View menu.
To redisplay it, select the command again.
turning off/on status bar
To remove the status bar from display, choose Status bar from the View
menu. To redisplay it, select the command again.
January 1998
16-13
Managing tray files
saving a file
To save a new file to disk for future retrieval:
1 From the File menu, choose Save or Save As. Or, click on the New
tool in the toolbar.
2 When the File Save As dialog appears, use its options to name and
select a storage location for the file.
3 Choose OK to save the file.
To quickly save the contents of a named file to disk:
1 From the File menu, choose Save (rather than Save As). Or, click on
the Save tool in the toolbar.
16-14
January 1998
tray editor
opening a file
To display the contents of an existing tray file:
1 From the File menu, choose Open to display the Open Tray File
dialog. Or, click on the Open tool in the toolbar.
2 When the Open Tray File dialog appears, use its options to locate and
select the tray file.
3 Choose OK to open the file.
making a copy of a file
To store the changes made to file to a new name while still keeping a
previous version, do the following:
1 From the File menu, choose Save As.
2 When the File Save As dialog (shown on previous page) appears, use
its options to name and select a storage location for the file.
3 Choose OK.
deleting a file
January 1998
To remove one or more tray files, use the Windows File Manager. See
your Microsoft Windows User’s Guide for more information.
16-15
Printing tray files
previewing what is printed
To see what is printed for a tray file:
1 Choose Print Preview from the File menu. The Print Preview window
appears.
2 Use the command buttons at the top of the window to move between
pages, manipulate what you see on screen, and send the pages to the
printer.
Note: Tray diagrams usually print better if landscape orientation
has been selected. See specifying printer and setup options
on the next page.
The first page lists the zones that have been created.
The second page is the tray diagram.
Both pages identify the page number, the date and time, and the
name of the tray file.
3 Choose Close to return to the Tray Editor window.
16-16
January 1998
tray editor
specifying printer
To select and if necessary set options for the printer to use when
printing tray files:
1 From the File menu, choose Print Setup.
2 When the dialog appears, indicate the printer options. The available
options depend on the installed printer. Refer to the documentation
accompanying your printer for more information.
Note: Tray diagrams usually print better if landscape orientation
has been selected. See specifying printer and setup options
on the next page.
You install printers using Microsoft Windows. See the Microsoft
Windows User’s Guide for details.
3 Choose OK.
printing
To obtain a printout:
1 Choose the Print command from the File menu.
2 When the Print dialog appears, make sure the appropriate printer is
indicated at the top of the dialog. To select a different printer, choose
Setup.
3 Select the pages to print and indicate any additional options in the
dialog available for your printer, for example, print quality.
4 Choose OK to start the printing process.
January 1998
16-17
Identifying custom racks and tubes
indicating rack placement
for custom tray
If your instrument has a custom tray, you must define where each rack
is. Custom Placement allows you to identify a rack anywhere in the
instrument’s work area.
1 Choose Custom Placement from the Options menu. When selected, a
check mark appears next to the command.
2 Choose Add Rack from the Edit menu.
3 When the Select Rack to Add dialog appears, choose from the list of
available racks and click on OK.
4 When the Placement Information dialog appears, indicate the
location and orientation of the rack; then click on OK.
X location. The distance (in millimeters) to the center of the rack
along the X axis. (See diagram to the left.)
Y location. The distance (in millimeters) to the center of the rack
along the Y axis. (See diagram to the left.)
Orientation. How the rack is positioned on the tray. Vertical is the
default position for a rack installed on the tray, such as shown in the
diagram to the left. Horizontal indicates that the rack is positioned
from left to right along the front face of the instrument.
The diagram on the next page shows how different values in the
Degrees text box affect how the rack is displayed. For reference, it
identifies tube 1 for a Gilson rack in a standard vertical position. As
the diagram illustrates, 0 degrees is a Vertical orientation and 270
degrees is a Horizontal orientation.
5 Repeat steps 2 - 4 for each rack.
6 Choose Custom Placement again from the Options menu so that
command is no longer active.
16-18
January 1998
tray editor
indicating tube placement
for custom rack
If you are using a non-Gilson rack or customized Gilson rack, use the
following procedures to identify the size, location, and number of tubes
that the rack can hold.
1 Click on a rack location to select it.
2 Choose Add Vessels from the Edit menu.
3 When the dialog box appears, indicate tube information and click on
OK. Distances can be entered to the nearest tenth of a millimeter.
Home position is located at the left rear of the instrument’s work area.
January 1998
16-19
X Origin. The distance from Home position to the center of the array
along the X axis.
Y Origin. The distance from Home position to the center of the array.
X Count. The number of vessels in the rack along its X axis.
Y Count. The number of vessels in the rack along its Y axis.
X Delta. The distance between the centers of each tube in the X
direction.
Y Delta. The distance between the centers of each tube in the Y
direction.
Diameter. The tube’s diameter.
Top. The distance to the top of the tube in the rack.
Bottom. The distance to the bottom of the tube in the rack.
4 Click on OK to exit the dialog.
Locations for the identified tubes appear in the rack.
5 Repeat the above for any additional racks that require custom tube
information.
Quitting the tray editor
To quit the program.
1 Choose Exit from the File menu.
Or, double-click on the control menu box at the top left corner of the
window.
The UniPoint dialog, from which you accessed the Tray Editor,
appears.
16-20
January 1998
17
Extract, Import, and Export
Features
This section describes how to:
• retrieve archived information from data, report, and calibration files
• import channel data from a Gilson 160 spectral data file or from a text
file for display in a Results window
• export channel data and report information into a text file
January 1998
17-1
Extracting archived information
A data file contains more than just the information collected for data
channels. It also includes the operations list, control method(s), and
analysis method(s) used during the run. UniPoint contains an “archive
extract” feature for getting to this information. You can also use this
feature to recreate the analysis method used to produce a report or
calibration file.
1 From the File menu, choose Archive Extract.
2 In the File Name box, type or select the data, report, or calibration file.
If the file is not listed in the box:
3 Select the option button for the document type to retrieve.
4 If multiple files for the document type are available in the file, select
the name of the file, whose information is extracted, in the Available
File list box.
5 In the Destination File box, specify the path and file name into which
the information are stored.
To store the file to its original name and location, click on the name in
the Available Files list box. The selected information automatically
appears in the Destination File text box.
You can use the Browse button to locate a different file that is
overwritten with the extracted information.
6 Choose Extract.
7 Choose Done when finished extracting information.
8 Use the Open command in the File menu to locate and display the
information for the file(s) just extracted.
17-2
January 1998
extract/import/export
Importing data
Viewing Gilson 160 chromatogram
If you have a Gilson 160 Diode Array Detector, you import channel data
from a spectral data file (.??D extension) and display its trace in an
already opened Results window.
1 From the File menu of the Results window, choose the Import
command and display its cascading menu. Then choose 160 DAD
Chromatogram.
2 When the Import DAD Chromatogram dialog appears, use the upper
part of the dialog box to locate and select the file.
3 Use the lower part of the dialog box to specify extract and reference
wavelength information. Refer to field descriptions below.
Extract Wavelength. Type the wavelength of the chromatogram to
display. The range of wavelengths available for the file are listed to
the right of the text box.
Reference Selection. Use this area to indicate parameters for the
reference wavelength. The reference wavelength is used to correct for
background noise and instabilities in the detector. The absorbance at
the extract wavelength is calculated using the reference wavelength.
See the Software Reference section in the Gilson 160 Diode Array User’s
Guide for the chromatogram calculation.
For the reference wavelength, choose a wavelength that is close to the
extract wavelength and in a region of non-absorbance.
If you select the Wavelength Only option, a new reference value is
calculated at each time point and is used in the chromatogram
calculation.
January 1998
17-3
If you select the Wavelength and Time option, the reference value at
the specified time point is used in the chromatogram calculation. As
a recommendation, use a time point near the beginning of the run, for
example, 0.1 min.
Duration. How long spectral data was acquired.
Date and Time. When the data in the file was acquired.
4 Choose OK to display the chromatogram. The legend in the Results
window identifies the trace.
17-4
January 1998
Viewing chromatogram from non-Gilson detector
If you have a non-Gilson detector and can save the detector’s output in
an ASCII format, you can view the data in the Results window of System
Controller.
Each line of data within the file must include a time and a voltage. The
time and voltage can be separated by a tab, comma, or space. Each line
must end with a carriage return.
To display a chromatogram for the data:
1 From the File menu, choose the Import command and display its
cascading menu. Then choose ASCII Chromatogram.
2 When the dialog box appears, indicate the appropriate information.
Import File. The complete path to and name of the file. You can use
the Browse button to locate the file if necessary.
Delimiter. How the time and voltage values are separated.
3 Choose Import. Then choose Done to exit the dialog box.
The selected trace information appears in the Results window. The
legend identifies the trace.
January 1998
17-5
Exporting data and reports
The Export commands within the Results window enable you to convert
data channel and report information into a text format for use in a
spreadsheet program.
Exporting chromatogram data
You can convert data files into a text format that can be viewed and
manipulated in a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel. These
converted data files contain channel information.
Each line of data within a channel file includes a time and a voltage.
The time and voltage are separated by a tab or comma depending on the
delimiter you selected before exporting data. Each line is ended with a
carriage return.
To generate an export file containing raw data:
1 From the File menu, choose the Export command and display its
cascading menu. Then choose Data.
2 Indicate information in the dialog and choose Export.
Export File. Indicate the name of the export file to create. To replace
an existing file with new information, click in this text box and then
use the Browse button to locate the file.
Data Channel. If multiple channels are displayed, choose the
channel information to convert.
Num. Data Pts. The number of data points in the file.
Extract Interval. Identifies how often UniPoint extracts a data point
and places it in the export file.
For example, if the data file has 7000 data points and the extract
interval is set to 100, the exported file has 70 data points. UniPoint
skips the first 99 data points and places the 100th data point in the
export file. It then skips the next 99 data points and places the 200th
data point in the export file. The software continues this procedure
until all 7000 data points are processed.
17-6
January 1998
Delimiter. How the columns of text generated by the software are
separated. The software can separate each column by tab, comma, or
blank space.
viewing raw data in
spreadsheet program
You can view Gilson raw data ASCII files in a spreadsheet program,
such as Microsoft Excel. Use the spreadsheet program to manipulate
and graph data.
Following is a description of how to create a graph of a data channel file
using Excel.
1 Create an ASCII text file of a Gilson data file using the Export Data
command as described above.
2 Iconize or exit UniPoint.
3 From the Program Manager, start the Excel program (EXCEL.EXE).
An empty spreadsheet appears.
4 Choose Open from Excel’s File menu.
5 Once the Open dialog box appears, use the list boxes and text box to
choose the data channel file. When the correct file name appears in
the File Name box, click on OK.
The spreadsheet for the file appears. Column A lists the time, and
column B lists the corresponding voltage.
6 Highlight column B. To do this, click the cross mouse pointer next to
the B column heading.
7 Choose New from the File menu.
8 When the dialog box appears, select Chart. Then click on OK to
generate a plot for the data.
9 Use the Excel menu and toolbar items to make any necessary
modifications to the plot.
January 1998
17-7
Exporting report information
You can convert report information into a text format that can be viewed
and manipulated in spreadsheet program.
Each line of the exported information includes the text currently shown
in the table, separated by tabs, plus the path, file name, and description
of the sample. A carriage return marks the end of each line. If you don’t
want a column of information exported, remove the column using the
Format Columns commands within the Table menu.
creating an export file
To produce an export file for the information shown in the table:
1 Ensure that information shown in the table is what you want
exported.
2 From the File menu, choose the Export command and display its
cascading menu. Then choose Report.
3 Type the name of the export file to create in the Export File box. Use
the .TXT extension.
4 Use the list box to select each sample whose report information is
exported.
5 To add the exported information to the end of the specified file,
choose the Append check box. This option enables you to place
report information for different samples in the same export file.
6 Choose Export to generate the file.
appending to existing file
You can add information to an existing text file. This feature enables
you to place report information for multiple samples in the same export
file.
1 Make sure the information shown in the table is what you want
exported.
2 Choose Export Report from the File menu.
17-8
January 1998
3 Use the Browse button to locate an existing export file.
4 Choose the Append check box.
5 Choose Export to add the information to the end of the file.
viewing report information
in Excel
You can view Gilson text files in a spreadsheet program such as
Microsoft Excel. Use Excel to manipulate the information in the file.
1 Create the text file for the report(s) as described above.
2 Iconize or exit UniPoint.
3 From the Program Manager, start the Excel program (EXCEL.EXE).
An empty spreadsheet appears.
4 Choose Open from Excel’s File menu.
5 Once the Open dialog box appears, use the list boxes and text box to
choose the export file. When the correct file name appears in the File
Name box, click on OK.
The spreadsheet for the file appears.
6 Use the Excel menu items to make any necessary modifications to the
spreadsheet, such as increasing the size of the sample ID column so
that the entire sample ID can be seen.
January 1998
17-9
Exporting calibration information
You can convert calibration information into a text format that can be
viewed and manipulated in spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel.
Each line of the exported information includes the text currently shown in
the table, separated by tabs, plus the path and file name of the calibration.
A carriage return marks the end of each line. There are no headings—only
exported information. If you do not want a column of information exported, remove the column using the Format Columns command in the
Table menu.
creating an export file
To produce an export file for the calibration information shown in the
table of a Calibration window:
1 Ensure that columns shown in the table pane are what you want
exported. You can remove columns from display and from export
using the Format Columns command in the Table menu.
2 From the File menu, choose the Export command.
3 Type the name of the export file to create in the Export File box. Use the
.TXT extension.
4 Use the Calibrations list box to select the calibration table(s) whose
peak information is exported.
5 Use the Peak Selection area to indicate if information for all standard
peaks or for the peak currently selected in the Calibration window is
exported.
6 If the file listed in the Export File box already exists, choose the
Append box to add exported peak information to the end of the file.
If Append is not selected, the file is overwritten with the exported
information.
7 Choose Export to generate the file.
Refer to page 17-8 for information on viewing the file in Microsoft Excel.
17-10
January 1998
Appendix A
System Configuration
In order to issue commands to Gilson devices connected to the HPLC
system, UniPoint must know about those devices. The first time
UniPoint was started, a message box appeared indicating that the
software was going to scan the Gilson communications channel
(GSIOC) for Gilson devices. If the scan was performed and setup
parameters were indicated for located devices, a default configuration
file DEFAULT.CFG was created.
Multi-system users. If you are controlling two or more HPLC systems
with UniPoint, create separate directories for each system, for example,
SYSTEM1 and SYSTEM2. Store the configuration file and all method,
results, etc., files in the directory for that system. See page 1-8 for more
information.
January 1998
A-1
Working with configuration files
The configuration file not only identifies the names of Gilson devices
connected to the HPLC system but also identifies any resources that a
device can contribute to system operation, such as inputs, outputs, and
analog channels. Additionally, if you have Gilson 730 Sampler Manager Software, you indicate that in the configuration file also.
System configuration information is stored in control methods, protocols, and routines because those file types contain commands for
controlling instruments. If you are running multiple HPLC systems, you
need to check the name of the configuration being used before creating
any of those file types.
Reviewing configuration file
A configuration file remains the default until another one is selected. To
see what devices UniPoint thinks are currently turned on and connected
to the computer, do the following:
1 If necessary, close all open document windows. (The Navigator can
remain open.)
2 Choose Default System Configuration from the File menu.
The Default System Configuration dialog appears. Its list box shows
the names of Gilson devices installed in your HPLC system.
3 Verify that all listed devices are correct for your HPLC system. Do
one of the following:
• If all devices are listed, choose OK to exit the dialog.
• If only the computer system is listed, see Scanning the GSIOC on
page A-6 to install devices quickly.
• If a device is missing or you need to change a device, see
Modifying the configuration file on page A-3.
• If UniPoint controls multiple HPLC systems and the appropriate
configuration is not shown, see Searching for configuration file
on page A-6.
A-2
January 1998
system configuration
Modifying the configuration file
If a new device is added to the system or if you want to remove a device
from the system configuration, you can do so.
Note: Changing the configuration after control method, protocol, and
routines file have been created may cause a message to appear
when you open one of those files . Refer to Configuration checks
on page A-7.
1 Access the Default System Configuration dialog as described on page
A-2.
2 Refer to the appropriate side bar below, depending on whether you
want to add, delete, or replace a device.
adding device
To add a device:
1 Choose Install. The dialog displays additional options.
2 Select the device in the Known Devices list box.
3 If necessary, indicate (or modify) the unit ID for the device. For most
devices, UniPoint inserts the default unit ID for the device.
If a default ID is not indicated, refer to the user’s guide for the device
for information on checking and setting its unit ID.
4 Choose Add. The information for the device is inserted into the Unit
ID/Installed Devices list box.
If the device requires additional information, a Setup dialog appears.
Enter information for the device and choose OK. In most cases, the
Setup dialog supplies options to assist you in specifying device
parameters.
Note: For a 232 XL or 233 XL Injector, the setup parameters request
the location of the right rinse station. If the rinse station is
located above the right valve, choose Right. If the rinse station
is located to the left of the right valve, choose Center.
January 1998
A-3
deleting device
If a device is no longer in your system’s hardware configuration, you
can remove it from the configuration file.
To remove a device from the configuration file:
1 Choose Install, if it hasn’t already been selected.
2 Select the device in the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box.
3 Choose Remove to delete the device from the Unit ID/Installed
Devices list box.
replacing device
To replace a device with a different device:
1 Choose Install. The dialog displays additional information.
2 Select the new device in the Known Devices list box.
3 If necessary, indicate (or modify) the unit ID for the device. For most
devices, UniPoint inserts the default unit ID for the device.
4 Select the device being replaced in the Unit ID/Installed Devices list
box.
5 Choose Replace. If the replacement device requires setup parameters
you need to indicate those before change is made.
saving changes
To save changes to the configuration file:
1 Choose Save As to display a dialog box for saving the updated
information. In most cases, you want to replace the old configuration
file with the updated information.
Searching for configuration file
If you are controlling multiple HPLC systems, you may need to select a
different configuration file and load its information into the computer’s
memory.
A-2.
The name of the configuration file whose information is being shown
appears at the bottom of the dialog. Its associated devices appear in
the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box.
A-4
January 1998
2 If the correct file name is not shown, choose Browse. The Browse
System Configuration dialog appears.
3 In the File Name box, type or select the configuration file you want to
open. If the file is not listed in the box, do one or more of the following:
The System Configuration dialog re-appears and the Unit ID/Installed
Devices list box contains information for the selected file.
Scanning the GSIOC for devices
You can have UniPoint search for Gilson devices that are turned on and
connected to the Gilson Serial Input Channel (GSIOC). This simplifies the
setup of the configuration file.
A-2.
2 Choose Install. The dialog displays additional information.
3 Choose Scan.
4 When the message box appears, verify that all instruments are turned
on and then choose OK. UniPoint scans for unit IDs from 63 to 0. If a
device requires additional setup parameters, a dialog box appears
requesting the setup information.
Note: If the software locates a 402 Syringe Pump during the scan, it
selects the 402 Left Syringe Pump description and places it in
the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box. If the pump is
configured differently, replace the 402 Left Syringe Pump
description with the correct configuration. Choose 402 Dual
Syringe Pump, 402 Dual Syringe Pump w/ Tee, or 402 Right
Syringe Pump.
If you have a 122 Fluorometer connected to a 606 GSIOC to RS232 Converter, the software selects the 606 GSIOC to RS-232
Converter description and places it in the Unit ID/Installed
Devices list box. Replace the 606 GSIOC to RS-232 Converter
description with 122 Fluorometer Converter.
January 1998
A-5
Note: If you are using a 233 XL or 215 for both injection and
collection, the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box must include
the device as an Auto Injector and a Fraction Collector. If you
scanned the GSIOC, the scan identifies the device as an Auto
Injector. You must add the device as a Fraction Collector to
the Unit ID/Installed Devices list box. When you add the
device as a Fraction Collector, use the same unit ID as the
Auto Injector device.
For a 232 XL or 233 XL Injector, the setup options request the
location of the right rinse station. If the rinse station is located
above the right valve, choose Right. If the rinse station is
located to the left of the right valve, choose Center.
Note: When UniPoint locates a VALVEMATE during the scan, it
selects the VALVEMATE (2 Positions) device and prompts
you for valve information. If a multi-position valve is
installed, you should click on OK when the Device Setup
dialog appears and continue the GSIOC scan. After the scan
completes, replace the VALVEMATE (2 Positions) device with
the VALVEMATE (4 - 8 Positions) device and indicate the
requested valve information. When you create a control
method, protocol, or routines file, UniPoint assigns the default
description VALVEMATE followed by its unit ID to the
installed VALVEMATE.
6 Choose OK to exit the Default System Configuration dialog and save
any changes to the current file.
Specifying system units
In the configuration file, you can view and modify the pressure and if
applicable the temperature units used by devices, such as pumps,
pressure regulators, and temperature controllers.
A-2.
2 Choose Units.
3 When the Units Selection dialog appears, choose the appropriate
units for pressure and temperature.
4 Choose OK.
5 Choose OK to exit the System Configuration dialog and save any
changes to the current file. Or, choose Save to copy the configuration
file to a new name (see Saving changes to configuration file if you
need more information).
A-6
January 1998
Saving changes to the configuration file
To save the changes to the file:
1 Choose the Save As button in the Default System Configuration
dialog.
2 When the Save As dialog appears, use its options to assign a name
and select a storage location for the configuration file.
3 If a configuration file already exists for the given name, a message
box appears. Choose OK to replace the existing file or choose Cancel
to stop the replacement.
Configuration checks
When a control method, protocol, or routine file is created, UniPoint
stores the following configuration information in it:
• Path and name of the configuration file
• Unit IDs and names of devices in the configuration file
The software obtains this information from the configuration file
indicated as the default. See page A-2 for procedures on identifying the
software’s default configuration file.
When the control method, protocol, or routines file is opened, UniPoint
checks the information in the file against the information in the configuration file stored on disk. To ensure compatibility, UniPoint also checks
the configuration information in protocol file when its loaded into a
control method and the information in a routine files its loaded into a
protocol file. When comparing configuration information, UniPoint
checks to see if the corresponding device names and unit IDs can be
found in both files.
January 1998
A-7
configuration cannot be found If you open a file and UniPoint cannot locate the configuration file used
to create it, UniPoint displays <internal> in the System Configuration
dialog accessed via the File menu.
You can use the Browse button to locate the configuration file if it was
moved to a new location.
Or, you can use the Save button to store the configuration to a file so it
can be located the next time the file is opened.
configuration comparison
You see a Configuration Comparison box if the configuration stored in
the method, protocol, or routines file does not match the current HPLC
configuration. You also see a Configuration Comparison box if you
browse for a different configuration, from the System Configuration
dialog, and the selected configuration does not match the configuration
for the file.
The list boxes, in the Configuration Comparison box, display the
configuration information so you can see the differences.
The flow chart on the next page identifies different messages boxes that
may appear depending on what your action is during UniPoint’s
configuration comparison procedure.
When you associate a routines file with a protocol or a protocol with a
control method, UniPoint also checks the configuration information
stored in the files to ensure they are compatible.
If the control method does not include a device specified in the protocol
or the protocol does not include a device specified in the routines file,
you see the following.
If the control method or protocol includes a different model number of
the same type of a device or the same device type with a different unit,
you see the Functional Device Exchange box, shown in the flow chart on
the next page.
A-8
January 1998
Appendix B
Sample Tracking
Sample tracking enables you to see the injector tray location from which
a sample came and/or the fraction collector location(s) into which its
eluent was collected. The tray information along with the chromatogram and sample list can be viewed in the Results window.
Results window
Injector tray
Fraction collector tray
Samples dialog
Following are details on pre-run option setup and post-run viewing for
sample tracking. You must have a Gilson GSIOC-compatible injector
and/or fraction collector to use the sample tracking capability.
January 1998
B-1
Before the run
injector protocol/routines file
Before the run, tell UniPoint which tube position to associate with the
injected sample. You do this by selecting the Track Sample check box for
the Move to Sample Location command, accessed via the Event menu’s
Injector command.
Note: If the Track Sample check box is selected more than once for a
sample, UniPoint uses the last tube position marked for sample
tracking.
If using a Gilson-supplied injection protocol, modify the sample location
routine in the routines file as described below. This change will
automatically be used by each protocol that uses the routines file:
1 Open the routines file, INJ_ROUT.GIR. At UniPoint installation, this
file is placed in C:\GILSON\UNIPOINT\INJ_RP.
2 Choose Routines from the View menu and select the sample location
routine from the list box. Then choose View.
3 In the table pane, double-click on the step for the Move Arm to
Sample Location command.
4 When the Injector Event dialog appears, choose the Track Sample
check box and choose Change. Then choose Done to exit the dialog.
B-2
January 1998
sample tracking
5 In the table pane, notice that <Tracked> now appears in the step for
the Move to Sample Location command.
6 Save the change to the routines file by choosing Save from the File
menu.
If using your own protocol, decide which tube location to associate with
the sample. If the protocol does sample preparation steps, you can choose
the initial location for the sample before any mixing or dilution steps or
choose the location from which the prepared sample was aspirated for
injection.
control method
In the control method, do the following.
1 Use the Device menu to set device descriptions and options for the
injector, fraction collector, pumps, data channels, and other devices.
For the injector, check that a description is assigned to the injector and
its dilutor or syringe pump, and create or select the protocol file and
tray file. You can access the Tray Editor via the Injector dialog.
For the fraction collector:
• Check that a description is assigned to the fraction collector, and
create or select the tray file. You can access the Tray Editor via the
Fraction Collector dialog.
January 1998
• If collecting peaks, choose the Options button to access the Fraction
Collector Options dialog. Then, choose the channel to monitor for
fraction collection and set the mV full scale value to 10 mV. The mV
full scale value specified in this dialog box must be the same as that
set for the channel in the Strip Chart Options dialog, described
below. You can also use the Fraction Collector Options dialog to
indicate a delay volume. UniPoint’s on-line help provides
information on how to calculate delay volume based on the length
and diameter of tubing.
B-3
• If collecting peaks, choose the Options button to access the Strip
Chart Options dialog. In that dialog, choose the channel to monitor
for fraction collection and set its maximum full scale value to 10
mV. The mV full scale value specified in this dialog box must be the
same as that set for the channel in the Fraction Collector Options
dialog, described above.
2 Use the Event menu to specify the timed instructions to send to the
injector, fraction collector, pump, and other devices, and to start and
stop data channel collection.
For fraction collection, you can set events to collect by time, volume, or
peak.
Refer to the following examples for injector and fraction collector control
when creating your control method. The injector is controlled via a
Gilson-supplied injection protocol.
Variable names are in all capital letters (for example, TUBE).
Example 1. The following example uses the partial loop fill protocol to
control the injector. The fraction collector events collect by time.
Time
0.00
0.02
0.03
0.05
0.10
0.19
0.20
0.21
2.50
6.00
7.00
Device(s)
0.1% acetic acid / acetonitrile
injection = partial loop fill
Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector
UV/VIS Detector
System Controller
Data Channels
Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector
Data Channels
Command
0.30(ml/min): 86.50% 0.1% acetic acid, 13.50% acetonitrile
<start> TUBE, INJECT_VOLUME
Lock/Unlock Front Panel Lock
Set Time per Tube TIME_PER_FRACTION
Set Fraction Site FRACTION_SITE
Autozero Channels
Synchronize
Start
Start Collection
Stop Collection
Stop
If you want to collect by volume, set the following command at 0.05 min.
Time
0.05
B-4
Device(s)
Fraction Collector
Command
Set Volume per Tube VOL_PER_FRACTION
January 1998
sample tracking
Example 2. The following control method listing contains fraction
collector events for peak collection by slope. It controls the injector
using the center loop fill protocol.
Time
0.00
0.02
0.03
0.05
0.11
0.15
0.19
0.20
0.21
2.50
6.00
7.00
Device(s)
0.1% acetic acid / acetonitrile
injection = center loop fill
Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector
UV/VIS Detector
System Controller
Data Channels
Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector
Data Channels
analysis method
Command
0.30(ml/min): 86.50% 0.1% acetic acid, 13.50% acetonitrile
<start> TUBE, INJECT_VOLUME, 4
Lock/Unlock Front Panel Lock
Collect Positive Peaks Yes
Set Peak Width & Peak Sensitivity PEAK_WIDTH, PEAK_SENSITIVITY
Set Fraction Site FRACTION_SITE
Autozero Channels
Synchronize
Start
Start Collection
Stop Collection
Stop
In the analysis method, you can add a Fraction Site(s) column to the
report. This column identifies the tube location(s) into which a
sample’s eluent was collected.
1 Use the Analysis Method window to set analysis conditions as
required by your application. See Section 7 in the UniPoint User’s
Guide for details.
2 From the Report menu, choose Column Formats.
3 Add the Fraction Site(s) column to the unknown report format. To do
this:
a) Select the Unknown Report option button.
b) In the Column Contents list box, click beneath the last column to
add a column there. Or, to insert the column between two
columns, click on the column before which you want the new
column to be placed.
c) Choose Fraction Site(s) in the Contents list box.
d) Choose Insert.
e) Choose OK to exit the dialog.
4 Repeat the above to add the column to the calibrator, unknown
summary, and calibrator summary report layouts.
January 1998
B-5
After the run
To track the sample, open the data or report file. Then use the commands in the View menu of the Results window to display the injector
tray and/or fraction collector tray, or to select a different sample. If an
injector tray or fraction collector tray is not associated with the sample,
its command is gray in the View menu. An example Results window is
shown on page B-1.
The Display All command automatically sizes and shows the Results
window, Samples dialog, injector tray (if available), and fraction collector tray (if available).
To view information for a different sample, double-click on its description in the Samples dialog. You can also double-click on a tube in the
injector tray or fraction collector tray and view information for the
corresponding sample. A message appears if there is not a sample
associated with a selected tube location.
You can also view the fraction site(s) associated with one or more areas
of the chromatogram. When you use the following procedures, the area
between selected fraction collector marks is white while non-selected
areas are gray. The corresponding fraction site(s) in the Fraction
Location window are red and the other sites are cyan (light blue).
To view the fraction site(s) for:
Do the following:
single point on the plot
1 Click on the cross-hairs tool ( ).
2 Move the mouse pointer to a position between
fraction collector begin ( ) and end ( ) marks
on the plot.
3 Click and release the left mouse button.
area on the plot
1 Click on the cross-hairs tool.
2 Move the mouse pointer to the plot.
3 Click the left mouse button and drag to enclose
the fraction collector begin and end marks
within a box. Release the mouse button.
multiple points or areas
on the plot
1 Click on the cross-hairs tool.
2 While pressing the Ctrl key, select fraction
collector begin and end marks as described
above. Then release the Ctrl key.
To turn off the cross-hairs tool, click on the arrow tool (
).
To remove the gray background, click on the original view tool (
).
To enlarge or reduce the size of the tray in the injector tray or fraction
collector tray window, click in the window using the right mouse button.
You see a Scale menu for selecting sizing options.
B-6
January 1998
Appendix C
File Extensions
Following are the extensions of files that can be created or opened by
you within UniPoint.
January 1998
Extension
File Type
Description
.GCT
control method
Specifies device control information to be
used during a run.
.GAN
analysis method
Defines the conditions used to analyze
acquired data.
.GOP
operations list
Lists step-by-step instructions for the
run-time actions of the HPLC system.
.GDT
data
Contains the raw data acquired during a
run, plus information on how the data
was collected.
.GR?
report
Contains report information for analyzed
samples. The question mark is a number
between 1 and 9.
.GB?
calibration
Contains the calibration plot(s) generated
for each standard peak during a run or
batch re-analysis. The question mark is a
number between 1 and 9.
.GAR
re-analysis list
Is a list of information for samples
injected during a run; provides for quick
re-analysis of data
.GLG
log
Is a record of the events that took place
during a run.
.GWK
workspace
Stores the arrangement of document
windows as they appeared on-screen.
.GIP
.GGP
injector protocol
generic protocol
Contains program-like instructions
to be executed by Gilson device(s).
.GIR
.GGR
injector routine
generic routine
Consist of individual commands that
have been grouped together; used within
protocols.
.CFG
configuration
Identifies the components of the HPLC
system.
C-1
Appendix D
Password Protection
In UniPoint, you can protect document types from being modified and
saved to the same name unless the user indicates the appropriate
password.
In the operations and re-analysis files, you can indicate that columns for
a password protected file can be modified even if the user did not enter
the correct password.
January 1998
D-1
Setting up password protection
When UniPoint is installed, no password has been indicated. To set a
password and choose document windows to password protect, do the
following:
1 Close all open document windows using the Close All command in
the Window menu. If it appears, the Navigator may remain onscreen.
2 Choose Password Protection in the File menu.
3 When the New Password dialog appears, type the password in the
box and choose OK.
4 Verify the password you just entered by retyping it and choosing OK.
(If the password does not match, you see a message box. Repeat the
process of indicating the password and then verifying it.)
5 When the Password Protection dialog appears, select the document
type in the list box and choose the Password Required check box.
6 Repeat the previous step for each document type to password protect.
7 Choose OK.
D-2
January 1998
password protection
Indicating new password
To indicate a new password:
the Window menu. If it appears, the Navigator may remain onscreen.
3 When Password Verification dialog appears, type the current
password and choose OK.
4 When the Password Protection dialog (shown on previous page)
appears, choose New Password.
5 When the New Password dialog (shown on previous page) appears,
type the password in the box and choose OK.
6 Verify the password you just entered by retyping it and choosing OK.
(If the password does not match you see a message indicating that.
You then repeat the process of indicating the password and then
verifying it.)
7 When the Password Protection dialog appears, choose OK to exit.
Removing password protection
To remove password protection from a document type:
the Window menu. If it appears, the Navigator may be left on-screen.
3 When prompted, type the current password.
The Password Protection dialog appears.
4 Select the document type in the list box and remove the X from the
Password Required check box.
5 Choose OK.
January 1998
D-3
To remove password protection completely:
1 Access the Password Protection dialog as described above.
2 Choose New Password.
3 When the dialog appears, make sure the text box is blank and choose
OK twice.
Unlocking columns in operations or re-analysis list
You can remove password protection from columns in an operations or
re-analysis file. This enables a user that does not have password
authority to modify information in the file without entering a password.
The user cannot save the changes to the existing file but can save them to
a new file.
unlocking columns in a file
1 Open the operations or re-analysis file. Indicate the correct password
when prompted.
2 From the Table menu, choose Format Columns.
Or, double-click on one of the column headings of the on-screen table.
3 Select the column in the column heading list box.
4 Remove the X from the Password Protect check box.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each column to unlock.
6 Choose Done to exit the dialog box.
7 Save the changes to the file before exiting the document window.
the next time the file is
opened
If the user indicates the correct password the next time the operations
or re-analysis file is opened, the user can modify information in any of
the columns.
If the user does not indicate the correct password when the file is
opened, the user can only modify information in unlocked columns.
Entry boxes for password protected columns are grayed in dialog
box(es).
D-4
January 1998
Appendix E
Merging Security Keys
The information in this appendix applies only to users who run more
than one kind of Gilson key-protected software on a single computer.
If a cable (other than the mouse cable) prevents access to the security key,
turn off the computer, detach the cable, restart the computer and Microsoft Windows. If a device error occurs at startup, ignore the message;
press any key to continue. Then follow these key merge instructions.
To merge the security codes from an existing key into a new key:
1 Double-click on the Key Utility icon in the Gilson Applications box.
2 When the Gilson Key Utility window appears, choose Tutorial from
the Keys menu to learn more about Gilson security keys.
To advance through the tutorial, point and click on the Ok button in
each dialog box.
3 In the box labeled Security Key, point and click on the name(s) of the
program(s) in the existing key. An X appears in the adjacent
square(s).
4 Point and click on the right Move arrow to move the codes into
temporary memory.
Do not shut the computer off or restart (reboot) the computer when
codes are in temporary storage!
5 Remove the key from the 506C System Interface and replace it with
the UniPoint key.
6 Point and click on the name(s) of the program(s) in the temporary
box. An X appears in the adjacent square(s).
7 Point and click on the left Move arrow to move the codes into the new
key.
January 1998
E-1
8 Check that the program name(s) are now listed in the Security Key
box.
9 Point and double-click on the control-menu box at the upper left
corner of the Key Utility window to quit the program. If you do not
quit the Key Utility program correctly, essential key information is
lost at shutdown.
10 If you do not have any key information in temporary memory, you
may turn off your computer. If you removed an interfering cable,
reconnect it now.
11 Restart your computer and UniPoint.
E-2
January 1998
Appendix F
Calculations
amount
For calibrators, the peak amount indicated in the peak table.
For unknowns reported in calibration report types, the amount of component
is determined using the calibration plot generated for calibrators.
If you specified nominal and actual amounts for an unknown, UniPoint
automatically adjusts the amount of material in each calculated peak and
reports instead the amount that would have been found if the sample had
contained the nominal amount of unknown:
For unknown samples in internal standard reports, UniPoint automatically
adjusts for material that was lost during sample preparation and injection. The
software uses the following formula:
Adjusted Amount A = Amount A x (IS Actual Amount ÷ IS Observed Amount)
where:
January 1998
Adjusted Amount A
Is the adjusted amount calculated for component A in
the unknown sample. For the component peak, this
amount is appears under the Amount (int std)
heading in the unknown report.
Amount A
Is the amount of component A in the unknown
sample. UniPoint obtains this amount using the
calibration table generated for calibrator injections for
component A. To report this amount, add the
Amount column heading to the unknown report
format. See Report format review and modification in
Section 7.
F-1
IS Actual Amount
Is the amount of internal standard added to the
unknown sample. You entered this amount in the
Peak Table dialog or in the operations list if the
Internal Standard Actual Amount check box was set
the Peak Table dialog of the analysis method. For
the internal standard peak, this amount appears
under the Amount (int std) heading in unknown
report.
IS Observed Amount
Is the amount of internal standard peak observed in
the unknown injection. UniPoint obtains this
amount using the calibration table generated for
calibrator injections for the internal standard.
If you specified the actual internal standard amount for an unknown,
UniPoint adjusts reported peak amounts:
If you specified actual amount, actual internal standard amount, and nominal
amount for an internal standard report type, UniPoint calculates the reported
peak amount using the above equation. It then inserts that amount for the
calculated peak amount in the equation used if actual and nominal amounts
were indicated.
amount %
Percentage of the peak in relation to the total amount of all named peaks.
area %
F-2
January 1998
chromatography calculations
asymmetry
Factor that identifies the shape of the peak. If this value is 1, the peak is
symmetric. If the peak is skewed to the right (tailing peak), this value is greater
than 1. If the peak is skewed to the left (fronting peak), this value is less than
1.
back resolution
Resolution of a peak in relation to next peak.
back slope
Slope at half height of peak’s descending edge.
capacity factor
Measures the degree of retention.
coefficient of determination
coefficient of variation
correlation coefficient
January 1998
A measure of the mutual relationship between two variables.
F-3
end value
The mV (or user units) at the end of the peak.
front resolution
Resolution of a peak in relation to previous peak.
front slope
Slope at half height of peak’s ascending edge.
height
Distance from the baseline to the maximum of the peak.
height %
mean
where x is a measurement (such as area, height, amount, and so on) and n is
the number of measurements.
peak start time
Elapsed time between the point of injection and the start of the peak.
peak end time
Elapsed time between the point of injection and the end of the peak.
peak width at half height
Peak Width at Half Height = Time at Half Height of Descending Edge -–
Time at Half Height of Ascending Edge
F-4
January 1998
chromatography calculations
peak width at 10%
Peak Width at 10% = Time at 10% Height of Descending Edge -–
Time at 10% Height of Ascending Edge
plates
This value can be used to determine column efficiency.
% concentration
retention time
Elapsed time between the point of injection and the maximum of the peak.
standard deviation
where n is the number samples in which the peak was integrated and x is the
area (or height) determined each time the peak was integrated.
standard error of estimate
start value
The mV (or user units) at the start of the peak.
tailing factor
January 1998
F-5
Appendix G
Peak Table
Retention time windows
Description
Reference and non-reference peaks in calibration and unknown samples
are located by matching actual retention times to retention times listed in
the analysis method's peak table. To compensate for possible retention
time drift, the software defines a time window around each expected
peak. It finds an expected peak if that peak lies within the retention time
window.
You can modify the Absolute Error and/or Relative Error parameters to
control the width of retention time windows. The default settings (Abs.
Error = 0.10 min, Rel. Error = 5.0%) are appropriate for many separations.
Absolute error is a constant amount of time flanking a peak’s nominal
retention time. The software automatically searches for eluted peaks at
every named retention time plus or minus this amount of time.
Relative error is a percentage of peak retention time. Relative error, and,
therefore, the width of retention time windows, increase with increasing
retention time. Because late-eluting peaks are often broader than early
peaks, the software adds this correction factor to improve the likelihood
of locating late-eluting peaks.
You can calculate the beginning and end of any peak’s time window
using the following formulas:
Beginning: Ret. Time - [Abs. Error - (Ret. Time x Rel. Error)]
End:
Ret. Time + (Abs. Error + Ret. Time x Rel. Error)
January 1998
G-1
Setting time window parameters
It is easy to understand how absolute error contributes to the width of
retention time windows since it is simply a constant amount of time that
brackets every named retention time. The contribution of relative error is
harder to grasp because it varies with retention time.
The following diagram and table show what happens when absolute
error is held constant at 0.1 minutes and the relative error is varied (1%,
5% or 10% of retention time). The time windows were calculated as
described above.
Notice that the retention time of Peak 3 (9.94 minutes) was very close to
the upper limit (9.98 minutes) of the windows at 1% relative error. In
this example, relative error should be set higher than 1% to avoid
missing peaks.
Nominal Ret. Time
Actual Ret. Time
Window (1% rel. error)
Peak 1
2.27
2.30
2.15 - 2.39
2.06 - 2.48
1.94 - 2.60
Peak 2
4.77
4.85
4.62 - 4.92
4.43 - 5.11
4.19 - 5.35
Peak 3
9.78
9.94
9.58 - 9.98
9.19 - 10.37
8.70 - 10.86
Effect of Relative Error on Width of Retention Time Windows
G-2
January 1998
peak table
Resolving overlapping windows
Retention time windows must be wide enough to permit detection of
every peak yet narrow enough to minimize windows overlapping.
Overlapping can occur if windows are too wide or if peaks are too close
together. Since the software cannot know whether a peak belongs to the
earlier or later window in an overlapping pair, it uses the following
algorithm during data analysis to revise the limits of both windows and
to establish a new boundary between them. The following examples are
presented in the order of least to most amount of overlap.
Type 1. When the beginning of Window 2 occurs after the midpoint of
Window 1, a new boundary is established at the midpoint of the overlapping region.
Type 2. When the beginning of Window 2 occurs before the midpoint of
Window 1, a new boundary is established midway between the midpoint and end of Window 1.
Type 3. When the midpoint of Window 2 occurs at any time during
Window 1, a new boundary is established midway between the center of
Window 1 and the center of Window 2.
January 1998
G-3
Using the peak table during data analysis
When UniPoint begins to analyze data collected during a run, it looks
for the reference peaks and non-reference peaks that you identified in the
peak table. It knows where to look because you set the peak retention
times and retention time window parameters.
After finding the peaks, UniPoint checks the retention times of those
peaks and updates its internal peak table so it knows when to expect
those peaks in the next step.
If the current method is generates a calibration type report, the software
uses the amounts listed in the peak table. It then uses information from
the calibration table to report results about the data collected during the
run.
After a calibration run, UniPoint automatically saves the calibration
table to file.
reasons for missing peaks
The software might fail to identify reference or non-reference peaks if:
• the peak width and peak sensitivity were incompatible with chromatogram peaks
• the wrong sample was injected
• changing chromatographic conditions (flow rate, mobile phase
composition, pressure, temperature) or leaks in the system resulted in
inconsistent retention times
• an insufficient number of or a poor choice of reference peaks were
named
• the absolute error and/or relative error need to be adjusted.
G-4
January 1998
peak table
Locating reference peaks
When you create a peak table, you can specify retention times for one or
more reference peaks. The software looks for peaks named in the peak
table whose actual retention times fall within the reference peaks’ time
windows.
Use reference peaks with cautiously. An ideal reference peak is a large,
well separated, isolated peak with a consistent retention time.
If, during data analysis, it finds a peak in a retention time window, it
presumes it found the desired reference peak. As the software identifies
reference peaks, it constructs an internal graph of actual retention times
versus expected retention times.
If two or more peaks fall within the same reference peak time window, it
chooses the largest one as the reference peak. If two peaks in a window
are equally tall, the earliest peak is chosen as the reference peak.
January 1998
G-5
Locating non-reference peaks
Using the internal graph, described on the previous page, the software
updates the expected retention times (and retention time windows) for
all non-reference peaks named in the Analysis Peak Table. It then looks
for non-reference peaks named on the peak table whose actual retention
times fall within a corrected retention time window.
If the software finds such a peak, it presumes it is the desired nonreference peak. If two or more non-reference peaks fall within the same
window, it chooses the earliest peak whose retention time is closest to
the window’s center.
G-6
January 1998
peak table
Updating peak retention times
Over the course of multi-loop runs, retention times could drift so much
that peaks would elute outside their original time windows. To ensure
that the software always knows the most likely retention time of each
named peak, the software continuously updates the retention time
windows of reference and non-reference peaks on its internal peak table.
Note: You can turn off peak tracking in the analysis method. See page
7-20.
In the first loop through any run, the software expects that named peaks
have the retention time specified in the analysis method's peak table. In
each subsequent loop, it adjusts the expected retention time according to
information it gathers during the run.
The new midpoint of each peak’s retention time window is calculated as
a weighted sum of each peak’s previously determined window midpoint
(75%) plus its retention time in the current loop (25%). A weighted sum
is necessary to minimize the influence of a single bad loop in a multiloop run.
For example, after several loops, the midpoint of a peak’s retention time
window is at 3 minutes. In the next loop, that peak’s retention time was
3.2 minutes. On the software’s internal peak table, the midpoint of the
retention time window is adjusted to 3.05 minutes.
(3 minutes x 0.75) + (3.2 minutes x 0.25) = 3.05 minutes
This updating only occurs if all reference peaks are found in the current
loop. If all reference peaks are found, the retention time window of each
reference and non-reference peak found during that loop is updated as
described above.
January 1998
G-7
Generating a calibration table
While creating an analysis method, you listed in the peak table an
amount for each standard peak at each calibration level. When you ran
that method, you injected calibrator samples for each level and optionally unknown samples.
•
•
•
•
All repeats at calibration level 1
All repeats at calibration level 2 (if used)
All repeats at additional calibration levels (if used)
Unknown samples
When analyzing a sample, the software determines the peak area (or
height) for each named component. For each peak, the software generates a calibration curve to determine the amount of that component in
each unknown sample.
A component’s calibration curve plots the average peak area (or height)
vs. amount injected at each level. You can choose between the following
types of calibration curves:
Point to Point. UniPoint connects the mean amount at each calibration
level using a linear segment. For a one-level calibration plot, UniPoint
generates a linear segment between the origin (0 area, 0 amount) and the
mean peak area at the calibration level.
Point to Point through Zero. UniPoint generates a linear segment between
the origin (0 area, 0 amount) and the mean peak area at the first calibration
level. It then connects the mean amount at each additional calibration level
using a linear segment.
Linear. Using a best fit method, UniPoint constructs a line that best
represents the set of means. This method minimizes the sum of the
squares of the error distance between each mean and the line.
Quadratic. UniPoint generates a smooth curve that best represents the
set of means. The curve may have one bend.
Cubic. UniPoint generates a smooth curve that best represents the set of
means. The curve may have two bends.
To determine the amount of that component in an unknown sample, the
software determines where that component’s peak area intersects the
calibration curve. The figure on the next page shows how the software
determines the amount for an unknown. A point to point calibration
curve is shown, but the same procedure is used for a linear regression,
quadratic, or cubic calibration curve.
G-8
January 1998
peak table
Multi-Level Calibration
January 1998
G-9
Appendix H
715 Data Translator
The 715 Data Translator converts data files created by Gilson 715
Software to a format that can be read by UniPoint.
starting and using the
data translator
To start and use the 715 Data Translator Software:
1 Double-click on its icon in the Gilson Applications box on the
Windows desktop.
The 715 Data Translator window appears.
2 In the UniPoint Data File box, type the path and name of the file to
which the converted data information is stored. To replace an
existing file with the converted information, click in this text box and
then use the Browse button to locate the file.
It is not necessary to enter the .GDT extension; the software automatically assigns that extension. Do not indicate an extension other than
.GDT.
If you do not indicate a complete path, the new file is stored to the
same path as the 715 file(s) being converted.
3 Use the Drives and Directories list boxes to locate the 715 files to
convert.
4 Use the File Name list box to select each file. In most cases, you want
to select all data files generated for a 715 run and store their information into one UniPoint file.
5 Choose Translate when all files are selected.
6 Choose Done to exit the 715 Data Translator Software.
January 1998
H-1
opening converted data file in To open and analyze sample information in a converted data file:
UniPoint
1 Start UniPoint by double-clicking its icon on the Program Manager.
2 Use the Navigator or Open command in the File menu to open the
converted data file.
The chromatogram plot for the first sample appears in a Results
window. See Section 11 for information for manipulating data in the
Results window.
3 To analyze the data, use the Navigator or New command in the File
menu to display the Analysis window for a new analysis method.
Use the options in the Analysis window to set analysis and reporting
conditions for the data file. See Section 7.
To name the data channel(s) without setting a control method, use
the Edit option in the Data Channel Scales dialog. See pages 7-10
through 7-12. The legend in the Results window identifies the data
channel(s) for the sample.
4 To generate a report file for the data file, use the Re-Analysis window.
See Section 13.
H-2
January 1998
Appendix I
GSIOC Utility
The GSIOC Utility allows you to issue commands to Gilson GSIOC
devices outside of UniPoint. Gilson Customer Service may ask you to
use this utility to verify that a device is connected correctly to the
computer.
How you use the GSIOC Utility varies depending on whether your
computer has Microsoft Windows 95/NT or Windows 3.1. Refer to the
appropriate section below.
Using the GSIOC utility within Windows 95/NT
The GSIOC Utility enables you to check communication between your
computer and a Gilson device. For communication to occur, the Gilson
device must be connected via an RS-232 connection to the computer or
connected via a GSIOC connection to a Gilson interface device that is
connected to the computer.
starting the GSIOC utility
To start the GSIOC Utility:
1
Double-click on GSIOC Utility icon in the Gilson Applications box
on the Windows desktop.
The GSIOC Utility window appears.
January 1998
I-1
reviewing the port, IRQ,
and baud information
In the GSIOC Utility window, review the COM port, IRQ, and baud
information. If any information is incorrect or missing, close the GSIOC
Utility and use the GSIOC Configuration Utility to update the information. Refer to Appendix K.
listing GSIOC devices
Using the GSIOC Utility, you can determine the devices currently
connected to the computer.
1
Click on Scan!
The Unit ID box displays the current GSIOC devices and their Unit
IDs.
If all Gilson devices are not listed, ensure that the proper RS-232 or
GSIOC connection exist between the computer and Gilson devices.
sending commands
Using the GSIOC Utility, you can send commands to Gilson devices.
Each device has a set of commands that it understands. A complete list
of GSIOC commands for any device is given in its user’s guide.
1
Type or select the unit ID assigned to the device in the Unit ID box.
If you don’t know the Unit ID, click on Scan! to reveal a list box with
the GSIOC devices and their Unit IDs.
2
In the Command box, type the command string.
Commands consist of strings of no more than 40 characters that
specify an instruction to the specified device.
3
Click on the appropriate command button to select a command type
according to the function of the desired command. The command is
issued when you select the command type.
Immediate commands request status information from a device.
These commands are executed immediately, temporarily
interrupting other commands in progress.
4
exiting GSIOC utility
I-2
Monitor the device’s response to your command in the Response
area of the box. The response to a successfully completed buffered
command is a period (.). Immediate status responses also appear in
this area. The user’s guide for a Gilson device describes the valid
responses to immediate commands.
To exit the software, click on
.
January 1998
GSIOC utility
Using the GSIOC utility within Windows 3.1
The GSIOC Utility, GSUTIL.EXE, enables you to set the baud rate and
communications port for the GSIOC and send commands to GSIOC
devices. When you exit this utility, any changes to the communications
port and baud rate are automatically made to the CONFIG.SYS file so
you do not have to edit that file. (See Appendix J for more information on
manually editing the CONFIG.SYS file.)
run GSIOC utility
To start the GSIOC Utility:
1 If necessary, exit UniPoint by double-clicking on the control-menu
box in the upper left corner.
2 Double-click on the GSIOC Utility icon in the Gilson Applications
box.
The GSIOC Utility window appears.
selecting communication port
The computer needs to know the communications port to which the
interface module is connected.
1 Choose the option button of the correct port.
selecting baud rate
To communicate with devices:
1 Choose the option button of the correct baud rate for the communications port.
Note: If you cannot get responses from GSIOC devices using a baud
rate of 19200, try 9600. However, Gilson recommends a baud
rate of 19200.
listing GSIOC devices
Using the GSIOC utility, you can determine the devices currently
connected to the GSIOC.
1 Click on Show List.
January 1998
I-3
A list box listing the current GSIOC devices and their Unit ID appears.
2 Use the scroll bar to display additional devices.
3 Click on OK to remove the list box from the screen.
send command
Using this utility, you can send commands to GSIOC devices. Each
device has a set of commands that it understands. Each command is
classified as buffered or immediate. A complete list of GSIOC commands
for any device is given in its User’s Guide.
1 Position the focus (flashing vertical line) in the Unit box, if it is not
already there.
2 Type the unit ID assigned to the device in the Unit ID box. If you
don’t know the Unit ID, click on Show List to reveal a list box with
the GSIOC devices and their Unit IDs.
3 In the Command box, type the command string.
Commands consist of strings of no more than 40 characters that
specify an instruction to the specified device.
4 Click on the appropriate command button to select a command type
according to the function of the desired command. The command is
issued when you select the command type.
Each GSIOC device’s User’s Guide tells you the command type of each
command.
5 Monitor the unit’s response to your command in the Response area of
the box. The response to a successfully completed buffered command
is a period (.). Immediate status responses also appear in this area.
Each GSIOC device’s User’s Guide describes the valid responses to
immediate commands.
I-4
January 1998
GSIOC utility
exit GSIOC utility
To exit the GSIOC Utility, double click on the control-menu box (
).
Any changes to the baud rate and communications port are automatically made to the CONFIG.SYS file so you do not have to edit the
CONFIG.SYS file.
January 1998
I-5
Appendix J
GILSON.SYS Device Driver File
Note: Refer to the information in this appendix only if your computer
has Windows 3.1.
The alterations described on the following pages are technical
and are not recommended to the novice computer user. If you see
device driver errors that you do not understand or cannot
resolve, call Gilson before modifying the CONFIG.SYS file.
Consult your DOS manual for a detailed description of the
CONFIG.SYS file.
The GILSON.SYS device driver file was installed when you installed
UniPoint. It enables the software to communicate with Gilson devices
connected to the 506C System Interface via the Gilson Serial Input/
Output Channel (GSIOC). It also enables the software to locate the
security key.
When you installed UniPoint, the device driver information is also
added to the CONFIG.SYS file of the computer. The software automatically adapts this information to your computer’s hardware. Following
is a description of the GILSON.SYS device driver line in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
January 1998
J-1
device driver line in
CONFIG.SYS
The complete syntax of the GILSON.SYS device driver line in the
CONFIG.SYS file is shown below. Parameters enclosed in brackets are
optional. If you include the optional parameters, do not type the brackets as shown!
DEVICE = [d:] [\path\] GILSON.SYS [/Pport] [/Brate] [/Ktxxxx] [/N]
where:
d: and \path\ tell the computer which drive and directory contain the
GILSON.SYS file. When UniPoint is installed, the default path to the
GILSON.SYS file is set to C:\GILSON\SYS.
/Pport identifies the number of the communications port to which the
506C System Interface is connected. For port, indicate 1, 2, 3, or 4 —
default is 1.
/Brate sets the baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 —
the default is 9600 for the GILSON.SYS driver. See baud rate, on page J3, for more information.
/Ktxxxx identifies the type (t) and address (xxxx) of the security key.
For type (t), indicate G, for 506C security key.
For address (xxxx), indicate the GSIOC address of the 506C's key port,
in hexadecimal, usually 3F.
/N tells the computer to complete the startup process uninterrupted,
even if it encounters errors.
J-2
January 1998
device driver file
Example: The GSIOC device driver is located in the \SYS directory of
the computer and the key is installed in a 506C System Interface. You
want to control Gilson devices through Com2: at 19200 baud. But you
do not want the computer to pause during start-up if it encounters an
error.
The device driver line in CONFIG.SYS should read:
DEVICE = \GILSON\SYS\GILSON.SYS /P2 /B19200 /KG3F /N
In the above line, 3F is the hexadecimal address of the key on the 506C System
Interface.
baud rate
The GILSON.SYS device driver line in your computer’s CONFIG.SYS file
must be set to the same baud rate as the interface module. The default
baud rate of the GILSON.SYS device driver is 9600.
During installation of Gilson software, the GILSON.SYS baud rate is
automatically set to 19200.
In other cases, you should manually override the GILSON.SYS default
baud rate to match that of the interface module. To change the baud rate
to 19200, follow these instructions:
1 Load the CONFIG.SYS file into your text editor or word processor (for
example, Windows Notepad).
CONFIG.SYS is usually located in the root directory of your
computer’s fixed disk (typically C:\).
2 Edit the line that reads:
DEVICE = C:\GILSON\SYS\GILSON.SYS
to read:
DEVICE = C:\GILSON\SYS\GILSON.SYS /B19200
3 Then save this change to the CONFIG.SYS file.
January 1998
J-3
Appendix K
Note: Refer to the information in this appendix only if your computer
has Windows 95.
The GSIOC Configuration Utility enables you to modify COM (serial
communications) port, IRQ (interrupt request), and baud rate information. You need to use this utility if you connect the liquid handler to a
different COM port after installing the Sampler Software. Or, you can
use this utility if incorrect information appears in the GSIOC Utility
window; see Appendix I.
1
To start the GSIOC Configuration Utility, double-click on the GSIOC
Configuration icon in the Gilson Applications box on the Windows
desktop. The Gsioc Configuration window appears.
2
In the Port box, indicate the computer’s serial communications port
(COM) port to which the Gilson interface device (such as the liquid
handler or 506C System Interface) is connected.
3
If necessary, indicate an interrupt request value in the Irq box.
An interrupt request is a signal to a computer’s microprocessor that
it should stop doing whatever it is currently doing and pay
attention to the cause of the interrupt. After the microprocessor has
“serviced” the interrupt, it goes back to doing whatever it was doing
before the interrupt occurred. For a Gilson device, an interrupt
request occurs when a character arrives from the device or when the
device disconnects.
January 1998
K-1
The customary interrupt request number assignments for COM ports
are as follow:
Port
1
2
3
4
K-2
IRQ
4
3
4
3
4
Click on 19200 or 9600 to select the baud. The baud is the rate of
data transmission between the computer and the Gilson device.
5
Click on OK to save the changes. A message box appears indicating
that the computer must be restarted before any changes become
effective.
January 1998
Appendix L
Gilson Executable (.GEX) File
You need to set up a Gilson executable (.GEX) file whenever you want
UniPoint to start or communicate with an executable .EXE file, such as
the kind created by the Gilson 719 Sampler Manager Software to control
XL version injectors.
The .GEX file tells UniPoint where the .EXE for the sampler program is
located and what type of inputs it requires. The .GEX file consists of the
following lines:
[GEX]
Command =
Prompt =
Default =
Limit =
Detailed descriptions of the lines follow.
GEX. The [GEX] header identifies the file as a .GEX file.
Command. The Command line specifies the location of the .EXE file. It
also identifies what kind, and how many, parameters are required by the
.EXE file. Each parameter is placed between brackets, {}.
To identify the type of information to enter for a parameter:
January 1998
#
Numeric field specifier. Also controls output format; i.e., {#.##}
== %.2f, {###} == %3d
*
String format specifier; i.e. {*} == %s
X
Check box; i.e. {Xp1:p2}. Returned value is p1 for unchecked, p2
checked.
r
Radio button group; i.e. “{rn:rsp1:rsp2:...:rspn}” where n is the
number of buttons in the group, followed by n response (rsp)
strings. See Prompt section below to specify individual button
labels. Returned value is selected rsp string.
L-1
c
Combination drop down/text box ; i.e. “{cn:rsp1:rsp2:...:rspn}”
where n is number of items in the combination box, followed by
n response (rsp) strings. See Prompt section below to specify
individual labels for items in a combination box. Returned
value is selected rsp string.
Fx
File/Type - This field takes a file-path of a specific type
indicated by the character immediately following the F.
Supported file types are:
C - Control Method
A - Analysis Method
G - Gilson Executable (.GEX file)
File template immediately follows the Fx; i.e. {FC Control
Method%*.gct%} specifies a control method file with an
extension of GCT. Use “%” to separate the file description from
file template(s).
S
Individual sample from a tray; i.e. {S}.
^x
Command type flag - where x specifies type of command:
^B == Buffered GSIOC
^I == Immediate GSIOC
^X == run .GEX file
User input fields may be grouped with constant text using the “|”
character. At command invocation time, if there is no user input corresponding to an input field, that input field and any constant text
grouped with it is not included in the command string.
Prompt. The Prompt line contains labels for each of the input fields.
These labels appear in UniPoint when the .GEX is identified in the
control method.
To separate the prompt strings, use the “|” symbol. If a section of the
prompt string is for a radio (or option) button, individual button labels
are separated by “@”.
If a section of the prompt string is for a radio button, the group box label
is the first element of the prompt and is separated from the individual
button labels by a “~” symbol. The button labels follow immediately
and are separated from each other by “@”, e.g. “Group Box
label~button1@button2”.
Combination box prompts are similar to radio button groups; the first
label preceding the “~” is used to label the combination box itself, e.g.
“Combination Box Label~item 1@item 2@item 3”.
L-2
January 1998
.gex file
Limit. The Limit line contains the range limits for a command parameter and specifies whether or not the user is required supply input. To
separate limits ranges use the “|” symbol. If the first character in a limit
range is “r”, a user input is required; otherwise, omit the “r”.
If the command parameter has a continuous allowed range between low
and high limits, the values are separated with “:”. If the command
parameter has a discrete number of allowed values, these values are
separated with “,”. For no limit checking, use “$”.
Example: To convey that the first parameter is optional and restricted to
the range 0 through 10, the second entry of a command has no limits,
and the required third parameter can only accept 20, 50, and 75 as legal
values, the limit string would contain:
“0:10|$|R20,50,75”
If the first character of the string is “R”, this is a required input field, else
the user may leave this field blank. If the command parameter has a
continuous allowed range between high and low limits, the high and
low values are separated with “:”. If the command parameter has a
discrete number of allowed values, separate these values with “,”.
Multiple limits ranges are delimited with “|” characters.
Note: If there is an empty field between “|”s, place a “$” between each
“|”. This indicates that the second entry of a command has no
limits, while the first parameter is restricted to the range 0
through 10 and the third parameter can only accept 20,50 and 75
as legal values, the limit string would contain:
“0:10|$|20,50,75”.
Default. The Default line contains “|” delimited default values for each
field identified in the Command line. To specify a default value for the
first Command field of 0.33, no default for the second, and “Caffeine” for
the third, the string would be:
“0.33|$|Caffeine”
example
Contents of file INJ_231.GEX created for the example 719
programINJ_231.PAS supplied with UniPoint.
[GEX]
Command= c:\gilson\gex\inj_231.exe |{#} |{#} |{#}
|{r2:“TOTAL,”PARTIAL} |{r3:“GSIOC,”CONTACT,“TIME} |{#}
Prompt = Sample Number:|Volume (ul):|Rack Code:|Inject
Mode~Total@Partial|Coordination
Mode~GSIOC@Contact@Time|Contact Num. or Time|
Default= $|30|$|“TOTAL|”GSIOC|$|
Limit = 1:80|0:3000|0:106|$|$|1:9999|
January 1998
L-3
Appendix M
UniPoint Software History
Following is a brief description of the changes made to each version of
UniPoint. Please be aware that each version includes any changes made
in prior version(s).
version 1.0
Initial release.
version 1.1
Incorporated functionality for inserting user comments into reports via
the Edit Notes command of Control Method, Analysis Method, and/or
Operations List window.
version 1.2
Added the sample tracking capability for interactive post-run display of
a sample’s chromatogram, injector tray location, and fraction collector
tray location(s).
Incorporated control of the Gilson 122 Fluorometer and 402 Syringe
Pump.
Added a Fraction Site(s) column selection to report formats in the
Analysis Method window.
Added ability to print calibration reports at run time to the report output
options in the Analysis Method window.
Added the original view tool and cross-hairs tool to the Operations
window.
Changed fraction collection begin and end symbols from a gray arrow to
a green triangle and vertical line at the start of collection and a red
triangle and vertical line at the end of collection.
Added a View menu to the Results, Calibration, and Routines windows.
Added the ability to automatically store the manual strip chart to the
output directory identified in the Run File Storage dialog.
Changed the appearance of the generic device tool in the Control
Method, Protocol, and Routines windows.
Added ability to name data channels in the analysis method without
browsing to a control method.
Provided for automatically incrementing the sample description when
generating multiple steps in the operations list.
Added the Event check box in the Contact dialog (Device menu) in the
Control Method, Protocol, and Routines window.
January 1998
M-1
Included the 715 Data Translator Software that converts 715 data files to
a format that can be read by UniPoint on the installation disks for
UniPoint Version 1.21.
version 1.3
Incorporated control of the Gilson Supercritical Fluid System.
version 1.4
Incorporated control of 233 XL Sampling Injector as both the injector
and fraction collector in a system.
Added the functionality to do continuous fraction collection.
Modified the fraction collector Stop Collection command so that it
advanced the collection head to the next tube.
Added a confirmation box that appears when closing UniPoint.
Added the ability to select multiple protocol files to be browsed into a
control method.
Added the ability to double-click in a text box and access its Browse
dialog.
Added pop-up menu (accessed via right mouse click in table pane) for
opening referenced files, copying table cells, and formatting columns.
Added capability to browse for generic protocols in the Detector dialog
and Fraction Collector dialog (Device menu) and to set events for those
protocols in the Detector Event dialog and Fraction Collector Event
dialog (Event menu) in control methods.
Added a Delay Volume text box to the Fraction Collector Options dialog
(Device menu/Fraction Collector command/Options button).
Added Tray Location error handling capability to control methods.
Added fraction site information to the Resume Run dialog (Run menu)
in the Operations window.
In the Results window, added functionality that allows the user to select
points on the plot and identify the tubes into which specific fractions
were collected.
In the Samples dialog (Edit menu) of the Results window, added
functionality that allows the user to select another sample and overlay
its chromatogram in the graph pane.
Added a pop-up menu (accessed via a right mouse click) that automatically offsets the traces in the graph pane of the Results window.
M-2
January 1998
software versions
version 1.5
Incorporated control of the VALVEMATE Valve Actuator.
Incorporated control of 215 Liquid Handler/819 Valve Actuator for
injection and/or fraction collection.
version 1.6
Provided integrated 206 fraction collector control and a new Set Collection Valve command for Gilson model 201 through 206 Fraction Collectors, and 233 XL Sampling Injector.
Provided the ability to specify custom calculations and have the results
appear in reports.
Provided integrated control of a Gilson 170 Diode Array Detector and
new manipulation and processing capabilities for acquired spectral
data.
Removed integrated control of a Gilson 160 Diode Array Detector.
(Note: The software still provides a File Import command in the Results
window to select and view traces in a DAD data file.)
Provided the ability to generate operations list steps via the Results
window.
Provided miscellaneous user interface changes which included:
• a new Options dialog (accessed via the File menu).
• multiple step generation in the operations list by browsing to a tray
file.
• replacing the Calibrator, Unknown, Calibrator Summary, and
Unknown Summary commands in the analysis method's Report
menu with the Column Formats command.
• the ability to turn on/off viewing and printing of the components of
the analysis report’s annotation.
• the ability to turn on/off viewing of fraction site labels in the Results
window.
• the ability to normalize traces in the Results window.
• additional tools in the Analysis windows toolbar: channel scales
tool, peak table tool, report type tool, and report output tool.
• additional tools in the Results window: integration tool, peak table
tool, analysis channel tool, and spectral library tool.
January 1998
M-3
Index
Symbols
215_ROUT.GIR file 15-13
715 Data Translator H-1
719 Sampler Manager L-1
A
Absolute error 7-14, G-1
Actual amount 7-25
Adjust baseline tool 11-4, 13-3
All valleys baseline construction 7-8
Amount F-1
Amount % F-2
Analysis channel tool 11-5
Analysis conditions, setting 7-4
Analysis methods 2-2
analysis channel 7-11
channel scales 7-10
integration events 7-5
peak table 7-13
reasons for missing peaks G-4
setting analysis conditions 7-4
window 7-2
Annotation
Analysis Method window 7-2, 7-4
Calibration window 12-2, 12-3
changing text font 5-31
Control Method window 6-2, 6-4
copying text 5-31
displaying 5-30
moving 5-30
Operations window 8-2, 8-4
Protocol windows 14-2, 14-3
Re-Analysis window 13-2, 13-3
Results window 11-2, 11-5
Routines windows 15-2, 15-3
sizing 5-30
Archive extract 17-2
Area % F-2, F-3
Area percent report type 7-22
Arrow tool 8-3, 11-4, 12-3, 13-3
Asterisk (*) in device description 14-5, 15-6
Auto range 7-11
B
Back resolution F-3
Back slope F-3
Baseline construction techniques 7-7
Batch re-analysis
determining if it's required 13-1
window 13-2
Browse feature 5-37
C
Calculations
amount F-1
January 1998
amount % F-2
area % F-2
asymmetry F-3
back resolution F-3
back slope F-3
capacity factor F-3
coefficient of determination F-3
coefficient of variation F-3
correlation coefficient F-3
end value F-4
front resolution F-4
front slope F-4
height F-4
height % F-4
mean F-4
peak end time F-4
peak start time F-4
peak width at 10% height F-5
peak width at half height F-4
percent concentration F-5
plates F-5
retention time F-5
standard deviation F-5
standard error F-5
start value F-5
tailing factor F-5
Calibration
curve fits 7-24
indicating how calibrators will be injected 7-24
using existing calibration file to generate amount 724
Calibration file, entering in analysis method 7-25
Calibrations 2-2
building 12-4
changing curve fitting method 12-6
determining area/height for point on curve 12-6
disabling repeat 12-8
enabling repeat 12-8
error messages 12-10
getting file information for a repeat 12-7
invalid calibration message 12-10
merging 12-9
opening file 12-5
selecting another calibration 12-9
selecting another peak 12-8
viewing 12-5
window 12-2
zooming in on plot 12-7
Capacity factor F-3
Channel scales tool 7-3
Chromatography calculations
amount F-1
amount % F-2
area % F-2, F-3
back resolution F-3
Index-1
back slope F-3
capacity factor F-3
coefficient of determination F-3
coefficient of variation F-3
correlation coefficient F-3
end value F-4
front resolution F-4
front slope F-4
height F-4
height % F-4
mean F-4
peak end time F-4
peak start time F-4
peak width at 10% height F-5
peak width at half height F-4
percent concentration F-5
plates F-5
retention time F-5
standard deviation F-5
standard error F-5
start value F-5
tailing factor F-5
Coefficient of determination F-3
Coefficient of variation F-3
Columns (in table pane)
changing an attribute 5-15
changing column width 5-14
changing font 5-17
finding text 5-19
inserting a column 5-16
removing a column 5-16
renaming a column 5-16
replacing text 5-20
viewing attributes 5-15
Compressibility 6-10
CONFIG.SYS file J-1
Configuration checks A-7
Configuration file
checking before creating control method
modifying A-3
reviewing software default A-2
scanning GSIOC for devices A-5
searching for A-4
setting up 1-7
Contact error 6-40
Contact tool 6-3, 14-3, 15-3
Contacts
assigning descriptions 6-6
commands 6-23
scheduling timed events 6-18
Continuous fraction collection 6-31
Control methods 2-2
assigning device descriptions 6-6
checking configuration 6-5
default 9-2
Index-2
description 6-1
synchronizing injector protocol 14-11
window 6-2
Converting data files, 715 to UniPoint H-1
Copying file 5-8, 5-9
Correlation coefficient F-3
Creating
directory 5-4
file 5-5
Cross-hairs tool 8-3, 11-4, 12-3
Cubic curve fit 7-24
Custom calculation
specifying in peak label 7-38
specifying in report annotation 7-37
specifying in report column 7-34
D
6-5
Data
analyzing 11-16
comparing traces acquired for different samples
11
generating report file for 11-31
opening file 11-8
peak integration techniques 11-27
sample search 11-12
Data and report files, description 11-1
Data channels
start and stop collection commands 6-22
strip chart options 6-11
Data channels tool 6-3, 14-3, 15-3
Default baseline construction 7-7
Default control method 9-2
Deleting
directory 5-9
file 5-9
Detector
command lists 6-23
Detector tool 6-3, 14-3, 15-3
Device control, overview 6-1
Device driver J-1
Devices
commands 6-21
DILN.GIP file 14-12
DILN_RVR.GIP file 14-12
Dilutor
assigning description 6-6
command list 6-29
11-
January 1998
index
Directory and file organization
Directory maintenance
creating 5-4
deleting 5-9
Disconnected message 8-4
2-4
E
End value F-4
Error handling
control methods 6-40
Events, run-time 5-27
Export
calibrations 17-10
chromatogram data 17-6
reports 17-8
Extensions, listing C-1
External standard report type 7-22
Extracting information from data file
F
FC233PAR.GIP 14-13
FC233TOT.GIP 14-13
File extensions, listing C-1
File maintenance
copying 5-8, 5-9
creating 5-5
deleting 5-9
opening 5-6
saving 5-7, 5-8
Font
setting default 5-10
Font dialog 5-10
Format Columns dialog 5-14
Fraction collector
continuous collection 6-31, 8-12
monitor channel 6-16
setting up operations list for 8-12
specific site collection 6-31, 8-12
tray file 6-16
Fraction collector tool 6-3, 14-3, 15-3
Front resolution F-4
Front slope F-4
Full-scale tool 8-3, 11-4, 12-3, 13-3
G
Generic device tool 6-3, 15-3
Generic tool 14-3
GEX file L-1
Gilson executable file L-1
Gilson-supplied protocols 14-12
Gilson-supplied routines files
215_ROUT.GIR 15-13
INJ_ROUT.GIR 15-13
GILSON.SYS file J-1
January 1998
17-2
Go tool 8-3, 13-3
Graph pane
changing font 5-24
displaying 5-22
displaying gridlines 5-28
displaying legend 5-29
moving graph 5-23
moving legend 5-29
moving summary graph 5-24
overview 5-21
Protocol windows 14-2
removing gridlines 5-28
removing items from display 5-28
Routines windows 15-2
setting attributes 5-26
sizing 5-22
sizing graph 5-23
sizing summary graph 5-23
viewing summary graph 5-23
GSIOC 3-1
GSIOC Configuration Utility K-1
GSIOC error 6-40
GSIOC utility
using within Windows 3.1 I-3
using within Windows 95 I-1
GSIOC-to-RS-232 Converter
command list 6-35
H
Height F-4
Height % F-4
Height percent report type 7-22
Help
on-line help 2-1
technical notes 2-1
Horizontal baseline construction 7-8
I
Import 17-3
chromatogram from non-Gilson detector
INJ_CENL.GIP file 14-12
INJ_PARL.GIP file 14-12
INJ_ROUT.GIR file 15-13
INJ_TOTL.GIP file 14-12
Injection pump
setting compressibility and refill 6-15
17-5
Index-3
Injector
additional options 6-14
command list 6-27
tray file 6-14
Injector tool 6-3, 14-3, 15-3
Integration, enabling/disabling 7-6
Integration tool 7-3, 11-5
Internal standard peak 7-18
Internal standard report type 7-22
Interrupting a run 9-7
Invalid calibration message 12-10
Invalid command message 6-3, 6-8, 14-2, 15-2
Invalid device message 6-8
K
Key utility E-1
L
Leak error 6-40
Legend
changing lines or symbols 5-29
displaying 5-29
moving 5-29
Linear curve fit 7-24
Log file 5-6, 5-34, 9-11
M
Magnifying glass 8-3
Magnifying glass tool 11-4, 12-3, 13-3
Manual control method 10-2
checking and controlling devices 3-5
description of 3-1
setting up 3-2
Manual system control
contacts 10-7
detector 10-8
fraction collector 10-8
generic devices 10-8
GSIOC command strings 10-9
injector and dilutor 10-8
menu commands 10-1
pumps and manometric module 10-3
strip chart 10-5
Mean F-4
Menu bar
Analysis Method window 7-2
Index-4
Calibration window 12-2
Control Method window 6-2
Operations window 8-2
Re-Analysis window 13-2
Tray Editor window 16-2
Method Executor
manually starting 9-2
Method executor 9-2
Method is incompatible with data message 12-10
Microsoft Windows 1-1
Installing UniPoint under Windows 95 1-2
Installing UniPoint within Windows 3.1 1-3
using its interface 4-1
Missing peaks G-4
MIX.GIP file 14-13
Mobile phase flow, stopping 9-7
Mobile phase settings 6-9
Mobile Phase tool 6-3
Move trace tool 11-4
N
Navigator 5-2
Navigator tool 6-3, 7-3, 8-3, 11-4, 12-3, 13-3, 143, 15-3
Next valley baseline construction 7-8
No Control Method - Edit Only Mode message 8-4
Nominal amount 7-25
Non-reference peaks G-6
Notes text editor 5-34
O
Offsetting acquired traces 7-11
Open dialog 5-6
Open tool 6-3, 7-3, 8-3, 11-4, 12-3, 13-3, 14-3, 15-3
Opening file 5-6
shortcut 5-7
workspace 5-6
Operations 2-2
entering sample IDs 8-15
setting up list
express entry 8-6
modifying using edit menu 8-13
step entry 8-8
window 8-2
Operations list setup 8-5
before creating the list 8-5
express setup 8-6
modifying using Edit menu 8-15
setting up list for fraction collection 8-12
step-by-step entry 8-8
using Results window to create 8-13
using tray file to generate 8-11
Organization, directory and file 2-4
January 1998
index
Original view tool
Overview
diagram 2-3
software 2-2
8-3, 11-5
P
Password protection 5-15
indicating new password D-3
removing D-3
setting up D-2
unlocking columns D-4
Paste special command 8-15, 13-10
Pause tool 8-3, 13-3
Pausing a run 9-7
Peak area, description 7-23
Peak end time F-4
Peak font, changing 5-25
Peak height, description 7-23
Peak not identified message 12-10
Peak sensitivity 7-6
Peak start time F-4
Peak table 7-13
background removal 7-21
entering calibration amounts 7-16
how the software uses to analyze data G-4
indicating internal standard(s) 7-18
naming peaks 7-14
Peak table tool 7-3, 11-5
Peak width 7-6
Peak width at 10% height F-5
Peak width at half height F-4
Peaks, grouping report information for 7-19
Percent concentration F-5
Percent normalization report type 7-22
Peristaltic pump
command list 6-22
Plates F-5
Point to Point curve fit 7-24
Point to Point through Zero curve fit 7-24
Preloaded calibration file 7-25
Pressure error 6-40
Pressure regulator
Pressure units A-6
Print tool 6-3, 7-3, 8-3, 11-4, 12-3, 13-3, 14-3, 15-3
Printing
selecting what to print 5-42
specifying printer options 5-41
starting 5-42
what to do before printing 5-41
Protocol
windows 14-2
January 1998
Protocols 2-2
assigning descriptions to devices 14-5
checking to see if it works 14-14
description of Gilson-supplied protocols 14-12
DILN.GIP file 14-12
DILN_RVR.GIP 14-12
FC233PAR.GIP file 14-13
FC233TOT.GIP file 14-13
identifying in control method 6-14
INJ_CENL.GIP file 14-12
INJ_PARL.GIP file 14-12
INJ_TOTL.GIP file 14-12
issuing commands 14-6
loading routines files into 14-5
MIX.GIP file 14-13
overview of creating 14-4
RINSE.GIP 14-13
saving 14-10
synchronizing injector protocol and control
method 14-11
updating configuration 14-13
using variables 14-8
Pump flow, stopping 9-7
Pumps
constructing profile 6-20
previewing gradient 6-21
Q
Quadratic curve fit
7-24
R
Re-Analysis 2-2
adjusting baseline during processing 13-14
determining if it's required 13-1
executing 13-14
indicating baseline adjustment 13-11
pausing 13-14
previewing 13-13
resuming 13-15
reviewing where generated files are stored 13-11
setting up list
before you create or setup the list 13-4
express entry 13-5
modifying using Edit menu 13-10
step entry 13-7
stopping 13-15
window 13-2
Reference peak 7-14
Reference peaks G-5
Relative error 7-14, G-1
Report output tool 7-3
Report type tool 7-3
Index-5
Reports
annotating 7-28
customizing 7-31, F-1
generating at run time 7-26
opening file 11-6
specifying custom calculation 7-34
specifying layout 7-27
Results 2-2
analyzing data or analyzing it a different way 11-16
difference between data and report files 11-1
linking data to a calibration file 11-18
linking data to an analysis method 11-16
linking to a control method 11-20
manipulating graph and table 11-22
opening data file 11-8
opening data file using sample description 11-12
opening report file 11-6
overlaying (or merging) additional data 11-14
window 11-2
Retention time F-5
void volume time 7-20
Retention time windows G-1
resolving overlapping windows G-3
setting parameters for G-2
Retention times
tracking 7-20
RINSE.GIP file 14-13
Routines 2-2
215_ROUT.GIR file 15-13
assigning descriptions to devices 15-6
copying steps between routines 15-9
creating new routine 15-9
deleting routines 15-9
INJ_ROUT.GIR file 15-13
issuing commands 15-7
overview of creating 15-4
saving routines 15-12
updating routines' configuration 15-14
using variables in 15-10
viewing and modifying 15-8
windows 15-2
Rows (in table pane)
changing the font 5-17
copying rows 5-18
deleting rows 5-18
finding text 5-19
pasting rows 5-18
replacing text 5-20
Run
interrupting 9-7
manipulating run-time graph 9-4
pausing 9-7
resuming 9-8
Index-6
reviewing where run-time files are stored 8-16
shutting down HPLC system after the run 9-11
shutting down system after 9-10
starting 9-3
status of UniPoint after the run 9-10
stopping 9-8
stopping pumps when finished 9-7
viewing log file 9-11
S
Sample amount, description 7-25
Sample description 11-12
Sample tracking
after the run B-6
before the run
analysis method B-5
control method B-3
injector protocol/routines setup B-2
description B-1
Save As dialog 5-7, 5-8
Save tool 6-3, 7-3, 8-3, 11-4, 12-3, 13-3, 14-3, 15-3
Saving file 5-7, 5-8
Security key 1-1, E-1, J-1
Shutting down the HPLC system 9-11
Software
checking communication with devices 3-1
getting started 3-1
getting version 5-46
installation 1-2
overview 2-2
starting 1-5
Software history N-1
Specific site fraction collection 6-31
Spectral library tool 11-5
Standard deviation F-5
Standard error F-5
Start value F-5
Starting a run 9-3
Starting the software 1-5
Status bar 7-4, 11-5
Analysis Method window 7-2
Results window 11-2
Tray Editor window 16-3
Status box
Stop pumps tool 8-3
Stop tool 8-3, 13-3
Stopping a run 9-8
January 1998
index
Strip chart 10-5
Summary graph
Results window 11-4
Supercritical Fluid System 1-5, 3-3
Symbols for run-time events 5-27
Synchronizing injector protocol and control
method 14-11
System configuration checks A-7
System Configuration file
setup
scanning GSIOC for devices A-5
System configuration file
modifying A-3
reviewing software default A-2
searching for A-4
System startup
setting up manual control method 3-2
System Status message 8-4
System tool 6-3, 14-3, 15-3
System units A-6
T
Table pane
Calibration window 12-2
changing a column attribute 5-15
changing column widths 5-14
changing font 5-17
copying rows 5-18
deleting rows 5-18
displaying the table pane 5-12
"error" message in Results window 11-3
finding text in 5-19
"high" message in Results window 11-3
inserting a column 5-16
"low" message in Results window 11-3
"N/A" message in Results window 11-3
overview 5-12
pasting rows 5-18
removing a column 5-16
renaming a column 5-16
replacing text in 5-20
sizing the table pane 5-13
viewing column attributes 5-15
Tailing factor F-5
Tangent skim baseline construction 7-9
Technical notes 2-1
Temperature device
January 1998
command list 6-34
setting limits 6-17
Temperature error 6-40
Temperature units A-6
Template
Tray Editor window 16-2, 16-3
Text editor
adding text 5-34, 5-35
changing font 5-35
copying text 5-34
deleting text 5-35
editing text 5-34
inserting text 5-35
pasting text into 5-36
printing text 5-35
sizing its box 5-36
Toolbar
displaying tool hints 5-33
moving 5-33
removing from display 5-33
selecting default arrangement 5-32
sizing 5-33
Tray Editor window 16-2, 16-3
Traces
offsetting at acquisition 7-11
scaling 7-11
setting color 7-12
setting minimum and maximum at acquisition
Track retention times 7-20
Tracking samples
after the run B-6
before the run
analysis method B-5
control method B-3
injector protocol/routines setup B-2
description B-1
Transferring information 5-44
Translating data, 715 to UniPoint H-1
Tray editor 16-1
identifying custom racks 16-18
managing tray files 16-14
overview of creating tray file 16-1
printing tray files 16-16
7-11
Index-7
setting up file 16-4
assigning zone and number to tubes 16-8
choosing template 16-4
defining racks 16-5
identifying zone names 16-7
starting 16-2
viewing techniques 16-11
window 16-2
Tray file
using to generate operations list 8-11
Tray file, identifying in control method 6-14
Troubleshooting
if the software doesn't start 1-6
invalid calibration message 12-10
invalid command message 6-3
method incompatible with data message 12-10
peak not identified message 12-10
True Type font 5-10
U
UniPoint icon 1-5
UniPoint startup screen 1-5
UniPoint versions N-1
Utilities
715 Data Translator H-1
GSIOC Utility I-1
K-1
V
Valve actuator
command list 6-33
setting timed events 6-18
Variables
analysis methods 7-39
control methods 6-38
Versions of UniPoint N-1
Void volume retention time 7-20
W
Wait time-out error 6-40
Workspace
arranging elements in 5-38
opening 5-6, 5-40
overview 5-38
saving 5-39
Index-8
January 1998

Gilson-UniPoint-System-Software-User

Transcription

Similar documents

Published in Western Horseman - July, 2001

Customize Your Profile - Division of Student Affairs

View our Events Brochure

TALLULA PRIVATE EVENTS | FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

Untitled - CooGiE`s Cafe Santa Monica

TRC-NW300 Capture Settings

A View of the New MUOnline Blackboard Learn 9.1

ZAGWEB – Registration and Payment for Classes

Itinerariul Dialog